OOWWNNEERR''SS MMAANNUUAALL
OOppeerraattiioonn
MMaaiinntteennaannccee
SSppeecciiffiiccaattiioonnss
All information in this Owner’s Manual is current at the time of pub-
lication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at
any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be
carried out.
This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.
As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply
to your specific vehicle.
F2
Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect
the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate condi-
tions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.Certain modifications may also be in vio-
lation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal
or state agencies.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is
possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely
affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio
manufacturer’s instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or
special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
DANGER indicates a hazardous situa-
tion which, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a hazardous situ-
ation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situa-
tion which, if not avoided, could result
in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
NOTICE indicates a situation which, if
not avoided, could result in vehicle
damage.
NOTICE
WARNING
F4
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI.We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of dis-
criminating people who drive HYUNDAIS. We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construc-
tion of each HYUNDAI we build.
Your Owner’s Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with
your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner’s Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle.
This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle’s con-
trols and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.
This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle.It is recom-
mended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.HYUNDAI deal-
ers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
This Owner’s Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so you
can refer to it at any time.The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with impor-
tant operating, safety and maintenance information.
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
Copyright 2017 HYUNDAI Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored
in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI
Motor America.
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that
do not meet HYUNDAI specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the
specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner’s Manual.
CAUTION
F5
1.What are HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts?
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the
same parts used by HYUNDAI
Motor Company to manufacture
vehicles. They are designed and
tested for the optimum safety, per-
formance, and reliability to our cus-
tomers.
2.Why should you use genuine
parts?
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are engi-
neered and built to meet rigid man-
ufacturing requirements. Damage
caused by using imitation, counter-
feit or used salvage parts is not
covered under the HYUNDAI New
Vehicle Limited Warranty or any
other HYUNDAI warranty.
In addition, any damage to or fail-
ure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts
caused by the installation or failure
of an imitation, counterfeit or used
salvage part is not covered by any
HYUNDAI Warranty.
3. How can you tell if you are pur-
chasing HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts?
Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts Logo on the package (see
below).
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts exported
to the U.S.are packaged with labels
written only in English.
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only
sold through authorized HYUNDAI
Dealerships.
GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS
F6
Introduction
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. To gain an
overview of the contents of your
Owner’s Manual, use the Table of
Contents in the front of the manual.
The first page of each Chapter
includes a detailed Table of Contents
of the Topics in that Chapter.
To quickly locate information about
your vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an alphabet-
ical list of what is in this manual and
the page number where it can be
found.
For your convenience, we have
incorporated tabs on the right-hand
page edges. These tabs are coded
with the Chapter titles to assist you
with navigating through the manual.
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. This Owner’s
Manual provides you with many safe-
ty precautions and operating proce-
dures. This information alerts you to
potential hazards that may hurt you
or others, as well as damage to your
vehicle.
Safety messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
these hazards and what to do to
avoid or reduce the risks.
Warnings and instructions contained
in this manual are for your safety.
Failure to follow safety warnings and
instructions can lead to serious injury
or death.
Throughout this manual DANGER,
WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and
the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will
be used.
This is the safety alert sym-
bol. It is used to alert you to
potential physical injury haz-
ards. Obey all safety mes-
sages that follow this symbol
to avoid possible injury or
death. The safety alert sym-
bol precedes the signal words
DANGER, WARNING and
CAUTION.
HHOOWW TTOO UUSSEE TTHHIISS MMAANNUUAALL
DANGER indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious
injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
SSAAFFEETTYY MMEESSSSAAGGEESS
F7
Introduction
FFUUEELL RREEQQUUIIRREEMMEENNTTSS
NOTICE indicates a situation
which, if not avoided, could result
in vehicle damage.
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
mize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an octane
number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher.(Do not
use methanol blended fuels)
To prevent damage to the engine
and engine components, never
add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified.
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for additional information.
Gasoline containing alcohol or
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol) are being marketed along with or
instead of leaded or unleaded gaso-
line.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system, engine con-
trol system and emission control sys-
tem.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
NOTICE
NOTICE
CAUTION indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in minor or moder-
ate injury.
CAUTION
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
WARNING
F8
Introduction
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufac-
tured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-
ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine perform-
ance and damage to your vehicle’s
engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI
recommends that customers do not
use fuel with an ethanol content
exceeding 10 percent.
To prevent damage to your vehicle’s
engine and fuel system:
• Never use gasohol which con-
tains methanol.
• Never use gasohol containing
more than 10% ethanol.
• Never use leaded fuel or leaded
gasohol.
• Never use "E85" fuel.
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty does not cover damage
to the fuel system or any perform-
ance problems caused by the use
of "E85" fuel.
Other fuels
Using fuels such as;
- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
- Other metallic additives contained
fuels,
may cause damage to the engine by
plugging, misfiring, poor accelera-
tion, engine stalling, catalyst melting,
abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduc-
tion.
- The Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
Damage to the fuel system or per-
formance problem caused by the
use of these fuels may not be cov-
ered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful
manganese-based fuel additives
such as
MMT (
Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl
)
.
HYUNDAI does not recommend the
use of gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and affect your emis-
sion control system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on
the cluster may come on.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasolines treated with
detergent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which help pre-
vent deposit formation in the engine.
These gasolines will help the engine
run cleaner and enhance performance
of the Emission Control System. For
more information on TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, please go to the
website (www.toptiergas.com).
NOTICE
NOTICE
F9
Introduction
For customers who do not use TOP
Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, addi-
tives that you can buy separately
may be added to the gasoline.If TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is not avail-
able, one bottle of additive added to
the fuel tank at every 7,500 miles or
12 months is recommended.
Additives are available from your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer along
with information on how to use them.
Do not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
No special break-in period is needed.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you
may add to the performance, econo-
my and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow.Varying engine speed is need-
ed to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
VVEEHHIICCLLEE BBRREEAAKK--IINN PPRROOCCEESSSS
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Items contained in motor vehi-
cles or emitted from them are
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth
defects or reproductive harm.
These include:
• Gasoline and its vapors
• Engine exhaust
• Used engine oil
• Interior passenger compart-
ment components and materi-
als
• Component parts which are
subject to heat and wear
In addition, battery posts, termi-
nals and related accessories
contain lead, lead compounds
and other chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.
WARNING
F10
Introduction
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
These data can help provide a bet-
ter understanding of the circum-
stances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of per-
sonally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investiga-
tion.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
VVEEHHIICCLLEE DDAATTAA CCOOLLLLEECCTTIIOONN AANNDD EEVVEENNTT DDAATTAA RREECCOORRDDEERRSS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety system of your vehicle
Convenient features of your vehicle
Multimedia System
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications, Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
Index
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F11
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Exterior overview (I) .............................................1-2
Exterior overview (II) ............................................1-3
Interior overview....................................................1-4
Instrument panel overview...................................1-5
Engine compartment .............................................1-6
1-2
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((II))
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Hood..................................................3-46
2. Headlamp................................3-116/7-80
3. DRL/Position lamp...................3-122/7-86
4.Tires and wheels.........................7-44/8-4
5. Side view mirror.................................3-34
6. Panoramic sunroof ............................3-42
7. Front windshield wiper blades...........7-39
8.Windows............................................3-38
9. Battery charging door .........................H-9
OLEH016001L
■ Front view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-3
Your vehicle at a glance
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((IIII))
1
1. Antenna................................................4-2
2. Doors....................................................3-9
3. Fuel filler lid........................................3-53
4. Rear parking assist system..............3-131
5. Rear combination lamp ......................7-87
6. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-92
7. Rearview camera .............................3-130
8.Trunk...................................................3-47
OLFH014002L
■ Rear view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-4
Your vehicle at a glance
IINNTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW
1. Door lock/unlock button ......................3-9
2. Driver position memory system ........3-14
3. Side view mirror control
switch ................................................3-34
4. Central door lock switch ....................3-10
5. Power window switches ....................3-38
6. Power window lock button ................3-41
7. Hood release lever ............................3-46
8. Instrument panel illumination
control switch ....................................3-61
9. Blind spot detection system button*....5-48
10. Lane departure warning system
button* ................................................5-56
11. Fuel filler door opener button..........3-53
12.Trunk release button........................3-47
13. ESC OFF button..............................5-34
14. Fuse box..........................................7-62
15. Steering wheel ................................3-16
16. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever......3-17
17. Seat ..................................................2-4
18. Brake pedal
19. Accelerator pedal
* : if equipped
OLF014003N
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW
1-5
Your vehicle at a glance
1
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1. Light control/Turn signals..............3-116
2. Steering wheel audio controls*/
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
hands-free controls*..........................4-3
3. Instrument cluster ..........................3-60
4. Horn................................................3-18
5. Driver’s front air bag........................2-49
6.Wiper/Washer................................3-128
7. Cruise controls* ..............................5-60
8. Engine Start/Stop button ..................5-5
9. Automatic transaxle
..........................5-12
10. Drive mode integrated control
system ..................................5-41/5-43
11. Rear parking assist system ........3-131
12. EPB (Electronic Parking Brake)* ..5-22
13. AUTO HOLD ................................5-28
14. Audio system/Navigation system....4-4
15. Digital Clock................................3-159
16. Climate control system ..............3-136
17. Power outlet................................3-157
18. AUX, USB and iPod
®
port ..............4-2
19. Passenger’s front air bag..............2-49
20. Glove box....................................3-154
21. HEV button ..................................H-26
* : if equipped
OLFH016004N
■ Type A
■ Type B
1-6
Your vehicle at a glance
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OLFH014005K
1. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-28
2. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-27
3. Radiator cap .....................................7-29
4. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-30
5. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-33
6. Air cleaner.........................................7-35
7. Inverter coolant reservoir..................7-31
8.Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....7-34
9. Fuse box...........................................7-60
Safety system of your vehicle
Important Safety Precautions..............................2-2
Always Wear Your Seat Belt ..........................................2-2
Restrain All Children.........................................................2-2
Air Bag Hazards.................................................................2-2
Driver Distraction ..............................................................2-2
Control Your Speed...........................................................2-3
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition............................2-3
Seats ........................................................................2-4
Safety Precautions ...........................................................2-5
Front Seats .........................................................................2-6
Rear Seats.........................................................................2-12
Head Restraints ...............................................................2-16
Seat Warmers and Air Ventilation Seats...................2-20
Seat Belts..............................................................2-24
Seat Belt Safety Precautions.......................................2-24
Seat Belt Warning Light ................................................2-25
Seat Belt Restraint System...........................................2-26
Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions...................2-32
Care of Seat Belts...........................................................2-35
Child Restraint System (CRS).............................2-36
Children Always in the Rear.........................................2-36
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-37
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-39
Air Bag -
Advanced Supplemental Restraint System.......2-47
Where Are the Air Bags?..............................................2-49
How Does the Air Bag System Operate?..................2-53
What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates................2-57
Occupant Classification System (OCS).......................2-58
Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? ........2-63
SRS Care............................................................................2-68
Additional Safety Precautions .....................................2-69
Air Bag Warning Labels.................................................2-70
This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.
It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.
Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.
2
2-2
You will find many safety precautions
and recommendations throughout
this section, and throughout this man-
ual.The safety precautions in this sec-
tion are among the most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of accidents. Air bags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air bags,
ALWAYS make sure you and your
passengers wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
Restrain All Children
All children under age 13 should ride
in your vehicle properly restrained in
a rear seat, not the front seat.Infants
and small children should be
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint. Larger children should use
a booster seat with the lap/shoulder
belt until they can use the seat belt
properly without a booster seat.
Air Bag Hazards
While air bags can save lives, they
can also cause serious or fatal
injuries to occupants who sit too
close to them, or who are not prop-
erly restrained. Infants, young chil-
dren, and shorter adults are at the
greatest risk of being injured by an
inflating air bag. Follow all instruc-
tions and warnings in this manual.
Driver Distraction
Driver distraction presents a serious
and potentially deadly danger, espe-
cially for inexperienced drivers.Safety
should be the first concern when
behind the wheel and drivers need to
be aware of the wide array of potential
distractions, such as drowsiness,
reaching for objects, eating, personal
grooming, other passengers, and
using cellular phones.
Drivers can become distracted when
they take their eyes and attention off
the road or their hands off the wheel
to focus on activities other than driv-
ing.To reduce your risk of distraction
or getting into an accident:
IIMMPPOORRTTAANNTT SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS
Safety system of your vehicle
2-3
Safety system of your vehicle
• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices
(i.e., MP3 players, phones, naviga-
tion units, etc.) when your vehicle is
parked or safely stopped.
• ONLY use your mobile device when
allowed by laws and when conditions
permit safe use. NEVER text or
email while driving. Most states have
laws prohibiting drivers from texting.
Some states and cities also prohibit
drivers from using handheld phones.
• NEVER let the use of a mobile
device distract you from driving.You
have a responsibility to your passen-
gers and others on the road to
always drive safely, with your hands
on the wheel as well as your eyes
and attention on the road.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current condi-
tions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical
failure can be extremely hazardous.To
reduce the possibility of such prob-
lems, check your tire pressures and
condition frequently, and perform all
regularly scheduled maintenance.
2
2-4
SSEEAATTSS
Safety system of your vehicle
OLFH034060
Front seats
1. Seat sliding forward or rearward
adjustment
2. backseat angle adjustment
3. Seat cushion height adjustment
4. Lumbar support adjustment*
5. Seat warmer/Air ventilation seat*
6. Head restraint
Rear seats
7. Seat warmer*
8. Armrest
9. Carrying long/narrow cargo*
10. Seat folding lever*
11. Head restraint
* : if equipped
Power seat
Manual seat
Safety Precautions
Adjusting the seats so that you are sit-
ting in a safe, comfortable position
plays an important role in driver and
passenger safety together with the
seat belts and air bags in an accident.
Air bags
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. Sitting too close to an air bag
greatly increases the risk of injury in
the event the air bag inflates.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends
that drivers allow at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and their chest.
Seat belts
Always fasten your seat belt before
starting any trip.
At all times, passengers should sit
upright and be properly restrained.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in appropriate child restraint
systems.Children who have outgrown
a booster seat and adults must be
restrained using the seat belts.
Do not use a cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and the passenger. The passen-
ger’s hips may slide under the
lap portion of the seat belt during
an accident or a sudden stop.
Serious or fatal internal injuries
could result because the seat
belt cannot operate properly.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following pre-
cautions:
• Adjust the driver’s seat as far to
the rear as possible while main-
taining the ability to maintain
full control of the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger seat
as far to the rear as possible.
• Hold the steering wheel by the
rim with hands at the 9 o’clock
and 3 o’clock positions to mini-
mize the risk of injuries to your
hands and arms.
• NEVER place anything or any-
one between the steering wheel
and the air bag.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place feet or legs on the
dashboard to minimize the risk
of leg injuries.
WARNING
2-5
Safety system of your vehicle
2
2-6
Safety system of your vehicle
Front Seats
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat belt:
• NEVER use one seat belt for
more than one occupant.
• Always position the backseat
upright with the lap portion of
the seat belt snug and low
across the hips.
• NEVER allow children or small
infants to ride in a passenger’s
lap.
• Do not route the seat belt
across your neck,across sharp
edges, or reroute the shoulder
strap away from your body.
• Do not allow the seat belt to
become caught or jammed.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat:
• NEVER attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. The seat could respond
with unexpected movement
and may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an acci-
dent.
• Do not place anything under
the front seats. Loose objects
in the driver’s foot area could
interfere with the operation of
the foot pedals, causing an
accident.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
and proper locking of the back-
seat.
• Do not place a cigarette lighter
on the floor or seat. When you
operate the seat, gas may exit
out of the lighter causing a fire.
(Continued)
WARNING
To prevent injury:
• Do not adjust your seat while
wearing your seat belt.
Moving the seat cushion for-
ward may cause strong pres-
sure on your abdomen.
• Do not allow your hands or
fingers to get caught in the
seat mechanisms while the
seat is moving.
CAUTION
(Continued)
• Use extreme caution when
picking up small objects
trapped under the seats or
between the seat and the cen-
ter console.Your hands might
be cut or injured by the edges
of the seat mechanism.
2-7
Safety system of your vehicle
Manual adjustment
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment
lever and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place. Move
forward and rearward without using
the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
Backseat angle
To recline the backseat:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
backseat lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the backseat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the backseat is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the backseat to
lock.)
Reclining backseat
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protection of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your backseat.
2
OLF034003N
OLF034002N
NEVER ride with a reclined
backseat when the vehicle is
moving.
Riding with a reclined backseat
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
Drivers and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the backseats upright.
WARNING
2-8
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the backseat is reclined, the
shoulder belt is not as effective
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you.During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the backseat is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Seat cushion height
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
• Push down on the lever several
times, to lower the seat cushion.
• Pull up on the lever several times,
to raise the seat cushion.
Power adjustment
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion.Before
driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so that you can easily control
the steering wheel, foot pedals and
controls on the instrument panel.
Safety system of your vehicle
OLF034004N
NEVER allow children in the
vehicle unattended. The power
seats are operable when the
engine is turned off.
WARNING
2-9
Safety system of your vehicle
2
To prevent damage to the seats:
• Always stop adjusting the seats
when the seat has been adjust-
ed as far forward or rearward as
possible.
• Do not adjust the seats longer
than necessary when the engine
is turned off. This may result in
unnecessary battery drain.
• Do not operate two or more
seats at the same time.This may
result in an electrical malfunc-
tion.
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Backseat angle
To recline the backseat:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the back-
seat reaches the desired position.
NOTICE
OLF034005N OLF034006N
2-10
Reclining backseat
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your backseat.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the backseat is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you.During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the backseat is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Seat cushion height
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
1. Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or push down to
lower the front part of the seat
cushion.Pull the rear portion of the
control switch up to raise or push
down to lower the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Safety system of your vehicle
NEVER ride with a reclined back-
seat when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined backseat
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a
collision or sudden stop.
Driver and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the backseats upright.
WARNING
OLF034007N
2-11
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the lumbar support switch.
• Press the front portion of the switch
(1) to increase support or the rear por-
tion of the switch (2) to decrease sup-
port.
• Move the support position up and
down by pressing the switch (3) or (4).
According to the equipped feature, the
lumbar support does not operate up or
down when the lumbar support is in
the rearmost position.
In this case, to use the system, slight-
ly increase support by pushing the
front portion of the switch (1).
Backseat pocket
The backseat pocket is provided on
the back of the front backseats.
OLF034008N
OLF034022
To prevent the Occupant
Classification System from mal-
functioning:
Do not hang onto the front pas-
senger seat while the vehicle is
operating.
WARNING
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the backseat pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure occupants.
CAUTION
2-12
Safety system of your vehicle
Rear Seats
Folding the rear seat (if equipped)
The rear backseats can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
To fold down the rear backseat:
1. Set the front backseat to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear head restraints to
the lowest position.
• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
backseat while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper
seating position and no seat
belts are available for use.
This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
• Objects carried on the folded
down backseat should not
extend higher than the top of
the front backseats. This
could allow cargo to slide for-
ward and cause injury or dam-
age during sudden stops.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
•
Do not put objects in the cen-
ter lower part of rear seats.
This could block the battery
cooling duct causing battery
degradation.
Do not put objects on the left
side of rear seat. This could
block the battery cooling duct
causing battery degradation.
OLF034025
OLFHQ014006K
■ Hybrid
OLP035100
■ Plug-in hybrid
2-13
Safety system of your vehicle
3. Pull on the backseat folding lever
(1) located in the trunk.
4. Fold the backseat toward the front
of the vehicle.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the backseat rearward. Pull the
backseat firmly until it clicks into
place. Make sure the backseat is
locked in place.
When you return the backseat to
its upright position, always be sure
it has locked into position by push-
ing on the top of the backseat.
2
OLF034024 OLF034027
When returning the rear back-
seat from a folded to an upright
position, hold the backseat and
return it slowly. Ensure that the
backseat is completely locked
into its upright position by
pushing on the top of the back-
seat. In an accident or sudden
stop, the unlocked backseat-
could allow cargo to move for-
ward with great force and enter
the passenger compartment,
which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit
vehicle occupants in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
WARNING
2-14
Safety system of your vehicle
Armrest
The armrest is located in the center
of the rear seat. Pull the armrest
down from the backseat to use it.
Cup holder
To use the center cup holder, pull
down the armrest.
Make sure the engine is off, the
shift lever is in P (Park), and the
parking brake is securely applied
whenever loading or unloading
cargo.Failure to take these steps
may allow the vehicle to move if
the shift lever is inadvertently
moved to another position.
WARNING
OLF034065
OLF044266
2-15
Safety system of your vehicle
Carrying long/narrow cargo
(if equipped)
Additional cargo space is provided to
accommodate long/narrow cargo
(skis, poles, etc.) not able to fit prop-
erly in the trunk when closed.
1. Pull the armrest down.
2. Pull the cover down while pushing
the release lever down.
2
Cargo should always be
secured to prevent it from being
thrown about the vehicle in a
collision and causing injury to
the vehicle occupants. Do not
place objects in the rear seats,
since they cannot be properly
secured and may hit the front
seat occupants in a collision.
WARNING
• Be careful when loading
cargo through the rear pas-
senger seats to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle interior.
• When cargo is loaded through
the rear passenger seats,
ensure the cargo is properly
secured to prevent it from
moving while driving.
CAUTION
OLF034066
Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transmission is in P
(Park) and the parking brake is
securely applied whenever load-
ing or unloading cargo.
Failure to take these steps may
allow the vehicle to move if the
shift lever is inadvertently moved
to another position.
WARNING
2-16
Safety system of your vehicle
Head Restraints
The vehicle’s front and rear seats
have adjustable head restraints. The
head restraints provide comfort for
passengers, but more importantly
they are designed to help protect
passengers from whiplash and other
neck and spinal injuries during an
accident, especially in a rear impact
collision.
To prevent damage, NEVER hit or
pull on the head restraints.
NOTICE
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident,
take the following precautions
when adjusting your head
restraints:
• Always properly adjust the
head restraints for all passen-
gers BEFORE starting the
vehicle.
• NEVER let anyone ride in a
seat with the head restraints
removed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
Adjust the head restraints so
the middle of the head restraint
is at the same height as the
height of the top of the eyes.
• NEVER adjust the head
restraint position of the dri-
ver’s seat when the vehicle is
in motion.
• Adjust the head restraint as
close to the passenger’s head
as possible. Do not use a seat
cushion that holds the body
away from the backseat.
• Make sure the head restraint
locks into position after adjust-
ing it.
WARNING
OLF034072N
2-17
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Front seat head restraints
The vehicle's front seats are
equipped with adjustable head
restraints for both safety and com-
fort.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the head restraint:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the head restraint support.
2. Lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
If you recline the backseat towards
the front with the head restraint
and seat cushion raised, the head
restraint may come in contact with
the sunvisor or other parts of the
vehicle.
NOTICE
ODH033105L
OLF034010
OLF034015
2-18
Safety system of your vehicle
Removal/Reinstallation
To remove the head restraint:
1. Recline the backseat (2) rearward
using the backseat angle lever/
switch (1).
2. Raise the head restraint as far as
it can go.
3. Press the head restraint release
button (3) while pulling upward on
the head restraint (4).
To reinstall the head restraint:
1. Put the head restraint poles (2) into
the holes while pressing the
release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
3. Recline the backseat (4) forward
using the backseat angle lever/
switch (3).
OLF034011N
OLF034012N
■ Manual seat
■ Power seat
OLF034013N
OLF034014N
■ Manual seat
■ Power seat
2-19
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Rear seat head restraints
The rear seats are equipped with
head restraints all seating positions
for passenger safety and comfort.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the head restraint:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the head restraint support.
2. Lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).
Removal/Reinstallation
To remove the head restraint:
1. Raise the head restraint as far as
it can go.
2. Press the head restraint release
button (1) while pulling the head
restraint up (2).
To reinstall the head restraint:
1. Put the head restraint poles into
the holes (3) while pressing the
release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
ODH034111
OLF034023 OLF034073N
2-20
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat Warmers and
Air Ventilation Seats
Front seat warmers (if equipped)
Seat warmers are provided to warm
the seats during cold weather.
To prevent damage to the seat
warmers and seats:
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
or gasoline to clean the seats.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer.
NOTICE
The seat warmers can cause a
serious burn, even at low tem-
peratures and especially if used
for long periods of time.
Passengers must be able to feel
if the seat is becoming too warm
so they can turn it off, if needed.
People who cannot detect tem-
perature change or pain to the
skin should use extreme cau-
tion, especially the following
types of passengers:
• Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients.
• People with sensitive skin or
who burn easily.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Fatigued individuals.
• Intoxicated individuals.
• People taking medication that
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness.
NEVER place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat
when the seat warmer is in oper-
ation, such as a blanket or seat
cushion. This may cause the
seat warmer to overheat, caus-
ing a burn or damage to the seat.
WARNING
2-21
Safety system of your vehicle
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the dri-
ver's seat or front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
• Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the Engine
Start/Stop button is in the ON posi-
tion.
Information
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
i
2
OLF034017
OLF034019
■ Type A
■ Type B
OFF HIGH ( )
LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )
→
→
→
→
2-22
Safety system of your vehicle
Air ventilation seats
(if equipped)
The air ventilation seats are provided
to cool the front seats by blowing air
through small vent holes on the sur-
face of the seat cushions and back-
seats.
When the operation of the air ventila-
tion seats are not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
While the engine is running, push the
switch to cool the driver’s seat or the
front passenger’s seat.
• Each time you push the switch, the
airflow changes as follows:
• The air ventilation seats default to
the OFF position whenever the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
To prevent damage to the air ven-
tilation seat system and seats:
• Use the air ventilation seats
ONLY when the air conditioning
is on. Using the air ventilation
seats for prolonged periods of
time with the air conditioning off
could cause the air ventilation
seats to malfunction.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
or gasoline to clean the seats.
• Avoid spilling liquids on the sur-
face of the front seats and back-
seats; this may cause the air
vent holes to become blocked
and not work properly.
• Do not place materials such as
plastic bags or newspapers
under the seats.They may block
the air intake causing the air
vents to not work properly.
• Do not change the seat covers. It
may damage the air ventilation
seats.
• If the air vents do not operate,
restart the vehicle. If there is no
change, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
OLF034021
2-23
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Rear seat warmers (if equipped)
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the rear
seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the Engine Start/
Stop button is in the ON position.
Information
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
i
OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )
→
OLF034028
2-24
Safety system of your vehicle
This section describes how to use the
seat belts properly. It also describes
some of the things not to do when
using seat belts.
Seat Belt Safety Precautions
Always fasten your seat belt and
make sure all passengers have fas-
tened their seat belts before starting
any trip. Air bags are designed to
supplement the seat belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they are not a
substitute. Most states require all
occupants of a vehicle to wear seat
belts.
SSEEAATT BBEELLTTSS
Seat belts must be used by ALL
passengers whenever the vehi-
cle is moving.Take the following
precautions when adjusting and
wearing seat belts:
• ALWAYS properly restrain
children under age 13 in the
rear seats.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• NEVER allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat. If
a child age 13 or older must be
seated in the front seat, move
the seat as far back as possi-
ble and properly restrain them
in the seat.
• NEVER allow an infant or child
to be carried on an occupant’s
lap.
• NEVER ride with the backseat
reclined when the vehicle is
moving.
• Do not allow children to share
a seat or seat belt.
• Do not wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back.
• Always wear both the shoul-
der portion and lap portion of
the lap/shoulder belt.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
twisted. A twisted seat belt
will not protect you properly
in an accident.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use a seat belt if the
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged.
• Do not latch the seat belt into
the buckles of other seats.
• NEVER unfasten the seat belt
while driving. This may cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle interfering with the
seat belt latch mechanism.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
2-25
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat Belt Warning Light
Seat belt warning light
(for driver's seat)
The driver’s seat belt warning light
and chime will come on according to
the following table when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
*
1
:The Warning Pattern repeats 11 times with
an interval of 24 seconds.If the driver’s seat
belt is buckled, the light will stop within 6
seconds and chime will stop immediately.
*
2
:The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
Damaged seat belts and seat
belt assemblies will not operate
properly. Always replace:
• Frayed, contaminated, or dam-
aged webbing
• Damaged hardware
• The entire seat belt assembly
after it has been worn in an
accident, even if damage to
webbing or assembly is not
apparent
WARNING
OLMB033022
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light (Blink) Chime
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds None
3 mph~
6 mph
6 seconds
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
6 sec. ON / 24 sec. OFF
(11 times)
Unbuckled
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
↓
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds *
1
↓
Stop *
2
2-26
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belt warning light
(for front passenger's seat)
The front passenger's seat belt
warning light will activate to the fol-
lowing table when the ignition switch
is in "ON" position.
*
1
: The seat belt warning light will go off if the
vehicle speed decreases below 3 mph (5
km/h).If the vehicle speed increases above
3 mph (5 km/h), the warning light will blink
again.
Seat Belt Restraint System
Seat Belt-Driver's 3-point sys-
tem with emergency locking
retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab (1) into the
buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length after the lap belt por-
tion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean
forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and move with you.
Conditions
Warning
Pattern
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light-Blink
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Unbuckled
Above 6mph
(10 km/h)
Continuously
Buckled 6 seconds
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Above 6mph
(10 km/h)
Continuously *
1
Below 6mph
(10 km/h)
None
OLF034030N
OLMB033087
2-27
Safety system of your vehicle
2
If there is a sudden stop or impact,
the belt will lock into position. It will
also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
If you are not able to smoothly pull
enough of the seat belt out from
the retractor, firmly pull the seat
belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the
belt out smoothly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the
four different positions for maximum
comfort and safety.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder near-
est the door, not over your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has
locked into position.
NOTICE
OLF034067
2-28
Safety system of your vehicle
Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3-
point system with convertible
locking retractor
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency locking
retractor seat belt and an automatic
locking retractor seat belt. Convertible
retractor type seat belts are installed in
the rear seat positions to help accom-
modate the installation of child
restraint systems. Although a convert-
ible retractor is also installed in the
front passenger seat position, NEVER
place any infant/child restraint system
in the front seat of the vehicle.
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab into the buck-
le. There will be an audible "click"
when the tab locks into the buckle.
When not securing a child restraint,
the seat belt operates in the same way
as the driver’s seat belt (Emergency
Locking Retractor Type). It automati-
cally adjusts to the proper length only
after the lap belt portion of the seat
belt is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly across your hips.
(Continued)
• Position one arm under the
shoulder belt and the other over
the belt, as shown in the illus-
tration.
• Always position the shoulder
belt anchor into the locked
position at the appropriate
height.
• Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
OLMB033025
Improperly positioned seat belts
may increase the risk of serious
injury in an accident.Take the fol-
lowing precautions when adjust-
ing the seat belt:
• Position the lap portion of the
seat belt as low as possible
across your hips, not on your
waist, so that it fits snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-29
Safety system of your vehicle
2
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the installa-
tion of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to the "Using a Child Restraint
System" section in this chapter.
Although the seat belt retractor
provides the same level of protec-
tion for seated passengers in
either emergency or automatic
locking modes, the emergency
locking mode allows seated pas-
sengers to move freely in their
seat while keeping some tension
on the belt. During a collision or
sudden stop, the retractor auto-
matically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
To deactivate the automatic lock-
ing mode, allow the unbuckled
seat belt to fully retract.
To release your seat belt:
Press the release button (1) in the
locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should
automatically draw back into the
retractor. If this does not happen,
check the belt to be sure it is not twist-
ed, then try again.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(Driver and front passenger)
Retractor Pre-tensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with driver’s
and front passenger’s Pre-tensioner
Seat Belts. The purpose of the pre-
tensioner is to make sure the seat
belts fit tightly against the occupant’s
body in certain frontal collisions. The
pre-tensioner seat belts may be acti-
vated in crashes where the frontal col-
lision is severe enough.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver’s or passenger’s
seat belt when the pre-tensioner acti-
vates, the load limiter inside the pre-
tensioner will release some of the
pressure on the affected seat belt.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal
collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti-
vate and pull the seat belt into tighter
contact against the occupant’s body.
NOTICE
ODH033057
2-30
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat Belt Anchor Pre-tensioner
The purpose of the Seat Belt Anchor
Pre-tensioner is to help the lap belt fit
tightly against the occupant’s lower
body in certain frontal collisions. The
Seat Belt Anchor Pre-tensioner may
be activated in certain crashes where
the frontal collision is severe enough.
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt mechanism
deploys during a collision, the
pre-tensioners become hot and
can burn you.
WARNING
• Always wear your seat belt and
sit properly in your seat.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
loose or twisted. A loose or
twisted seat belt will not pro-
tect you properly in an acci-
dent.
• Do not place anything near the
buckle. This may adversely
affect the buckle and cause it
to function improperly.
• Always replace your pre-ten-
sioners after activation or an
accident.
• NEVER inspect, service, repair
or replace the pre-tensioners
yourself. This must be done by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not hit the seat belt assem-
blies.
WARNING
OLMB033039
2-31
Safety system of your vehicle
2
The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents.Their locations are shown in
the illustration above:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner
3. SRS control module
4. Anchor Pre-tensioner
The sensor that activates the SRS
air bag is connected with the
pre–tensioner seat belts.The SRS
air bag warning light on the instru-
ment panel will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion, and then it should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner is not working
properly, the warning light will illu-
minate even if the SRS air bag is
not malfunctioning. If the warning
light does not illuminate, stays
illuminated or illuminates when
the vehicle is being driven, have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat
belts and SRS air bags as soon as
possible.
• Both the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in certain
frontal or side collisions or
rollovers.
• The pre-tensioners will not be
activated if the seat belts are not
worn at the time of the collision.
• When the pre-tensioner seat
belts are activated, a loud noise
may be heard and fine dust,
which may appear to be smoke,
may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal
operating conditions and are not
hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation
and should not be breathed for
prolonged periods. Wash all
exposed skin areas thoroughly
after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were
activated.
NOTICENOTICE
1LDE3100/Q
2-32
Safety system of your vehicle
Rear center seat belt
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the "CENTER" mark
must be used.
Additional Seat Belt Safety
Precautions
Seat belt use during pregnancy
The seat belt should always be used
during pregnancy. The best way to
protect your unborn child is to protect
yourself by always wearing the seat
belt.
Pregnant women should always wear
a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the
shoulder belt across your chest, rout-
ed between your breasts and away
from your neck. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest, routed away
from the neck.Place the lap belt below
the belt line so that it fits snugly and as
low as possible across the hips, not
across the abdomen.
Seat belt use and children
Infant and small children
All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices,
including booster seats. The age at
which seat belts can be used instead
of child restraints differs among
states, so you should be aware of the
specific requirements in your state,
and where you are travelling. Infant
and child restraints must be properly
placed and installed in a rear seat.
For more information refer to the
"Child Restraint Systems" section in
this chapter.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to an unborn
child during an accident, preg-
nant women should NEVER
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or over the area of
the abdomen where the unborn
child is located.
WARNING
OLF034062
2-33
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat by a
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. Before
buying any child restraint system,
make sure that it has a label certify-
ing that it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The
restraint must be appropriate for your
child’s height and weight. Check the
label on the child restraint for this
information. Refer to the “Child
Restraint Systems” section in this
chapter.
Larger children
Children under age 13 and who are
too large for a booster seat must
always occupy the rear seat and use
the available lap/shoulder belts. A
seat belt should lie across the upper
thighs and be snug across the shoul-
der and chest to restrain the child
safely. Check belt fit periodically.
Children are afforded the most safe-
ty in the event of an accident when
they are restrained by a proper
restraint system and/or seat belts in
the rear seat. Always have the
LATCH system inspected by your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can damage
the LATCH system and may not
properly secure the child restraint.
If a larger child over age 13 must be
seated in the front seat, the child
must be securely restrained by the
available lap/shoulder belt and the
seat should be placed in the rear-
most position.
ALWAYS properly restrain infants
and small children in a child
restraint appropriate for the
child’s height and weight.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to a child and
other passengers, NEVER hold a
child in your lap or arms when
the vehicle is moving.The violent
forces created during an acci-
dent will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the interior of the vehicle.
WARNING
2-34
Safety system of your vehicle
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center
of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need
to be returned to an appropriate
booster seat in the rear seat.
Transporting an injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
Consult a physician for specific rec-
ommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
Sitting in a reclined position when the
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even when buckled up, the protec-
tions of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly reduced
by reclining your backseat.
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve
the maximum effectiveness of the
restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down
in the rear seat or if the front or rear
seats are in a reclined position.
• NEVER ride with a reclined
backseat when the vehicle is
moving.
• Riding with a reclined backseat
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
• Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the backseats upright.
WARNING
• Always make sure children
are wearing their seat belts
and that they are properly
adjusted before driving.
• NEVER allow the shoulder
belt to contact the child’s
neck or face.
• Do not allow more than one
child to use a single seat belt.
WARNING
2-35
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Care of Seat Belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry.If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an acci-
dent.This should be done even if no
damage is visible. Additional ques-
tions concerning seat belt operation
should be directed to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
2-36
Safety system of your vehicle
Children Always in the Rear
Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must
always be properly restrained to min-
imize the risk of injury in an accident,
sudden stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Even with air bags,
children can be seriously injured
or killed. Children too large for a
child restraint must use the seat belts
provided.
All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices.The
laws governing the age or
height/weight restrictions at which
seat belts can be used instead of
child restraints differs among states,
so you should be aware of the spe-
cific requirements in your state, and
where you are travelling.
Child restraint systems must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are generally
designed to be secured in a vehicle
seat by lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt, or by a LATCH system
in the rear seats of the vehicle.
CCHHIILLDD RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCRRSS))
Always properly restrain chil-
dren in the rear seats of the
vehicle.
Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front pas-
senger seat can be forcefully
struck by an inflating air bag
resulting in SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH.
WARNING
2-37
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Child restraint system (CRS)
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rear-fac-
ing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the
rear seat of the vehicle. Read and
comply with the instructions for
installation and use provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.
Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a CRS for your child,
always:
• Make sure the CRS has a label
certifying that it meets applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS 213).
• Select a child restraint based on
your child’s height and weight.The
required label or the instructions
for use typically provide this infor-
mation.
• Select a child restraint that fits the
vehicle seating position where it
will be used.
• Read and comply with the warn-
ings and instructions for installation
and use provided with the child
restraint system.
(Continued)
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufactur-
er’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
• Always properly restrain your
child in the child restraint.
• If the vehicle head restraint
prevents proper installation of
a child seat (as described in
the child restraint system
manual), the head restraint of
the respective seating posi-
tion shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
• Do not use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that
"hooks" over a backseat, it
may not provide adequate
protection in an accident.
• After an accident, have a
HYUNDAI dealer check the
child restraint system, seat
belts, tether anchors and
lower anchors.
An improperly secured child
restraint can increase the risk
of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH
in an accident. Always take the
following precautions when
using a child restraint system:
• NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passen-
ger’s seat.
• Always properly secure the
child restraint to a rear seat of
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING
2-38
Safety system of your vehicle
Child restraint system types
There are three main types of child
restraint systems: rear-facing seats,
forward-facing seats, and booster
seats. They are classified according
to the child’s age, height and weight.
Rear-facing child seats
A rear-facing child seat provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the child.The har-
ness system holds the child in place,
and in an accident, acts to keep the
child positioned in the seat and
reduce the stress to the neck and
spinal cord.
All children under age one must
always ride in a rear-facing infant child
restraint.
Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats typ-
ically have higher height and weight
limits for the rear-facing position,
allowing you to keep your child rear-
facing for a longer period of time.
Continue to use a rear-facing child
seat for as long as your child will fit
within the height and weight limits
allowed by the child seat manufactur-
er. It’s the best way to keep them
safe. Once your child has outgrown
the rear-facing child restraint, your
child is ready for a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness.
OLMB033041
NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passen-
ger’s seat.
Placing a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH if the child restraint is
struck by an inflating air bag.
WARNING
2-39
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Forward-facing child restraints
A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child’s body with a
harness. Keep children in a forward-
facing child seat with a harness until
they reach the top height or weight
limit allowed by your child restraint’s
manufacturer.
Once your child outgrows the forward-
facing child restraint, your child is
ready for a booster seat.
Booster seats
A booster seat is a restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat
belt system. A booster seat positions
the seat belt so that it fits properly
over the lap of your child.
Keep your child in a booster seat until
they are big enough to sit in the seat
without a booster and still have the
seat belt fit properly. For a seat belt to
fit properly, the lap belt must lie snug-
ly across the upper thighs, not the
stomach.The shoulder belt should lie
snug across the shoulder and chest
and not across the neck or face.
Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must always
be properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury.
Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
Before installing your child
restraint system always:
• Read and follow the instruc-
tions provided by the manu-
facturer of the child restraint.
• Read and follow the instruc-
tions regarding child restraint
systems in this manual.
Failure to follow all warnings
and instructions could increase
the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH if an accident occurs.
WARNING
If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a child
seat (as described in the child
seat system manual, the head-
rest of the respective seating
position shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
WARNING
OLF034033
2-40
Safety system of your vehicle
After selecting a proper child seat for
your child, check to make sure it fits
properly in your vehicle. Follow the
instructions provided by the manu-
facturer when installing the child
seat. Note these general steps when
installing the seat to your vehicle:
•
Properly secure the child restraint
to the vehicle.
All child restraints
must be secured to the vehicle with
the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or
with the LATCH system.
• Make sure the child restraint is
firmly secured. After installing a
child restraint to the vehicle, push
and pull the seat forward and from
side-to-side to verify that it is
securely attached to the seat. A
child restraint secured with a seat
belt should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-to-
side movement can be expected.
• Secure the child in the child
restraint. Make sure the child is
properly strapped in the child
restraint according to the manufac-
turer instructions.
Lower Anchors and Tether for
Children (LATCH) System
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving and in an acci-
dent. This system is designed to
make installation of the child restraint
easier and reduce the possibility of
improperly installing your child
restraint. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attach-
ments on the child restraint. The
LATCH system eliminates the need
to use seat belts to secure the child
restraint to the rear seats.
Lower anchors are metal bars built
into the vehicle. There are two lower
anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments.
To use the LATCH system in your
vehicle, you must have a child
restraint with LATCH attachments.
The child seat manufacturer will pro-
vide you with instructions on how to
use the child seat with its attachments
for the LATCH lower anchors.
A child restraint in a closed
vehicle can become very hot.To
prevent burns, check the seat-
ing surface and buckles before
placing your child in the child
restraint.
CAUTION
2-41
Safety system of your vehicle
2
LATCH anchors have been provided
in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration.There are no
LATCH anchors provided for the cen-
ter rear seating position.
The lower anchor position indicator
symbols are located on the left and
right rear seat backs to identify the
position of the lower anchors in your
vehicle (see arrows in illustration).
The LATCH anchors are located
between the backseat and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
To use the lower anchor, push the
upper portion of the lower anchor
cover.
Do not attempt to install a child
restraint system using LATCH
anchors in the rear center seat-
ing position.There are no LATCH
anchors provided for this seat.
Using the outboard seat anchors
can damage the anchors which
may break or fail in a collision
resulting in serious injury or
death.
WARNING
ODH033067
OLF034037
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
2-42
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint with
the LATCH anchors system
To install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint in either of the rear outboard
seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away from
the lower anchors.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchors that could prevent a
secure connection between the child
restraint and the lower anchors.
3. Place the child restraint on the vehi-
cle seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
instructions provided by the child
restraint manufacturer.
4. Follow the child restraint instructions
for properly adjusting and tightening
the lower attachments on the child
restraint to the lower anchors.
The recommended maximum
weight for the LATCH system is 65
lbs. (30 kg). When selecting a
proper child restraint, consider
that the maximum total weight of
the child plus the child restraint
should be less than 65 lbs (30 kg).
As a guide, the MAX child restraint
weight should be determined by
the following calculation:
Child Restraint Weight =
65 - (child's total weight in lbs.)
NOTICE
Take the following precautions
when using the LATCH system:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• To prevent the child from
reaching and taking hold of
unretracted seat belts, buckle
all unused rear seat belts and
retract the seat belt webbing
behind the child. Children can
be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around
their neck and the seat belt
tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single
anchor. This could cause the
anchor or attachment to come
loose or break.
• Always have the LATCH sys-
tem inspected by your author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can
damage the LATCH system
and may not properly secure
the child restraint.
WARNING
2-43
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Securing a child restraint seat
with "Tether Anchor" system
First secure the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchors or the seat
belt. If the child restraint manufactur-
er recommends that the top tether
strap be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether strap to the top tether
strap anchor.
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the package tray.
To install the tether anchor:
1. Route the child restraint tether strap
over the child restraint backseat.
Route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the
head restraint posts, or route the
tether strap over the top of the vehi-
cle backseat.Make sure the strap is
not twisted.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the teth-
er strap according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to firmly
secure the child restraint to the seat.
3. Check that the child restraint is
securely attached to the seat by
pushing and pulling the seat forward
and from side-to-side.
Take the following precautions
when installing the tether strap:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single teth-
er anchor. This could cause
the anchor or attachment to
come loose or break.
• Do not attach the tether strap
to anything other than the cor-
rect tether anchor. It may not
work properly if attached to
something else.
• Do not use the tether anchors
for adult seat belts or harness-
es, or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING
OLF034035
OLF034034
2-44
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint with
a lap belt or lap/shoulder belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child restraints must be secured to
a vehicle rear seat with the lap part
of a lap/shoulder belt.
Automatic locking mode
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emer-
gency conditions (emergency locking
mode), you must manually pull the
seat belt all the way out to shift the
retractor to the "Automatic Locking"
mode to secure a child restraint.
The "Automatic Locking" mode will
help prevent the normal movement
of the child in the vehicle from caus-
ing the seat belt to loosen and com-
promise the child restraint system.To
secure a child restraint system, use
the following procedure.
To install a child restraint system on
the rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system on
a rear seat and route the lap/
shoulder belt around or through
the child restraint, following the
restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
Be sure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted.
When using the rear center seat
belt, you should also refer to the
"3-point Rear Center Seat Belt"
section in this chapter.
NOTICE
ALWAYS place a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
Placing a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in serious injury or death
if the child restraint is struck by
an inflating air bag.
WARNING
OLMB033044
2-45
Safety system of your vehicle
2
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct "click" sound.
Information
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out.When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the "Automatic
Locking" (child restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible "clicking" or "ratch-
eting" sound. This indicates that
the retractor is in the "Automatic
Locking" mode. If no distinct
sound is heard, repeat steps 3
and 4.
i
OLMB033045
OLMB033097 OLMB033098
2-46
Safety system of your vehicle
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place.If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the "Automatic Locking" mode
by attempting to pull more of the
seat belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot, the retractor is in the
"Automatic Locking" mode.
If your CRS manufacturer instructs or
recommends you to use a tether
anchor with the lap/shoulder belt,
refer to the previous pages for more
information.
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the "Automatic
Locking" mode to the emergency
lock mode for normal adult usage.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
NOTICE
If the retractor is not in the
"Automatic Locking" mode, the
child restraint can move when
your vehicle turns or stops sud-
denly. A child can be seriously
injured or killed if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
in the car, including manually
pulling the seat belt all the way
out to shift the rectractor to the
"Automatic Locking" mode.
WARNING
2-47
Safety system of your vehicle
2
AAIIRR BBAAGG -- AADDVVAANNCCEEDD SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM
OLF034038
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Driver’s front air bag
2. Passenger’s front air bag
3. Side air bag
4. Curtain air bag
5. Driver’s knee air bag
2-48
Safety system of your vehicle
This vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Air Bag
System for the driver’s seat and front
passenger’s seats.
The front air bags are designed to
supplement the three-point seat
belts. For these air bags to provide
protection, the seat belts must be
worn at all times when driving.
You can be severely injured or killed
in an accident if you are not wearing
a seat belt. Air bags are designed to
supplement seat belts, but do not
replace them. Also, air bags are not
designed to deploy in every collision.
In some accidents, the seat belts are
the only restraint protecting you.
AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time,
everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in
a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt
when the air bag inflates.
NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front
passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant
or child causing serious or fatal injuries.
ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the
safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older
must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.
All occupants should sit upright with the backseat in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-
fortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked
and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during
an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.
You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.
Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. The U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at
least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and
the chest.
WARNING
2-49
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Where Are the Air Bags?
Driver's and passenger's front
air bags
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts
at both the driver and passenger
seating positions.
The SRS consists of air bags which
are located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel, in the driver’s side lower
crash pad below the steering wheel
column and the passenger’s side
front panel pad above the glove box.
The air bags are labeled with the let-
ters "AIR BAG" embossed on the
pad covers.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle’s driver and front passen-
gers with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt system
alone. The SRS uses sensors to
gather information about the driver’s
and front passenger’s seat belt
usage and impact severity.
The seat belt buckle sensors deter-
mine if the driver and front passen-
ger’s seat belts are fastened. These
sensors provide the ability to control
the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fas-
tened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation within
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
According to the impact severity, and
seat belt usage, the SRS Control
Module (SRSCM) controls the air
bag inflation.Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
OLF034039
OLF034040N
OLF034041
■ Driver’s knee air bag
■ Driver’s front air bag
■ Passenger’s front air bag
2-50
Safety system of your vehicle
Side air bags
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag in each front seat. The pur-
pose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle’s driver and the front passen-
ger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt alone.
OLF034042
OLF034043
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
front air bags, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Move your seat as far back as
possible from front air bags,
while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
• Never lean against the door or
center console.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place their feet or legs
on the dashboard.
• No objects (such as crash pad
cover, cellular phone holder,
cup holder, perfume or stick-
ers) should be placed over or
near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, windshield glass, and
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
• Do not attach any objects on
front windshield and inside
mirror.
WARNING
2-51
Safety system of your vehicle
2
The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
The side and curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle may deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
The side air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
side air bag, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and seats.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Hold the steering wheel at the
9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi-
tions, to minimize the risk of
injuries to your hands and
arms.
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers.This could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness
of the system.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself. Also, do not
attach any objects around the
area the air bag inflates such
as the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar.
• Do not place any objects
between the door and the
seat. They may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
air bag inflates.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bags.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not put any objects
between the side air bag label
and seat cushion. It could
cause harm if the vehicle is in
a crash severe enough to
cause the air bags to deploy.
• Do not cause impact to the
doors when the ignition
switch is in the ON position or
this may cause the side air
bags to inflate.
• If the seat or seat cover is
damaged, have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
2-52
Safety system of your vehicle
Curtain air bags
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occupants
in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and impact.
The side and curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle may deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact
or rollover situations.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from inflating
curtain air bags, take the follow-
ing precautions:
• All seat occupants must wear
seat belts at all times to help
keep occupants positioned
properly.
• Properly secure child
restraints as far away from the
door as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag.Also, do not attach
any objects around the area
the air bag inflates such as
the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar, roof side
rail.
• Do not hang hard or breakable
objects on the clothes hanger.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and seats.
• Do not open or repair the side
curtain air bags.
• Do not hang other objects
except clothes. In an accident
it may cause vehicle damage
or personal injury especially
when air bag is inflated.
WARNING
OLF034044
OLF034045
2-53
Safety system of your vehicle
2
How Does the Air Bag System
Operate?
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver’s front air bag module
2. Passenger’s front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. Side pressure sensors
11. Driver’s knee air bag module
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
13. Anchor pre-tensioner
14. Occupant classification system
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the Engine
Start/Stop button is in the ON posi-
tion to determine if a crash impact is
severe enough to require air bag
deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
SRS warning light
The SRS (Supplement Restraint
System) air bag warning light on the
instrument panel displays the air bag
symbol depicted in the illustration.
The system checks the air bag elec-
trical system for malfunctions. The
light indicates that there is a potential
malfunction with your air bag system,
which could include your side and
curtain air bags used for rollover pro-
tection.
If your SRS malfunctions, the
air bag may not inflate properly
during an accident increasing
the risk of serious injury or
death.
If any of the following condi-
tions occur, your SRS is mal-
functioning:
(Continued)
WARNING
ODH033104L/Q
2-54
Safety system of your vehicle
During a frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle's deceleration. If
the deceleration rate (measured in g-
force) is high enough, the control unit
will inflate the front air bags.
The front air bags help protect the
driver and front passenger by
responding to frontal impacts in which
seat belts alone cannot provide ade-
quate restraint. When needed, the
side air bags help provide protection in
the event of a side impact or rollover.
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Air bags inflate in the event of cer-
tain frontal or side collisions to help
protect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate. Generally,
air bags are designed to inflate
based upon the severity of a colli-
sion and its direction. These two
factors determine whether the sen-
sors produce an electronic deploy-
ment/inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehicles
or objects which your vehicle
impacts during a collision. The
determining factors are not limited
to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant. It is
virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an acci-
dent. It is much more likely that you
will simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in certain
side collisions, vehicles equipped
with a rollover sensor, side and
curtain air bags will inflate if the
sensing system detects a rollover.
When a rollover is detected, side
and curtain air bags will remain
inflated longer to help provide pro-
tection from ejection, especially
when used in conjunction with the
seat belts.
• To help provide protection, the air
bags must inflate rapidly. The
speed of air bag inflation is a con-
sequence of extremely short time
in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occu-
pant impacts those structures.This
speed of inflation reduces the risk
of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary
part of air bag design.
However, the rapid air bag inflation
can also cause injuries which can
include facial abrasions, bruises
and broken bones because the
inflation speed also causes the air
bags to expand with a great deal of
force.
(Continued)
• The light does not turn on for
approximately six seconds
when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
• The light remains illuminated
after approximately six sec-
onds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the
engine is running.
Have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer inspect the SRS as soon
as possible if any of these con-
ditions occur.
2-55
Safety system of your vehicle
2
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the air
bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-
cially if the occupant is positioned
excessively close to the air bag.
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. The greatest risk is sitting too
close to the air bag.An air bag needs
about 10 inches (25 cm) of space to
inflate. NHTSA recommends that
drivers allow at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
When the SRSCM detects a suffi-
ciently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically
deploy the front air bags.
OHM039102N
■ Driver’s front air bag (1)
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following pre-
cautions:
• NEVER place a child restraint
in the front passenger seat.
Always properly restrain chil-
dren under age 13 in the rear
seats of the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger’s
and driver’s seats as far to the
rear as possible while allow-
ing you to maintain full con-
trol of the vehicle.
• Hold the steering wheel with
hands at the 9 o’clock and 3
o’clock positions.
• Never place anything or any-
one between the air bag and
the seat occupant.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place their feet or legs
on the dashboard.
WARNING
2-56
Safety system of your vehicle
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver or the front passen-
ger forward motion, reducing the risk
of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibili-
ty and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
OHM039103N
■ Driver’s front air bag (2)
OHM039104N
■ Driver’s front air bag (3)
OLMB033057
■ Passenger’s front air bag
To prevent objects from becom-
ing dangerous projectiles when
the passenger’s air bag inflates:
• Do not install or place any
objects (drink holder, CD
holder, stickers, etc.) on the
front passenger’s panel above
the glove box where the pas-
senger’s air bag is located.
• Do not install a container of
liquid air freshener near the
instrument cluster or on the
instrument panel surface.
WARNING
2-57
Safety system of your vehicle
2
After an air bag inflates, take
the following precautions:
• Open your windows and doors
as soon as possible after
impact to reduce prolonged
exposure to the smoke and
powder released by the inflat-
ing air bag.
• Do not touch the air bag stor-
age area’s internal compo-
nents immediately after an air
bag has inflated. The parts
that come into contact with an
inflating air bag may be very
hot.
(Continued)
WARNING
What to Expect After an Air
Bag Inflates
After a frontal or side air bag inflates,
it will deflate very quickly. Air bag
inflation will not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or
being able to steer. Curtain air bags
may remain partially inflated for
some time after they deploy.
Noise and smoke from inflating
air bag
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and may produce
smoke and powder in the air inside of
the vehicle. This is normal and is a
result of the ignition of the air bag
inflator. After the air bag inflates, you
may feel substantial discomfort in
breathing because of the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and
the air bag, as well as from breathing
the smoke and powder. The powder
may aggravate asthma for some
people. If you experience breathing
problems after an air bag deploy-
ment, seek medical attention imme-
diately.
Though the smoke and powder are
nontoxic, they may cause irritation to
the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and seek
medical attention if the symptoms
persist.
(Continued)
• Always wash exposed skin
areas thoroughly with cold
water and mild soap.
• Always have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer replace the air
bag immediately after deploy-
ment. Air bags are designed to
be used only once.
2-58
Safety system of your vehicle
Occupant Classification
System (OCS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) in the front passenger’s seat.
Main components of the
Occupant Classification System
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• Electronic system to determine
whether the passenger air bag
systems should be activated or
deactivated.
• An indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicating the front passen-
ger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag indi-
cator light is interconnected with
the OCS.
The OCS is designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated front
passenger and determine if the pas-
senger's front air bag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
The purpose is to help reduce the
risk of injury or death from an inflat-
ing air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by
requiring the air bag to be automati-
cally turned OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occu-
pants who are properly seated and
wearing the seat belt properly,
should not cause the passenger air
bag to be automatically turned OFF.
For small adults it may be turned
OFF, however, if the occupant does
not sit in the seat properly (for exam-
ple, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on the edge of the seat, or by other-
wise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag
OFF.
You will find the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1-4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
OLF034067N
2-59
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Always be sure that you and all vehi-
cle occupants are seated properly
and wearing the seat belt properly for
the most effective protection by the
air bag and the seat belt.
The OCS may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can affect the classification system.
These include:
• Failing to sit in an upright position.
• Leaning against the door or center
console.
• Sitting towards the sides of the
front of the seat.
• Putting their legs on the dashboard
or resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
• Wearing the seat belt improperly.
• Reclining the backseat.
• Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear
or hip protection wear.
• Putting an additional thick cushion
on the seat.
• Putting electrical devices (e.g.
notebook, satellite radio) on the
seat with inverter charging.
Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification System
Condition detected by the
occupant classification system
Indicator/Warning light Devices
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light
SRS
warning light
Front passenger
air bag
1. Adult *
1
Off Off Activated
2. Infant *
2
or child restraint
system with 12 months old *
3
*
4
On Off Deactivated
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated
*
1
The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front
passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique
and posture.
*
2
Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has out-
grown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize
him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.
*
3
Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*
4
The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months
to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat.This is
a normal condition.
2-60
Safety system of your vehicle
Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger’s seat when it is unoccupied by a
passenger adversely affects the OCS.To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:
WARNING
OVQ036013NB
OLMB033100
OLMB033101
OLMB033103
OLMB033102
OLMB033104
• NEVER put a heavy load in
the front seat or backseat
pocket, or hang any items
on the front passenger
seat.
• NEVER place your feet on
the front passenger back-
seat.
• NEVER sit with your hips
shifted towards the front
of the seat.
• NEVER ride with the
backseat reclined when
the vehicle is moving.
• NEVER place your feet or
legs on the dashboard.
• NEVER lean on the door or
center console or sit on
one side of the front pas-
senger seat.
(continued)
2-61
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Proper seated position for OCS
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator is on when an adult is seat-
ed in the front passenger seat, place
the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position.This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag. If
the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator is still on, ask the passen-
ger to move to the rear seat.
B990A01O
Never allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front passenger
seat when the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator is illuminat-
ed. During a collision, the air bag
will not inflate if the indicator is
illuminated. Have your passen-
ger reposition themselves in the
seat. If the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator remains illu-
minated after the passenger
repositions himself properly and
the vehicle is restarted, have the
passenger move to the rear seat
because the air bag will not
inflate.
WARNING
(continued)
• Do not put an electronic
device (ex. Laptop computer,
after market, navigation, satel-
lite audio, video game
machine, MP3, AC inverter,
etc.) in the front passenger
backseat pocket or on the
front passenger seat.
• Do not place a sitting mat on
the front passenger seat.
• Do not place any items under
the front passenger seat.
• Do not place sharp objects on
the front passenger seat.
These may damage the occu-
pant classification system. If
they puncture the seat cush-
ion.
• Avoid spilling liquids on the
front seat; this may cause the
OCS not to work properly.
Keep the front seat dry at all
times.
2-62
Safety system of your vehicle
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator illuminates for approxi-
mately 4 seconds after the ignition
switch is in the ON position or
after the engine is started. If the
front passenger seat is occupied,
the OCS will then classify the front
passenger after several more sec-
onds.
Do Not Install a Child Restraint
in the Front Passenger's Seat
Even though your vehicle is equipped
with the OCS, never install a child
restraint in the front passenger’s seat.
An inflating air bag can forcefully
strike a child or child restraint result-
ing in serious or fatal injury.
NOTICE
• NEVER place a rear-facing or
front-facing child restraint in
the front passenger’s seat of
the vehicle.
• An inflating frontal air bag
could forcefully strike a child
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always properly restrain chil-
dren in an appropriate child
restraint in the rear seat of the
vehicle.
WARNING
1JBH3051
2-63
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off
in a Collision?
Air bags are not designed to inflate in
every collision. There are certain
types of accidents in which the air bag
would not be expected to provide
additional protection. These include
rear impacts, second or third colli-
sions in multiple impact accidents, as
well as low speed impacts. Damage
to the vehicle indicates a collision
energy absorption, and is not an indi-
cator of whether or not an air bag
should have inflated.
Air bag collision sensors
To reduce the risk of an air bag
deploying unexpectedly and
causing serious injury or death:
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
• Do not perform maintenance
on or around the air bag sen-
sors.If the location or angle of
the sensors is altered, the air
bags may deploy when they
should not or may not deploy
when they should.
• Do not install bumper guards
or replace the bumper with a
non-genuine HYUNDAI parts.
This may adversely affect the
collision and air bag deploy-
ment performance.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF or ACC posi-
tion when the vehicle is being
towed to prevent inadvertent
air bag deployment.
• Have all air bag repairs conduct-
ed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
WARNING
2-64
Safety system of your vehicle
1. SRS control module
2. Front impact sensor
3. Side pressure sensor
4. Side impact sensor
OLFH034046N-1/OLF034047/OLFH034048N/OLF034049/OLF034068
2-65
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags and the driver’s knee
air bag are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the
severity, speed, or angles of impact
of the front collision.
Side and curtain air bags
Side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the severity, speed, or
angles of impact resulting from a
side impact collision.
Although the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s air bags are designed to
inflate in frontal collisions, they also
may inflate in other types of colli-
sions if the front impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact. Side and
curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in side impact collisions or
rollover situations, but they may
inflate in other collisions if the side
impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact. Also, the side and curtain air
bags are designed to inflate when a
rollover is detected by a rollover sen-
sor.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
OLF034051
OLF034052
OLF034050
2-66
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag non-inflation conditions
In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags
are designed not to deploy in such
cases because they may not provide
benefits beyond the protection of the
seat belts.
Front air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because
occupants are moved backward by
the force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not provide
any additional benefit.
Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move in the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, front air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the severi-
ty, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.
OLF034055OLF034054
OLF034053
2-67
Safety system of your vehicle
2
In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would
not be able to provide any additional
benefit, and thus the sensors may
not deploy any air bags.
Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle
causing it to "ride" under a vehicle
with a higher ground clearance. Air
bags may not inflate in this "under-
ride" situation because deceleration
forces that are detected by sensors
may be significantly reduced by such
"underride" collisions.
Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because air bag
deployment could not provide protec-
tion to the occupants.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
over by a side impact collision.
ODH033076 OLF034056 OLF034057
2-68
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated and the colli-
sion energy is absorbed by the vehi-
cle structure.
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate when the ignition switch or the
engine Start/Stop button is in the ON
position, or continuously remains on,
have your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger’s panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, take the follow-
ing precautions:
• Do not attempt to modify or
disconnect the SRS compo-
nents or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifica-
tions to the body structure.
• Do not place objects over or
near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, or the front passen-
ger’s panel above the glove
box.
• Clean the air bag pad covers
with a soft cloth moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and
proper deployment of the sys-
tem.
• Always have inflated air bags
replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
WARNING
OLF034058
2-69
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Additional Safety Precautions
Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash or
emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or be ejected
from the vehicle.
Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
seat belt can reduce the protection
provided by the seat belt and increase
the chance of serious injury in a crash
Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the opera-
tion of the supplemental restraint sys-
tem sensing components and wiring
harnesses.
Do not cause impact to the doors.
Impact to the doors when the ignition
switch or the engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position may cause the air
bags to inflate.
Modifications to accommodate
disabilities. If you require modifica-
tion to your vehicle to accommodate
a disability, contact the HYUNDAI
Customer Connect Center at 1-877-
378-8727.
Adding equipment to or modify-
ing your air bag equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle’s frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle’s air bag system.
(Continued)
• If components of the air bag
system must be discarded, or if
the vehicle must be scrapped,
certain safety precautions
must be observed. Consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
the necessary information.
Failure to follow these precau-
tions could increase the risk of
personal injury.
Air Bag Warning Labels
Air bag warning labels, required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to
alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system. Be sure to read all of the information about the
air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this Owners Manual.
Safety system of your vehicle
2-70
OLFH034046N/OLF034060N/OLF034061
Convenient features of your vehicle
Accessing your vehicle .........................................3-3
Smart Key............................................................................3-3
Immobilizer System ...........................................................3-8
Door locks...............................................................3-9
Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle......3-9
Operating Door Locks from Inside the Vehicle .......3-10
Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features...............................3-12
Child-Protector Rear Door locks ................................3-12
Theft-alarm system.............................................3-13
Driver position memory system.........................3-14
Storing Positions into Memory....................................3-14
Easy Access Function ....................................................3-15
Steering wheel......................................................3-16
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .....................................3-16
Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering..............................3-17
Heated Steering Wheel..................................................3-18
Horn....................................................................................3-18
Mirrors...................................................................3-19
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................................3-19
Side View Mirrors ...........................................................3-34
Reverse Parking Aid Function......................................3-37
Windows ................................................................3-38
Power Windows...............................................................3-39
Panoramic sunroof ..............................................3-42
Sunshade...........................................................................3-43
Sliding the Sunroof.........................................................3-43
Tilting the Sunroof .........................................................3-44
Closing the Sunroof........................................................3-44
To Reset the Sunroof.....................................................3-45
Exterior features .................................................3-46
Hood ...................................................................................3-46
Trunk ..................................................................................3-47
Smart Trunk......................................................................3-50
Fuel Filler Door (Hybrid) ...............................................3-53
Fuel Filler Door (Plug-in hybrid).................................3-56
Instrument cluster................................................3-60
Instrument cluster control ............................................3-61
Gauges ...............................................................................3-62
Warning and indicator lights ........................................3-66
Warning messages ..........................................................3-80
LCD Display.......................................................................3-95
Trip computer.................................................................3-105
Light.....................................................................3-115
Exterior Lights ...............................................................3-115
Smart High Beam ..........................................................3-117
Welcome System ...........................................................3-123
Interior Lights ................................................................3-124
3
Wipers and washers ..........................................3-128
Windshield Wipers ........................................................3-128
Windshield Washers .....................................................3-129
Driver Assist System .........................................3-130
Rear view camera .........................................................3-130
Rear parking assist system ........................................3-131
Rear parking assist system precautions.................3-134
Defroster.............................................................3-135
Rear Window Defroster ..............................................3-135
Automatic climate control system...................3-136
Automatic heating and air conditioning..................3-137
Manual heating and air conditioning.......................3-138
System operation..........................................................3-146
System maintenance....................................................3-148
Windshield defrosting and defogging ............3-150
Automatic Climate Control System ...........................3-151
Defogging logic ............................................................3-152
Climate control additional features.................3-153
Automatic Ventilation...................................................3-153
Sunroof Inside Air Recirculation...............................3-153
Storage compartment........................................3-154
Center Console Storage ..............................................3-154
Glove Box........................................................................3-154
Sunglass Holder.............................................................3-155
Multi box .........................................................................3-155
Interior features.................................................3-156
Cup Holder ......................................................................3-156
Sunvisor...........................................................................3-157
Power Outlet ..................................................................3-157
Clock.................................................................................3-159
Clothes Hanger ..............................................................3-160
Floor Mat Anchor(s).....................................................3-161
Side Curtain ....................................................................3-162
Luggage Net Holder .....................................................3-162
3
3-3
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
AACCCCEESSSSIINNGG YYOOUURR VVEEHHIICCLLEE
Smart Key
Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and trunk) and even start the
engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3.Trunk Unlock
4. Panic
Locking
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
trunk.
2. Either press the door handle but-
ton or press the Door Lock button
(1) on the smart key.
3.The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.
Information
The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within
28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the out-
side door handle.
Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for
three seconds if any of the following
occur:
• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.
• The Engine Start/Stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the trunk is open.
i
OLF044002NOLF044003/Q
Do not leave the Smart Key in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children. Unattended children
could press the Engine Start/
Stop button and may operate
power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
3-4
Convenient features of your vehicle
Unlocking your vehicle
To unlock your vehicle:
1. Make sure you have the smart key
in your possession.
2. Press either the button on the door
handle of the Door Unlock button
(2) on the smart key. The driver's
door will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
3. If you press the driver door outside
door handle button or Door Unlock
button on the smart key again
within four seconds, then all the
doors will unlock.
Information
• The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is with-
in 28-40 inches (0.7~1m) from the
outside door handle.
• Either the driver or front passenger
door can be opened with the door
handle button when the smart key is
within this range.
• If you press the front passenger out-
side door handle, while carrying the
Smart Key, all doors will unlock.
• After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 sec-
onds unless a door is opened.
Opening the trunk
To open the trunk:
1. Make sure you have the smart key
in your possession.
2. Press either the trunk handle but-
ton or press and hold the trunk
Unlock button (3) on the smart key
for more than one second. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
3. Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automat-
ically.
Information
The trunk handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within
28 inches (0.7 m) from the trunk han-
dle.
i
i
OLF044002N
3-5
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Panic button
Press the Panic button (4) and hold
for more than one second. The horn
sounds and hazard warning lights
blink for about 30 seconds.To cancel
the panic mode, press any button on
the Smart Key.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key.
For more information, refer to the
"Engine Start/Stop Button" sec-
tion in chapter 5.
To prevent damaging the smart key:
• Keep the smart key in a cool, dry
place to avoid damage or mal-
function. Exposure to moisture
or high temperature may cause
the internal circuit of the smart
key to malfunction which may
not be covered under warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
smart key.
• Protect the smart key from
extreme temperatures.
Always have the smart key with
you when leaving the vehicle. If
the smart key is left near the vehi-
cle, the vehicle battery may be dis-
charged.
Mechanical key
If the Smart Key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key from
the smart key fob, press and hold the
release button (1) and pull the
mechanical key (2) out.
To unlock the vehicle using the
mechanical key, insert the mechani-
cal key into the key hole on the driv-
er door.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OLF044007
3-6
Convenient features of your vehicle
Loss of a smart key
A maximum of two Smart Keys can
be registered to a single vehicle. If
you happen to lose your smart key,
you should immediately take the
vehicle and remaining keys to your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or tow
the vehicle, if necessary.
Smart key precautions
The smart key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the trans-
mitter.
• The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
• Another vehicle's smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the smart key, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the smart key is in close proximity
to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phone's normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
When possible, avoid placing the
remote key and your mobile phone in
the same location such as a pants or
jacket pocket in order to avoid inter-
ference between the two devices.
Keep the smart key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves
to the key surface.
CAUTION
3-7
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the device.
Battery replacement
If the Smart Key is not working prop-
erly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Pry open the rear cover of the
smart key.
2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
smart key.
If you suspect your smart key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your smart key is not work-
ing correctly, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
and regulation(s).
i
i
OLF044008
3-8
Convenient features of your vehicle
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When the engine Start/Stop button is
in the ON position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, the system does not
recognize the coding of the key.
Place engine Start/Stop button to the
OFF position, then place the engine
Start/Stop button to the ON position
again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e., key
chain) is near the key. The engine
may not start because the metal may
interrupt the transponder signal from
transmitting normally.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of the key, it is
recommended that you contact your
HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
The transponder in your key is an
important part of the immobilizer
system. It is designed to give
years of trouble-free service, how-
ever you should avoid exposure to
moisture, static electricity and
rough handling. Immobilizer sys-
tem malfunction could occur.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.
i
NOTICE
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and
should be kept confidential.
WARNING
3-9
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Operating Door Locks from
Outside the Vehicle
Mechanical key
If you lock the driver's door with a
mechanical key, all vehicle doors will
lock. If you unlock the driver's door
with a mechanical key, the driver’s
door will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Smart key
To lock the doors, press the button on
the outside door handle while carry-
ing the Smart Key with you or press
the Door Lock button on the Smart
Key.
Press the button on the driver’s out-
side door handle while carrying the
Smart Key with you or press the
Door Unlock button on the Smart
Key, the driver's door will unlock. If
you press the button on the front
passenger's outside door, all doors
will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
i
DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSS
OLF044002N
OLF044003
Door
Unlock
Door
Lock
OLF044009N/Q
3-10
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operating Door Locks from
Inside the Vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the "Unlock" posi-
tion. The red mark (2) on the door
lock button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the "Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the driv-
er door or front passenger door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button is
unlocked and the door will open.
• The doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is open.
Information
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
mechanical key to unlock the door
from outside.
With the central door lock
switch
When pressing the ( ) switch (1), all
vehicle doors will lock.
When pressing the ( ) switch (2), all
vehicle doors will unlock.
If the smart key is in the vehicle and
any door is opened, the doors will
not lock even though the lock button
(1) of the central door lock switch is
pressed.
i
OLF044010
Unlock
Lock
■ Driver’s door
OLF044011N/OLF044480N
■ Front passenger’s door
Do not pull the inner door handle
of driver's (or passenger's) door
while the vehicle is moving.
WARNING
3-11
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion. If the
doors are unlocked, the risk of
being thrown from the vehicle in
a crash is increased.
WARNING
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
serious injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle. Children
might operate features of the
vehicle that could injure them,
or they could encounter other
harm, possibly from someone
gaining entry to the vehicle.
WARNING
Always secure your vehicle.
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
increases the potential risk to
you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle.
To secure your vehicle, while
depressing the brake, move the
shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion, engage the parking brake,
and place engine Start/Stop but-
ton to the OFF position, close all
windows, lock all doors, and
always take the key with you.
WARNING
Opening a door when something
is approaching may cause dam-
age or injury. Be careful when
opening doors and watch for
vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles
or pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
CAUTION
If people must spend a longer
time in the vehicle while it is
very hot or cold outside, there
is rick of injuries or danger to
life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are peo-
ple in it.
WARNING
3-12
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features
Impact sensing door unlock
system
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when an impact causes the
air bags to deploy.
Shift lever auto door lock
All doors will be automatically locked
when shifting the shift lever out of P
(Park) with the engine running.
You can activate or deactivate the
Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from
the User Settings Mode on the LCD
display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
Child-Protector Rear Door locks
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children seated in the
rear from accidentally opening the
rear doors.The rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock is located on
the edge of each rear door.When the
child safety lock is in the lock (1)
position, the rear door will not open if
the inner door handle (2) is pulled.
To lock the child safety lock, insert a
screwdriver into the hole and turn it
to the lock position.
To allow a rear door to be opened
from inside the vehicle, unlock the
child safety lock.
If children accidently open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out of
the vehicle.The rear door safety
locks should always be used
whenever children are in the
vehicle.
WARNING
OLF044012
3-13
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
This system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables. The horn will
sound and the hazard warning lights
will blink continuously if any of the
following occurs:
- A door is opened without using the
smart key.
- The trunk is opened without using
the smart key.
- The hood is opened.
The alarm continues for 30 seconds,
then the system resets. To turn off
the alarm, unlock the doors with
smart key.
The Theft Alarm System automati-
cally sets 30 seconds after you lock
the doors and the trunk. For the sys-
tem to activate, you must lock the
doors and the trunk from outside the
vehicle with the smart key or by
pressing the button on the outside of
the door handle with the smart key in
your possession.
The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once to
indicate the system is armed.
Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the trunk, or the
hood without using the smart key will
cause the alarm to activate.
The Theft Alarm System will not set if
the hood, the trunk, or any door is
not fully closed. If the system will not
set, check the hood, the trunk, or the
doors are fully closed.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it.
Information
• Do not lock the doors until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
remaining passenger leaves the
vehicle when the system is armed,
the alarm will be activated.
• If the vehicle is not disarmed with the
smart key, open the doors by using
the mechanical key and start hybrid
system by directly pressing the
switch with the smart key.
• If the system is disarmed by unlock-
ing the vehicle, but neither a door or
the trunk is opened within 30 sec-
onds, the doors will relock and the
system will rearm automatically.
i
TTHHEEFFTT--AALLAARRMM SSYYSSTTEEMM
3-14
Convenient features of your vehicle
The Driver Position Memory System
is provided to store and recall the fol-
lowing memory settings with a sim-
ple button operation.
- Driver's seat position
- Outside rearview mirror position
- Instrument panel illumination intensity
If the battery is disconnected, the
position memory will be lost and the
driving positions must be stored in
the system again.
If the Driver Position Memory
System does not operate normally,
have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Storing Positions into Memory
1. Check that the shift lever is in P
(Park) while the engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON position.
2. Adjust the driver's seat position,
outside rearview mirror position
and instrument panel illumination
intensity to positions comfortable
for the driver.
3. Press the SET button.The system
will beep once and notify you
"Press button to save settings" on
the LCD display.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds.The sys-
tem will beep twice when the mem-
ory has been successfully stored.
5.
"Driver 1 (or 2) settings saved" will
appear on the LCD display.
DDRRIIVVEERR PPOOSSIITTIIOONN MMEEMMOORRYY SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OLF044013
Never attempt to operate the driv-
er position memory system while
the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
WARNING
OLF044403N/OLF044404N
3-15
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Recalling positions from memory
1. Check that the shift lever is in P
(Park) while the engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON position.
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2).The system will beep once,
and then the driver's seat position,
outside rearview mirror position
and instrument panel illumination
intensity will automatically adjust to
the stored positions.
3.
"Driver 1(or 2) settings is applied" will
appear on the LCD display.
• While recalling the "1" memory
position, pressing the SET or 1
button temporarily stops the
adjustment of the recalled memo-
ry position. Pressing the 2 button
recalls the "2" memory position.
• While recalling the "2" memory
position, pressing the SET or 2
button temporarily stops the
adjustment of the recalled memo-
ry position. Pressing the 1 button
recalls the "1" memory position.
• While recalling the stored posi-
tions, pressing one of the con-
trol buttons for the driver’s seat,
outside rearview mirror or
instrument panel illumination
will cause the movement of that
component to stop and move in
the direction that the control
button is pressed.
Easy Access Function
When exiting the vehicle the driver’s
seat will move rearward when the
engine is turned off and the shift lever
in P (Park).
When entering the vehicle the dri-
ver's seat will move forward when
engine Start/Stop button is in the
ACC position.
You can activate or deactivate the
Easy Access Function from the User
Settings Mode on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
NOTICE
OLF044401N/OLF044402N
3-16
Convenient features of your vehicle
SSTTEEEERRIINNGG WWHHEEEELL
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
The system assists you with steering
the vehicle. If the engine is turned off
or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, you may still
steer the vehicle, but it will require
increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort may be high
immediately after placing the engine
Start/Stop button is in the ON posi-
tion.
This happens as the system per-
forms the EPS system diagnostics.
When the diagnostics are completed,
the steering wheel will return to its
normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON/OFF position.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed.
• If the outside ambient temperature
is low, when you operate the steer-
ing wheel a noise from the electric
power steering may occur. As the
temperature increases, the noise will
disappear.
i
If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate nor-
mally, the warning light ( ) will
illuminate on the instrument
cluster. You may steer the vehi-
cle, but it will require increased
steering efforts.Take your vehi-
cle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system
checked as soon as possible.
CAUTION
3-17
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering
When adjusting the steering wheel to
a comfortable position, adjust the
steering wheel so that it points
toward your chest, not toward your
face. Make sure you can see the
instrument panel warning lights and
gauges. After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and down to
be certain it is locked in position.
Always adjust the position of the
steering wheel before driving.
To adjust the steering wheel angle
and height:
1. Pull down the lock-release lever (1).
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3).
3. Pull up the lock-release lever to
lock the steering wheel in place.
Information
Sometimes the lock release lever may
not engage completely. This may
occur when the gears of the locking
mechanism do not completely mesh.
If this occurs, pull down on the lock-
release lever, readjust the steering
wheel again, and then pull back up on
the release lever to lock the steering
wheel in place.
i
OLF044015
NEVER adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This may
cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
WARNING
3-18
Convenient features of your vehicle
Heated Steering Wheel
(if equipped)
When the engine Start/Stop button is
in the ON/OFF position or when the
engine is running, press the heated
steering wheel button to warm the
steering wheel. The indicator on the
button will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button again.The indicator
on the button will turn off.
The heated steering wheel will auto-
matically turn off after approximately
30 minutes.
Do not install any cover or acces-
sory on the steering wheel. The
cover or accessory could cause
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist.
Do not press on the horn with a
sharp-pointed object.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OLF044018
OLFP045579N
3-19
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
MMIIRRRROORRSS
Inside Rearview Mirror
Before you start driving, adjust the
rearview mirror to center on the view
through the rear window.
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as this may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
NOTICE
Make sure your line of sight is
not obstructed. Do not place
objects in the rear seat, cargo
area, or behind the rear head-
rests which could interfere with
your vision through the rear
window.
WARNING
NEVER adjust the mirror while
driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
WARNING
To prevent serious injury during
an accident or deployment of
the air bag, do not modify the
rearview mirror and do not
install a wide mirror.
WARNING
OLF044019
OLF044474N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Day
Night
3-20
Convenient features of your vehicle
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlamps of
the vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
Blue Link
®
center (if equipped)
For details, refer to the Blue Link
®
Owner's Guide, Navigation Manual
or Audio Manual.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with HomeLink
®
system,
compass and Blue Link
®
(for U.S.A)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System. During
nighttime driving, this feature will
automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the com-
pass indicates the direction the vehi-
cle is pointed. The HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.
OLF044021
3-21
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
(1) Telematics button
(2) Telematics button
(3) Telematics button
(4) Compass control button &
Dimming ON/OFF button
(5) Status indicator LED
(6) Channel 1 button
(7) Channel 2 button
(8) Channel 3 button
(9) Compass display
(10) Rear light sensor
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS
®
) Mirror
(if equipped)
The NVS
®
Mirror automatically
reduces glare by monitoring light lev-
els in the front and the rear of the
vehicle. Any object that obstructs
either light sensor will degrade the
automatic dimming control feature.
For more information regarding
NVS
®
mirrors and other applica-
tions, please refer to the Gentex
website:
www.gentex.com
Your mirror will automatically dim
upon detecting glare from the vehi-
cles traveling behind you. The auto-
dimming function can be controlled
by pressing the Dimming ON/OFF
button:
1. Pressing and holding the button
for 3 seconds turns the auto-dim-
ming function OFF which is indi-
cated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing and holding the button
for 3 seconds again turns the
auto-dimming function ON which
is indicated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning on.
The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-Nav™
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
OLF044475N
3-22
Convenient features of your vehicle
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when hybrid system is cycled.To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button
within 1 second to turn the display
feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button
again within 1 second to turn the
display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag-
netic north and true north. To com-
pensate for this difference you will
need to adjust the Zone setting based
on where you live.
B520C05NF
3-23
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
To adjust the Zone setting:
1.Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for 6
seconds, the current Zone
Number will appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display
will set the new Zone.
4.Within about 5 seconds the com-
pass will start displaying a com-
pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle’s magnetic field. In
these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct these changes.
If you need to recalibrate the com-
pass:
1. Press and hold the button for
more than 9 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared a "C"
will appear in the display.
2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete cir-
cles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System can replace up to three
hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters with a single built-in
device. This innovative feature will
learn the radio frequency codes of
most current transmitters to operate
devices such as gate operators,
garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems, even home
lighting. Both standard and rolling
code-equipped transmitters can be
programmed by following the out-
lined procedures.
Additional HomeLink
®
information
can be found at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink
®
programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink
®
buttons be erased for
security purposes.
3-24
Convenient features of your vehicle
Programming HomeLink
®
Please note the following:
• When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the
vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new bat-
tery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink
®
for quicker
training and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the
engine Start/Stop button to be
placed in the ACC position for pro-
gramming and/or operation of
HomeLink
®
.
• In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink
®
at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons
(
,
), HomeLink
®
Channel 1
and Channel 3, until the indicator
light begins to flash (after 10 sec-
onds). Release both buttons. Do
not hold the buttons for longer
than 20 seconds.
ODH044413N
Flashing
Before programming HomeLink
®
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and
objects are out of the way of the
device to prevent potential harm
or damage. Do not use the
HomeLink
®
with any garage door
opener that lacks the safety stop
and reverse features required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April
1, 1982). A garage door that can-
not detect an object - signaling
the door to stop and reverse -
does not meet current U.S. feder-
al safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without
these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
WARNING
3-25
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
away from the HomeLink
®
button
you wish to program while keeping
the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink
®
and hand-
held transmitter buttons until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light changes
from a slow to a rapid blinking
light. Now you may release both
the HomeLink
®
and hand-held
transmitter buttons.
Information
Some devices may require you to
replace this Programming step 3 with
procedures noted in the "Gate
Operator/Canadian Programming"
chapter. If the HomeLink
®
indicator
light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these
steps, contact HomeLink
®
at
www.homelink.com.
4. Firmly press, hold for 5 seconds and
release the programmed
HomeLink
®
button up to two sepa-
rate times to activate the door. If the
door does not activate, press and
hold the just-trained HomeLink
®
but-
ton and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate
when the HomeLink
®
button is
pressed and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
"Programming" steps 5-7 to com-
plete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most com-
monly a garage door opener).
5. At the garage door opener receiv-
er (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the "learn" or "smart" but-
ton. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
i
ODH044414N
Flashing
3-26
Convenient features of your vehicle
6.Firmly press and release the
"learn" or "smart" button. (The
name and color of the button vary
by manufacturer). There are 30
seconds to initiate step 7.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for 2 seconds and
release the programmed
HomeLink
®
button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming
process.
HomeLink
®
should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.
Gate operator & Canadian program-
ming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System button (note steps 2
through 3 in the Programming portion
of this document) while you press
and re-press ("cycle") your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until
the frequency signal has been
learned. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several
seconds upon successful training.
Operating HomeLink
®
To operate, simply press and release
the programmed HomeLink
®
button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security sys-
tem, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink
®
button
To program a device to HomeLink
®
using a HomeLink
®
button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1.Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT
release the button.
2.The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds.Without releasing
the HomeLink
®
button, proceed
with "Programming" step 2.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com
or
1-800-355-3515.
3-27
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three pro-
grammed buttons:
1.Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons until the indi-
cator light begins to flash after 10
seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 20 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time following the
appropriate steps in the
Programming chapters above.
NVS
®
is a registered trademark and
Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark
owned by Johnson Controls,
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4
IC: 4112A-TLMHL4
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
3. The transceiver has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to
operate the device.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with compass and HomeLink
®
system (for Canada)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System.
During nighttime driving, this feature
will automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the com-
pass indicates the direction the vehi-
cle is pointed. The HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.
i
3-28
Convenient features of your vehicle
(1) Channel 1 button
(2) Channel 2 button
(3) Status indicator LED
(4) Channel 3 button
(5) Rear light sensor
(6) Dimming ON/OFF button
(7) Compass control button
(8) Compass display
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS
®
) Mirror
(if equipped)
The NVS
®
Mirror automatically
reduces glare by monitoring light lev-
els in the front and the rear of the
vehicle. Any object that obstructs
either light sensor will degrade the
automatic dimming control feature.
For more information regarding
NVS
®
mirrors and other applica-
tions, please refer to the Gentex
website:
www.gentex.com
The auto-dimming function can be
controlled by pressing the ON/OFF
button:
1. Pressing the button turns the auto-
dimming function OFF which is
indicated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing the button again turns
the auto-dimming function ON
which is indicated by the green
Status Indicator LED turning on.
The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-Nav™
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
OLF044476N
3-29
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when hybrid system is cycled.To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button to
turn the display feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button
again to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the but-
ton and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag-
netic north and true north. To com-
pensate for this difference you will
need to adjust the Zone setting
based on where you live.
B520C05NF
3-30
Convenient features of your vehicle
To adjust the Zone setting:
1.Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for
more than 3 but less than 6 sec-
onds, the current Zone Number
will appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display
will set the new Zone.
4.Within about 5 seconds the com-
pass will start displaying a com-
pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle’s magnetic field. In
these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct these changes.
If you need to recalibrate the com-
pass:
1. Press and hold the button for
more than 6 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared a "C"
will appear in the display.
2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete cir-
cles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System can replace up to three hand-
held radio-frequency (RF) transmit-
ters with a single built-in device. This
innovative feature will learn the radio
frequency codes of most current
transmitters to operate devices such
as gate operators, garage door open-
ers, entry door locks, security sys-
tems, even home lighting. Both stan-
dard and rolling code-equipped trans-
mitters can be programmed by fol-
lowing the outlined procedures.
Additional HomeLink
®
information
can be found at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink
®
programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink
®
buttons be erased for
security purposes.
3-31
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Programming HomeLink
®
Please note the following:
• When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the
vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new bat-
tery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink
®
for quicker
training and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the
engine Start/Stop button to be
placed in the ACC position for pro-
gramming and/or operation of
HomeLink
®
.
• In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink
®
at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Rolling code programming
Rolling code devices which are
"code-protected" and manufactured
after 1996 may be determined by the
following:
• Reference the device owner’s
manual for verification.
• The handheld transmitter appears
to program the HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver but does not
activate the device.
• Press and hold the trained
HomeLink button. The device has
the rolling code feature if the indi-
cator light flashes rapidly and then
turns solid after 2 seconds.
Before programming HomeLink
®
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and
objects are out of the way of the
device to prevent potential harm
or damage. Do not use the
HomeLink
®
with any garage door
opener that lacks the safety stop
and reverse features required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April
1, 1982). A garage door that can-
not detect an object - signaling
the door to stop and reverse -
does not meet current U.S. feder-
al safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without
these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
WARNING
3-32
Convenient features of your vehicle
To train rolling code devices, follow
these instructions:
1. At the garage door opener receiv-
er (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the "learn" or "smart" but-
ton. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
Exact location and color of the but-
ton may vary by garage door
opener brand. If there is difficulty
locating the training button, refer-
ence the device owner’s manual or
please visit our Web site at
www.homelink.com.
2.Firmly press and release the
"learn" or "smart" button (which
activates the "training light"). You
will have 30 seconds to initiate
step 3.
3. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for two seconds and
then release the desired
HomeLink
®
button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time to complete the pro-
gramming. (Some devices may
require you to repeat this
sequence a third time to complete
the programming.)
4. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your device should activate.
5.To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow either
steps 1 through 4 above for other
Rolling Code devices or steps 2
through 5 in Standard Programming
for standard devices.
Standard programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons,
HomeLink
®
Channel 1 and
Channel 3 Buttons, until the indi-
cator light begins to flash (after 20
seconds). Release both buttons.
Do not hold the buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
away from the HomeLink
®
buttons
while keeping the indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink
®
and hand-
held transmitter button. DO NOT
release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
4.While continuing to hold the but-
tons the red Indicator Status LED
will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink
®
successfully
trains to the frequency signal from
the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons.
3-33
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your device should activate when
the HomeLink
®
button is pressed
and released.
6.To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow steps 2
through 5.
Gate operator & Canadian program-
ming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System button (note
steps 2 through 4 in the Standard
Programming portion of this docu-
ment) while you press and re-press
("cycle") your handheld transmitter
every two seconds until the frequen-
cy signal has been learned.The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
Operating HomeLink
®
To operate, simply press and release
the programmed HomeLink
®
button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security sys-
tem, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
To program a new device to a previ-
ously trained HomeLink
®
button, fol-
low these steps:
1.Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button. Do NOT
release until step 4 has been com-
pleted.
2.When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
position the handheld transmitter 1
to 3 inches away from the
HomeLink
®
surface.
3.Press and hold the handheld
transmitter button.The HomeLink
®
indicator light will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
4.When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your new device should activate.
3-34
Convenient features of your vehicle
Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three pro-
grammed buttons:
1.Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons until the indi-
cator light begins to flash-after 20
seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time following the
appropriate steps in the Programming
chapters above.
NVS
®
is a registered trademark and
Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark
owned by Johnson Controls,
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
3. The transceiver has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to
operate the device.
Side View Mirrors
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand side view
mirrors. The Side View Mirrors can
be adjusted remotely with the remote
switch.The Side View Mirrors can be
folded to prevent damage during an
automatic car wash or when passing
through a narrow street.
The right hand side view is convex.
Objects seen in the mirror are closer
than they appear.
i
OLF044024
3-35
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Use the rear view mirror inside the
vehicle or direct observation to deter-
mine the actual distance of following
vehicles when changing lanes.
Blind Spot Mirror (if equipped)
The Blind Spot Mirror (BSM) is a
supplemental mirror that minimizes
the driver's blind spot zone by
expanding the field of view on the
rear side of the vehicle. The blind
spot mirror is equipped on the dri-
ver's left side view mirror.
Do not clean the mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum
based cleaning products.
NOTICE
Do not adjust or fold the left and
right side view mirrors while
driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
WARNING
• Do not scrape ice off the mir-
ror face; this may damage the
surface of the glass.
• If the mirror is jammed with
ice, do not adjust the mirror by
force. Use an approved de-icer
spray. (Do not use radiator
anti-freeze.) Wipe the mirror
using a sponge or soft cloth
with warm water. Or move the
vehicle to a warm area and
allow the ice to melt.
CAUTION
OLF044477N
OLF044478N
• Always check the road condi-
tion while driving for unex-
pected situations even though
the vehicle is equipped with a
blind spot mirror.
• The blind zone mirror is a
device made for convenience.
Do not solely rely on the mir-
ror but always pay attention to
traffic around you.
WARNING
3-36
Convenient features of your vehicle
Side view mirror adjustment
Adjusting the left and right side view
mirrors:
1. Move the lever (1) towards the
L(Left) or R(Right) to select the
rearview mirror you would like to
adjust.
2. Use the mirror adjustment control
switch to position the selected mir-
ror up, down, left or right.
3. After adjustment, place the lever
(1) in the center to prevent inad-
vertent adjustment.
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch
is pressed. Do not press the
switch longer than necessary,
the motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the side
view mirror by hand or the motor
may be damaged.
Folding the side view mirrors
To fold either the left or right hand
side view mirror, grasp the housing
of the mirror and then fold it toward
the rear of the vehicle.
NOTICE
OLF044025N
OLF044026
3-37
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Reverse Parking Aid Function
When you move the shift lever to the
R (Reverse) position, the outside
rearview mirror(s) will rotate down-
wards to aid with driving in reverse.
The position of the outside rearview
mirror switch (1) determines whether
or not the mirrors will move:
Left/Right :When either the L (Left) or
R (Right) switch is select-
ed, both outside rearview
mirrors will move.
Neutral : When neither switch is select-
ed, the outside rearview mir-
rors will not move.
The outside rearview mirrors will
automatically revert to their original
positions if any of the following occur:
• Engine Start/Stop button is placed
to the ACC or OFF position.
• The shift lever is moved to any
position except R (Reverse).
• The remote control outside rearview
mirror switch is not selected.
OLF044014N
3-38
Convenient features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window*
(7) Power window lock switch
WWIINNDDOOWWSS
OLF044030N
3-39
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Power Windows
Engine Start/Stop button must be in
the ON position to be able to raise or
lower the windows. Each door has a
Power Window switch to control that
door’s window. The driver has a
Power Window Lock switch which
can block the operation of passenger
windows. The power windows will
operate for approximately 30 sec-
onds after engine Start/Stop button is
in the ACC or OFF position. However,
if the front doors are opened, the
Power Windows cannot be operated
even within the 30 second period.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• While driving with the rear win-
dows down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) opened (or partially
opened), your vehicle may demon-
strate a wind buffeting or pulsation
noise. This noise is normal and can
be reduced or eliminated by taking
the following actions. If the noise
occurs with one or both of the rear
windows down, partially lower both
front windows approximately one
inch. If you experience the noise
with the sunroof open, slightly close
the sunroof.
Window opening and closing
To open:
Press the window switch down to the
first detent position (5). Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop.
To close:
Pull the window switch up to the first
detent position (5). Release the win-
dow switch when you want the win-
dow to stop.
i
To avoid serious injury or death,
do not extend your head, arms
or body outside the windows
while driving.
WARNING
OLF044031
Do not install any accessories
in the area of windows. It may
impact jam protection.
WARNING
3-40
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto up/down window
(if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the sec-
ond detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press down and release the switch.
To reset the power windows
If the power windows do not operate
normally, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Place engine Start/Stop button is
in the ON position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the power window
switch for at least one second.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Automatic reverse (if equipped)
If a window senses any obstacle while
it is closing automatically, it will stop
and lower approximately 12 inches (30
cm) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
If the power window switch is pulled
up continuously again within 5 sec-
onds after the window is lowered by
the automatic window reversal fea-
ture, the automatic window reversal
will not operate.
Information
The automatic reverse feature is only
active when the "Auto Up" feature is
used by fully pulling up the switch to
the second detent.
i
OLF044032
Make sure body parts or other
objects are safely out of the way
before closing the windows to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
Objects less than 0.16 inch (4 mm)
in diameter caught between the
window glass and the upper win-
dow channel may not be detected
by the automatic reverse window
and the window will not stop and
reverse direction.
WARNING
The automatic reverse feature
doesn't activate while resetting
power window system. Make
sure body parts or other objects
are safely out of the way before
closing the windows to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage.
WARNING
3-41
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Power window lock switch
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passen-
ger doors by pressing the power win-
dow lock switch.
When the power window lock switch
is pressed:
• The rear passenger control will not
be able to operate the rear pas-
senger power window
• Note that the front passenger con-
trol is still able to operate the front
passenger window, and that the
driver master control can still oper-
ate all the power windows.
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver’s door and
the individual door window
switch in opposite directions at
the same time. If this is done,the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
NOTICE
OLF044033
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock switch in the LOCK posi-
tion. Serious injury or death can
result from unintentional win-
dow operation by a child.
WARNING
3-42
Convenient features of your vehicle
Engine Start/Stop button must be in
the ON position before you can open
or close the sunroof.
Information
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
The sunroof can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK (or OFF) position.
However, if the front doors are
opened, the sunroof cannot be oper-
ated even within the 30 seconds.
A panorama sunroof is made of
glass, therefore it may break in an
accident.If you do not have your seat
belt on, you may go through the bro-
ken glass and get injured or killed.
For all passengers safety, have an
appropriate protection on (ex. seat
belt, CRS, etc.).
To prevent damage to the sunroof
and the motor, do not continue to
press the sunroof control lever
after the sunroof is in the fully
open, closed or tilt position(s).
NOTICE
i
PPAANNOORRAAMMIICC SSUUNNRROOOOFF ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OLF044034
Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
WARNING
• Make sure heads, other body
parts or objects are out of the
way before using the sunroof.
• If the sunroof is left open, rain
or snow may wet the interior
of the vehicle. Also, leaving
the sunroof open when the
vehicle is unattended may
invite theft.
WARNING
3-43
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Sunshade
• To open the sunshade, press the
sunshade control switch (1).
• To close the sunshade, press the
sunshade control switch (2). If you
press the switch when the sunroof
glass is opened, the sunroof glass
will close then the sunshade will
close.
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momen-
tarily.
Sliding the Sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you push the sunroof control lever
backward past the first detent, the
sunshade will slide all the way open
and then the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
either forward or backward momen-
tarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily.
Information
Only the front glass of the panoramic
sunroof opens and closes.
i
ODH043039
OLF044036
OLF044035
3-44
Convenient features of your vehicle
Tilting the Sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide open
then the sunroof glass will tilt closed.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt open.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
Closing the Sunroof
Press the sunshade CLOSE button.
The sunroof glass will close then the
sunshade will close.To stop the sun-
roof movement at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momen-
tarily.
Automatic reverse
If the sunroof senses any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction then stop to allow
the object to be cleared.
OLF044038
• Make sure heads, body parts
or other objects are safely out
of the way before closing the
sunroof to avoid injuries or
vehicle damage.
Small objects that can get
caught between the sunroof
glass and the front glass
channel may not be detected
by the automatic reverse sys-
tem. In this case, the sunroof
glass will not detect the object
and reverse direction.
(Continued)
WARNING
OLF044037
Objects less than 0.16 inch (4
mm) in diameter caught
between the sunroof glass and
the front glass channel may not
be detected by the automatic
reverse glass and the glass will
not stop and reverse direction.
WARNING
3-45
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the sunroof
guide rail or between the sun-
roof and roof panel.
• Do not try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
motor could be damaged.
Information
After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
To Reset the Sunroof
The sunroof may need to be reset if
the following conditions occur:
- The battery is discharged or dis-
connected or the sunroof fuse has
been replaced or disconnected
- The sunroof control lever is not
operating correctly
To reset the sunroof, perform the fol-
lowing steps:
1.Turn the engine on and close the
sunroof glass and sunshade com-
pletely.
2. Release the control lever.
i
NOTICE
OLF044040
(Continued)
• To avoid serious injury or
death, do not extend your
head, arms or body outside
the sunroof while driving.
• In the event of an accident or
collision, the sunroof glass
may break. Seatbelts must be
worn by ALL passengers
whenever the vehicle is mov-
ing. ALWAYS properly restrain
children under age 13 in the
rear seats.
• In order to prevent accidental
operation of the sunroof,
especially by a child, do not let
a child operate the sunroof.
• Do not sit on the top of the
vehicle. It may cause vehicle
damage.
3-46
Convenient features of your vehicle
3. Push and hold the sunroof control
lever forward (to close the sun-
shade) for about 10 seconds until
the sunroof moves slightly, then
release the control lever.
4. Push and hold the sunroof control
lever forward until the sunroof
operates as follows:
Sunshade Open → Glass Tilt Open
→ Glass Slide Open → Glass Slide
Close → Sunshade Close
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
For more information, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
If you do not reset the sunroof, it may
not work properly.
Hood
Opening the hood
1. Park the vehicle and set the park-
ing brake.
2. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
3. Raise the hood slightly, push the
secondary latch up (1) inside of
the hood center and lift the hood
(2). After it has been raised about
halfway, it will raise completely by
itself.
i
OLF044041
OLFH044042N
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS
3-47
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway (lifted
approximately 30cm from the
closed position) and push down to
securely lock in place. Then dou-
ble check to be sure the hood is
secure.
Trunk
Opening the trunk
1. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
2.Then do one of the following :
- Press the Smart Key Trunk
Unlock button for more than one
second.
- Press the button on the trunk
itself with the Smart Key in your
possession.
- Use the mechanical key.
• Before closing the hood,
ensure all obstructions are
removed from around hood
opening.
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away.
Check there is no hood open
warning light or message dis-
played on the instrument clus-
ter. Driving with the hood
opened may cause a total loss
of visibility, which might
result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood in the raised posi-
tion, as vision is obstructed,
which might result in an acci-
dent, and the hood could fall
or be damaged.
WARNING
OLFH044043K
■ Outside
3-48
Convenient features of your vehicle
- Use the trunk release button.
3. Lift the trunk lid up.
Closing the trunk
Lower the trunk lid and press down
until it locks.
To prevent damage to the trunk lift
cylinders and the attached hard-
ware, always close the trunk
before driving.
Information
In cold and wet climates, trunk lock
and trunk mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
i
NOTICE
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before opening or closing the
Power Trunk.Wait until the trunk
is open fully and stopped
before loading or unloading
cargo from the vehicle.
WARNING
Always keep the trunk lid com-
pletely closed while the vehicle is
in motion. If it is left open or ajar,
poisonous exhaust gases con-
taining carbon monoxide (CO)
may enter the vehicle and seri-
ous illness or death may result.
WARNING
OLF044044
■ Inside
3-49
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Emergency trunk safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Emergency Trunk Safety Release
lever located inside the trunk. When
someone is inadvertently locked in
the trunk, the trunk can be opened by
moving the lever in the direction of the
arrow and pushing the trunk open.
• You and your passengers
must be aware of the location
of the Emergency Trunk
Safety Release lever in this
vehicle and how to open the
trunk in case you are acciden-
tally locked in the trunk.
• NEVER allow anyone to occu-
py the trunk of the vehicle at
any time. If the trunk is par-
tially or totally latched and the
person is unable to get out,
serious injury or death could
occur due to lack of ventila-
tion, exhaust fumes and rapid
heat build-up, or because of
exposure to cold weather con-
ditions. The trunk is also a
highly dangerous location in
the event of a crash because it
is not a protected occupant
space but is a part of the vehi-
cle’s crush zone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Your vehicle should be kept
locked and the Smart Key
should be kept out of the reach
of children. Parents should
teach their children about the
dangers of playing in trunks.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only.
WARNING
OLFH044045K
3-50
Convenient features of your vehicle
Trunk lid control switch
The trunk lid control switch is used to
prevent unauthorized access to the
trunk.
• When the trunk lid control switch is
in the UNLOCK position ( ), the
trunk can be unlocked with the trunk
release button and the smart key.
• When the trunk lid control switch is
in the LOCK position ( ), the trunk
can be unlocked with the mechani-
cal key of the smart key.
Smart Trunk (if equipped)
On a vehicle equipped with a smart
key, the trunk can be opened with
hands-free activation using the Smart
Trunk system.
How to use the Smart Trunk
The trunk can be opened with no-
touch activation satisfying all the
conditions below.
• After 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked
• Positioned in the detecting area for
more than 3 seconds.
Information
The Smart trunk will NOT operate
when:
- Any door is open, or all doors are
closed but not locked
- The smart key is detected within 15
seconds from when the doors were
closed and locked
- For vehicles equipped with illumi-
nated exterior front door handles, if
the smart key is detected within 15
seconds from when the doors were
closed and locked or if the smart key
is within 60 inches (1.5m) from the
front door handles.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
i
OLFH044046KOLFH044004K
3-51
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
1. Setting
To activate the Smart Trunk, go to
User Settings Mode and select
Smart Trunk on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this chap-
ter.
2. Detect and Alert
The Smart Trunk detecting area
extends approximately 20~40 in (50~
100 cm) behind the vehicle. If you
are positioned in the detecting area
and are carrying the smart key, the
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound to alert you that
the smart trunk will open.
Information
Do not approach the detecting area if
you do not want the trunk to open. If
you have unintentionally entered the
detecting area and the hazard warn-
ing lights and chime starts to operate,
leave the detecting area with the
smart key. The trunk will stay closed.
3. Automatic opening
The hazard warning lights will blink
and chime will sound 6 times and
then the trunk will open.
i
OLFH044047K OLFH044048KOLF054450N
3-52
Convenient features of your vehicle
How to deactivate the Smart
Trunk function using the smart
key
If you press any button of the smart
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Trunk function will
be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Trunk function
for emergency situations.
Information
• If you press the door unlock button
(2), the Smart Trunk function will
be deactivated temporarily. But, if
you do not open any door for 30 sec-
onds, the smart trunk function will
be activated again.
• If you press the trunk open button
(3) for more than 1 second, the
trunk opens.
• The Smart trunk function will still be
activated if you press the door lock
button (1) or trunk open button (3) on
the smart key as long as the Smart
trunk is not already in the Detect and
Alert stage.
• In case you have deactivated the
Smart Trunk function by pressing
the smart key button and opened a
door, the smart trunk function can
be activated again by closing and
locking all doors.
i
OLF044006
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3.Trunk open
4. Panic
• Make sure you close the trunk
before driving your vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before opening or closing the
trunk.
• Make sure objects in the trunk
do not come out when open-
ing the trunk on a slope. It
may cause serious injury.
• Make sure to deactivate the
Smart Trunk when washing
your vehicle. Otherwise, the
trunk may open inadvertently.
• The key should be kept out of
reach of children. Children
may inadvertently open the
Smart Trunk while playing
around the rear area of the
vehicle.
WARNING
3-53
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Detecting area
• The Smart trunk detecting area
extends approximately 20-40 in
(50-100 cm) behind the vehicle. If
you are positioned in the detecting
area and are carrying the smart
key, the hazard warning lights will
blink and the chime will sound for
about 3 seconds to alert you that
the smart trunk will open.
• The alert stops once the smart key
is moved outside of the detecting
area within the 3 second period.
Information
• The Smart Trunk function will not
work if any of the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the
transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
• The detecting range may decrease
or increase when :
- One side of the tire is raised to
replace a tire or to inspect the vehi-
cle.
- The vehicle is parked on a slope or
unpaved road, etc.
Fuel Filler Door (Hybrid)
Opening the fuel filler door
The fuel filler door must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pushing
the fuel filler door opener button.
1.Turn the engine off.
2. Push the fuel filler door opener
button.
i
OLF044051
OLF044050N
3-54
Convenient features of your vehicle
3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) outward
to access the fuel tank cap.
4.To remove the fuel tank cap (2),
turn it counterclockwise. You may
hear a hissing noise as the pres-
sure inside the tank equalizes.
5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.
Information
If the fuel filler door does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the door to break
the ice and release the door. Do not
pry on the door. If necessary, spray
around the door with an approved de-
icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-
freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
Closing the fuel filler door
1.To install the fuel tank cap, turn it
clockwise until it "clicks" one time.
2. Close the fuel filler door until it is
latched securely.
i
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. Failure to follow
these guidelines may result in
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station.
• Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station.
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate the
potential build-up of static
electricity by touching a metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas
source, with your bare hand.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric cur-
rent and/or electronic interfer-
ence from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
and cause a fire.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing. You can generate a build-
up of static electricity by touch-
ing, rubbing or sliding against
any item or fabric capable of
producing static electricity.
Static electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors causing a
fire. If you must re-enter the
vehicle, you should once again
eliminate potentially danger-
ous static electricity discharge
by touching a metal part of the
vehicle,away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle or other gasoline
source, with your bare hand.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be
sure to place the container on
the ground prior to refueling.
(Continued)
OLF044052
3-55
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel Requirements"
suggested in the Introduction chapter.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted sur-
faces may damage the paint.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction
of the fuel system or emission
control system.
NOTICE
i
(Continued)
• Do not over-fill or top-off your
vehicle tank, which can cause
gasoline spillage.
• If a fire breaks out during refu-
eling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department. Follow
any safety instructions they
provide.
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent
fuel spillage in the event of an
accident.
(Continued)
Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun,
contact between your bare
hand and the vehicle should
be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
• When refueling, always move
the shift lever to the P (Park)
position, set the parking brake,
and place engine Start/Stop
button to the OFF position.
Sparks produced by electrical
components related to the
engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire.
• Do not use matches or a
lighter and do not smoke or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station,
especially during refueling.
(Continued)
3-56
Convenient features of your vehicle
Emergency fuel filler door
release
If the fuel filler door does not open
using the remote fuel filler door
release button, you can open it man-
ually. Pull the handle of the release
located on the left side of the lug-
gage compartment outward slightly.
Fuel Filler Door (Plug-in hybrid)
Opening the fuel filler door
The fuel filler door must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pushing
the fuel filler door opener button.
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Push the fuel filler door opener
button.
3. Wait until the fuel tank is depres-
surized.
The message is displayed when
the fuel filler door opens after the
fuel tank is depressurized.
Information
• It may take up to 20 seconds to open
fuel filler door.
• When the fuel filler door is frozen
and does not open after 20 seconds
at freezing temperature, slightly tap
the fuel filler door and then attempt
to open it.
i
OLF044051
OLFP045236N/OLFP045238N
OLF044054
3-57
Convenient features of your vehicle
4. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to
fully open.
5. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),
turn it counterclockwise. You may
hear a hissing noise as the pres-
sure inside the tank equalizes.
6. Place the cap on the fuel filler
door.
Closing the fuel filler door
1.To install the fuel tank cap, turn it
clockwise until it "clicks" one time.
2. Close the fuel filler door until it is
latched securely.
3
OLF044052
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. Failure to follow
these guidelines may result in
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station.
• Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station.
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate the
potential build-up of static
electricity by touching a metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas
source, with your bare hand.
(Continued)
WARNING
• Add fuel into the fuel tank
within 20 minutes after open-
ing the fuel filler door. After 20
minutes, the fuel tank may
shut off, causing fuel to over-
flow. In this case, re-press the
fuel filler door opening but-
ton.
• Do not leave the fuel filler
door opened for an extended
period of time. It may dis-
charge the battery.
• Close the fuel filler door after
fueling the vehicle. If you start
the vehicle with the fuel filler
door opened, the message,
"Check fuel lid", illuminates
on the LCD display.
• Avoid refueling the vehicle
while charging the (high-volt-
age) hybrid battery. It may
cause a fire or an explosion
due to static electricity.
WARNING
3-58
Convenient features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not over-fill or top-off your
vehicle tank, which can cause
gasoline spillage.
• If a fire breaks out during refu-
eling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department. Follow
any safety instructions they
provide.
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
(Continued)
Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun,
contact between your bare
hand and the vehicle should
be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
• When refueling, always move
the shift lever to the P (Park)
position, set the parking
brake, and place engine
Start/Stop button to the OFF
position. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire.
• Do not use matches or a
lighter and do not smoke or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station,
especially during refueling.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric cur-
rent and/or electronic interfer-
ence from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
and cause a fire.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing. You can generate a build-
up of static electricity by touch-
ing, rubbing or sliding against
any item or fabric capable of
producing static electricity.
Static electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors causing a
fire. If you must re-enter the
vehicle, you should once again
eliminate potentially danger-
ous static electricity discharge
by touching a metal part of the
vehicle,away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle or other gasoline
source, with your bare hand.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be
sure to place the container on
the ground prior to refueling.
(Continued)
3-59
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel Requirements"
suggested in the Introduction chapter.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted sur-
faces may damage the paint.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction
of the fuel system or emission
control system.
Emergency fuel filler door
release
If the fuel filler door does not open
using the remote fuel filler door
release button, you can open it man-
ually. Pull the handle of the release
located on the left side of the lug-
gage compartment outward slightly.
In this case, slowly open the fuel tank
cap, because the fuel tank may be
highly pressurized. If fuel leaks out,
or if air hisses out, wait until it disap-
pears, open the fuel tank cap, and
slowly refuel the vehicle.If you quick-
ly pour fuel into the fuel tank, the fuel
may overflow out of the fuel tank.
NOTICE
i
3
OLF044054
3-60
Convenient features of your vehicle
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT CCLLUUSSTTEERR
1. Hybrid system gauge
2. Speedometer
3. Battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5.Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)
7. Plug-in hybrid mode indicator
The actual cluster in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
OLFH044200N/OLFP045201N
■■
Hybrid
■■
Plug-in hybrid
3-61
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Instrument cluster control
Adjusting Instrument Panel
Illumination
The brightness of the instrument
cluster illumination can be adjusted
by pressing the illumination control
buttons (“+” or “-”), when the Engine
Start/Stop button is ON, or when the
parking lights are turned ON.
When pressing the illumination con-
trol button, the interior switch illumi-
nation intensity is also adjusted. The
selected brightness of illumination
can be saved in the Driver Position
Memory System (if equipped).
For more information, refer to
"Driver Position Memory System"
in this chapter.
• The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is displayed.
• If the brightness reaches to the max-
imum or minimum level, a chime will
sound.
Never adjust the instrument
cluster while driving. This could
result in loss of control and lead
to an accident that may cause
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
WARNING
OLF044102
OLF044143L
3-62
Convenient features of your vehicle
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the driv-
ing speed, calibrated in miles per
hour (mph) and/or kilometers per
hour (km/h).
Hybrid System Gauge
The hybrid system gauge indicates
whether the current driving condition
is fuel efficient or not.
• CHARGE :
Shows that the energy made by
the vehicle is being converted
to electrical energy. (Regenerated
energy)
• ECO :
Shows that the vehicle is being
driven in an Eco-friendly manner.
• POWER :
Shows that the vehicle is exceeding
the Eco-friendly range.
Information
Accordance to the hybrid system
gauge area the “EV” indicator comes
on or off.
- “EV” indicator ON : Vehicle is driv-
en using the electric motor or the
gasoline engine is stopped.
- “EV” indicator OFF : Vehicle is
driven using the gasoline engine.
i
OLF044103N
OLFP045204K
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Hybrid Battery SOC
(State of Charge) Gauge
This gauge indicates the remaining
hybrid battery power. If the SOC is
near the "L (Low)" level, the vehicle
automatically operates the engine to
charge the battery.
However, if the Service Indicator ( )
and Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) ( ) turn on when the SOC
gauge is near the "L (Low)" level,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Never try to start the vehicle if the
fuel tank is empty. In this condi-
tion, the engine cannot charge the
high voltage battery of the hybrid
system. If you try to start the vehi-
cle when the fuel is empty, the
high voltage battery will become
discharged and damaged.
Plug-in hybrid mode indicator
• CD (Charge Depleting, Electric) mode
:The high-voltage
(hybrid) battery is
used to drive the
vehicle.
• CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid) mode
:
The high-voltage
(hybrid) battery and
gasoline engine is
used to drive the
vehicle.
• HEV-charging mode
: Gasoline engine is
used to drive the
vehicle and charge
the high-voltage
(hybrid) battery
A corresponding message is displayed
to indicate the selected mode.
NOTICE
OLFH044205K
OLFP045107
■ Plug-in hybrid
■ Hybrid
OLFP0Q5002K
OLFP0Q5003K
OLFP0Q5004K
OLFP045564N/OLFP045565N/OLFP045566N
3-63
3-64
Convenient features of your vehicle
Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
Information
• The fuel tank capacity is specified in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is
nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier
than usual due to the movement of
fuel in the tank.
Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of fuel
could cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
NOTICE
i
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addi-
tional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the "E (Empty)"
level.
WARNING
OLFH044207K
3-65
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures either in
Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit.
- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not immediately change
like a general thermometer to pre-
vent the driver from being inattentive.
To change the temperature unit from
°F to °C or °C to °F:
- Go to User Settings Mode ➝ Other
Features ➝ Temperature Unit.
- Press the AUTO button for 3 sec-
onds while pressing the OFF button.
(Automatic climate control system)
The temperature unit of the instru-
ment cluster and climate control sys-
tem will change at once.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
OLFH045208N/Q OLFH045210N/Q
3-66
Convenient features of your vehicle
Warning and indicator lights
Ready Indicator
This indicator illuminates :
When the vehicle is ready to be driven.
- ON : Normal driving is possible.
- OFF : Normal driving is not possible,
or a problem has occurred.
- Blinking : Limp home driving mode.
When the ready indicator goes OFF or
blinks, there is a problem with the sys-
tem. In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Service Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position.
- It normally flashes on momentar-
ily for 3 seconds at Ready On and
should then stay off.
• When there is a problem with the
hybrid vehicle control system or
hardware.
When the warning light illuminates
while driving, or does not go OFF
after starting the vehicle have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
EV Mode Indicator
This indicator illuminates when the
vehicle is driven by the electric motor.
EV
3-67
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Charging Cable
Connection Indicator
(Plug-in hybrid)
This indicator illuminates in red when
the charging cable is connected.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with the
SRS, have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more information, refer to the
"Seat Belts" in chapter 2.
3-68
Convenient features of your vehicle
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
• When the regenerative brake does
not operate.
• When only one of the dual system
is working, the stopping distance
will be increased
If the brake fluid level in the reser-
voir is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Stop the vehicle, immediately
check the brake fluid level and add
fluid, if necessary (For more infor-
mation, refer to "Brake Fluid" in
the chapter 7). After adding brake
fluid, check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid leak is
found, or if the warning light
remains on, or if the brakes do not
operate properly, do not drive the
vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems.This means
you still have braking on two wheels
even if one of the dual systems fails.
With only one of the dual systems
working, longer pedal travel and
greater pedal pressure is required.
If the brakes fail, while driving, shift
to a lower gear for additional engine
braking and stop the vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so.
(red color)
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
3-69
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Regenerative Brake
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
When the regenerative brake does
not operate and the brake does not
perform well. This causes the Brake
Warning light (red) and Regenerative
Brake Warning Light (yellow) to illu-
minate simultaneously.
In this case, drive safely and have
your vehicle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates in
one of the following situations:
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem is still operational without the
assistance of the anti-lock brake
system).
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Electronic Brake force
Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate
at the same time while driving:
When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
(yellow color)
(red color)
The operation of the brake
pedal may be more difficult than
normal and the braking dis-
tance can increase.
WARNING
3-70
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
When the ABS warning light illumi-
nates, or when both the ABS and the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid warning
lights illuminate, the speedometer, the
odometer, or the tripmeter may not
properly operate. Also, the EPS warn-
ing light may illuminate and the steer-
ing effort may increase or decrease.
In this case, have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Electronic Parking
Brake (EPB) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPB.
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
The Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)
warning light may illuminate, when
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
indicator illuminates due to ESC mal-
function (This does not indicate EPB
malfunction).
i
i
When both the ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
WARNING
EPB
3-71
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates in
one of the following situations:
• When you turn ON the Engine
Start/Stop button.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may cause
damage to the emission control
systems which could affect dri-
vability and/or fuel economy.
When the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates,the catalyt-
ic converter is possibly damaged,
resulting in loss of engine power.
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
Charging System
Warning Light
When this warning light illuminates
while running the engine, the battery is
not being charged. Immediately turn
OFF all electrical accessories.Try not
to use electrically operated controls,
such as the power windows.Keep run-
ning the engine. Have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTICE
NOTICE
3-72
Convenient features of your vehicle
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
When the engine oil pressure is low,
follow the below procedures:
1.Carefully drive to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn OFF the engine and check
the engine oil level (For more
information, refer to the "Engine
Oil" in the chapter 7). If the level
is low, add engine oil.
When the warning light remains
ON after adding engine oil and
restarting the engine, or when
engine oil refilling is unavailable,
turn OFF the engine. These indi-
cate a mechanical problem, which
needs to be repaired before driving.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
When the Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light illuminates, turn
OFF the engine, and check the
engine oil level, in an attempt to
prevent severe engine damage.
These should be done as soon as
it is safe to do so. When the oil
level is low, add the engine oil to
the proper level and start the
engine again.When the light stays
ON, while running the engine,
immediately turn OFF the engine.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Low Fuel Level
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
• Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below "E (Empty)" may
cause the engine to misfire and
damage the catalytic converter.
• Driving the vehicle in EV mode
after fuel runs out may damage
the hybrid battery.
NOTICE
NOTICE
3-73
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Master Warning Light
This warning light illuminates in
one of the following situations:
• When there is a problem with the
Collision Warning System (FCWS).
• When there is a problem with the
Smart Cruise Control (SCC).
• When there is a problem with the
Blind Spot Detection (BSD).
• When washer fluid level is low.
• When there is a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
To identify the cause of the warning,
look at the LCD display.
Icy road warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driv-
er the road may be icy.
When the temperature on the out-
side temperature gauge is approxi-
mately below 40°F (4°C), the Icy
Road Warning Light and Outside
Temperature Gauge blinks 10 times,
and then illuminates. Also, the warn-
ing chime sounds 3 times.
Information
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration,
sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.
i
OTLE045133
3-74
Convenient features of your vehicle
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
This indicator illuminates:
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more information, refer to
"Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)" in chapter 5.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator
This indicator illuminates:
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately
3 seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more information, refer to
"Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)" in chapter 5.
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3-75
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Immobilizer Indicator
This indicator illuminates up to 30
seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle with the
Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC or ON position.
- You can start the vehicle.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the vehicle.
This indicator blinks for a few sec-
onds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- You cannot start the vehicle.
This indicator illuminates for 2 sec-
onds and goes off:
• When the Smart Key is not detect-
ed inside the vehicle, when the
Engine Start/Stop button is in the
ON position.
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator blinks:
• When the Smart Key battery is
weak.
- In this case, you cannot start the
engine. However, by pressing the
Engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key, you may start the
engine. (For more information,
refer to "Starting the Vehicle"
in the chapter 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Automatic Transmission Shift
Indicator
This indicator displays where the auto-
matic transmission shift lever is locat-
ed.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Manual Shift Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
OLFH044209K/Q
3-76
Convenient features of your vehicle
Gear Position Pop-up (if equipped)
The pop-up displays the current gear
position selected for 2 seconds
(P/R/N/D).
Turn Signal Indicator
This indicator blinks:
• When you operate the turn signal
indicator light.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system.
- The turn signal indicator light illumi-
nates but does not blink
- The turn signal indicator light blinks
rapidly
- The turn signal indicator light does
not illuminate at all
If either of these conditions occur,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
High Beam Indicator
This indicator illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is in the
Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator
This indicator illuminates:
• When the tail lights and headlights
are on.
OLF044420
3-77
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Cruise Indicator Light
This indicator illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
ON.
For more information, refer to
“Cruise Control System” in chap-
ter 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
This indicator illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is
set.
For more information, refer to
"Cruise Control System" in chap-
ter 5.
AUTO HOLD Indicator
This indicator illuminates:
• [White] When you activate the auto
hold system by pressing the AUTO
HOLD button.
• [Green] When you completely stop
the vehicle by depressing the
brake pedal with the auto hold sys-
tem activated.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the auto hold system.
In this case, have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Auto Hold" in chapter 5.
SPORT Mode Indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator illuminates:
• When you select "SPORT" mode
as drive mode.
For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" in chapter 5.
3-78
Convenient features of your vehicle
ECO Mode Indicator
This indicator illuminates:
• When you select "ECO" mode as
drive mode.
For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" in chapter 5.
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When you turn the Engine Start/Stop
button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated (The
location of each underinflated tire
is displayed on the LCD display).
For more information, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
This warning light remains ON
after blinking for approximately 60
seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON
and OFF in 3 second intervals:
When there is a malfunction with the
TPMS.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
Do not monitor the ECO indica-
tor while driving. This may dis-
tract you, and may cause an
accident, resulting in severe
personal injury.
WARNING
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle insta-
bility, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING
3-79
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) System
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the FCW is turned off on the
User Settings mode.
• When there is a problem with the
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
System.
When the warning light remains on,
even though the FCW is turned on,
have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
System" in chapter 5.
Lane Departure
Warning System
(LDWS) Indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator illuminates:
• [Green] When you activate the lane
departure warning system by
pressing the LDWS button.
• [White] When system operating
conditions are not satisfied or
when the sensor does not detect
the lane line.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the lane departure warn-
ing system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)" in chapter 5.
3-80
Convenient features of your vehicle
Warning messages
Shift to "P" position
This warning message is displayed
when you attempt to turn OFF the
vehicle without setting the shift lever
in P (Park).
At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
button turns to the ACC position
(When you re-press the Engine
Start/Stop button again, it will turn to
the ON position).
Low Key Battery
This warning message is displayed
when the Smart Key battery is dis-
charged while turning the Engine
Start/Stop button to the OFF position.
Press brake pedal to start engine
This warning message is displayed
when the Engine Start/Stop button
changes to the ACC position twice
by repeatedly pressing the button
without depressing the brake pedal.
You can start the vehicle by depress-
ing the brake pedal
OLFH044127L
OLFH044551L OLFH044125L
3-81
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Key not in vehicle
This warning message is displayed
when the Smart Key is not in the
vehicle while pressing the Engine
Start/Stop button.
When attempting to start the vehicle,
always have the smart key with you.
Key not detected
This warning message is displayed
when the Smart Key is not detected
while pressing the Engine Start/Stop
button.
Press start button again
This message is displayed if you were
unable to start the vehicle when the
Engine Start/Stop button was pressed.
If this occurs, attempt to start the
engine by pressing the Engine Start/
Stop button again.
If the warning message appears each
time you press the Engine Start/Stop
button, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLFH044119LOLFH044117L OLFH044129L
3-82
Convenient features of your vehicle
Press “START” button with key
This warning message is displayed
when you press the Engine Start/Stop
button while the warning message,
"Key not detected," is displayed.
At this time, the immobilizer indicator
light blinks.
Check "BRAKE SWITCH" fuse
This warning message is displayed if
the brake switch fuse is disconnected.
If this message is displayed, replace
the fuse with a new one before start-
ing the vehicle. If not possible, you
can start the engine by pressing the
Engine Start/Stop button for 10 sec-
onds in the ACC position.
Shift to "P" to start engine
This warning message is displayed
when you try to start the vehicle with
the shift lever not in P (Park).
OLFH044133LOLFH044121L OLFH045127N
3-83
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Door, Hood,Trunk Open
This warning message is displayed
indicating which door, or the hood, or
the trunk is open.
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
This warning is displayed when the
sunroof is opened, after turning OFF
the vehicle.
Low Tire Pressure
This warning message is displayed if
the tire pressure is low. The corre-
sponding tire on the vehicle will be
illuminated.
For more information, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
OLF044136 OLF054446 OLF064028N
Before driving the vehicle, you
should confirm that the door/
hood/trunk is fully closed.
Also, check there is no door/
hood/trunk open warning light
or message displayed on the
instrument cluster.
CAUTION
3-84
Convenient features of your vehicle
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
This warning message is displayed
if the fuse switch in the instrument
panel fuse, under the steering wheel
is OFF.
If this message is displayed, turn the
fuse switch on.
For more information, refer to
"Fuses" in chapter 7.
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed
when the steering wheel is turned by
90 degrees or wider, either to the left
or to the right, while running the
engine.
In order to align the steering wheel,
turn the wheel in the direction shown
while the engine is running to
straighten the steering wheel.
Steering wheel aligning is com-
pleted (if equipped)
If the steering wheel aligning is com-
pleted after "Align steering wheel"
warning message is displayed, this
message is displayed for 2 seconds.
OLFP045155N
OLFH044149L OLFP045151N/OLFP045153N
3-85
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Low Washer Fluid
This warning message is displayed
in the service reminder mode, when
the washer fluid in the reservoir is
nearly empty.
If this warning message is displayed,
have the washer fluid reservoir
refilled.
Low Fuel
This warning message is displayed if
the fuel tank is almost out of fuel.
When this message is displayed, the
vehicle range is approximately 30
miles.
When this message is displayed, the
low fuel level warning light in the
instrument cluster will come on.
It is recommended to look for the
nearest fueling station and refuel as
soon as possible.
Engine has overheated
This warning message is displayed
when the engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 248°F (120°C). This
means that the engine is overheated
and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to "Overheating" in chapter 6.
OLFP045161N OLFP045159NOLFP045157N
3-86
Convenient features of your vehicle
Check headlight (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed, if
the headlamps are not operating
properly. The headlamp bulb may
need to be replaced. If the vehicle is
equipped with LED headlamps, have
the vehicle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
Make sure to replace the burned out
bulb with a new one of the same
wattage rating.
Check Active Air Flap System
This warning message is displayed
in the following situations:
- There is a malfunction with the
actuator flap
- There is a malfunction with the
actuator air flap controller
- The air flap does not open
When all of the above conditions are
fixed, the warning will disappear.
Check Hybrid system
This warning message is displayed
when there is a problem with the
hybrid control system.
Refrain from driving when the warn-
ing message is displayed.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
i
OLF044167L OLFH044262L OLFH044248L
3-87
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Check Hybrid system.
Turn off engine.
This warning message is displayed
when there is a problem with the
hybrid system. The " " indicator
will blink and a warning chime will
sound until the problem is solved.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Check Hybrid system. Do not
start engine.
This warning message is displayed
when the hybrid battery power
(SOC) level is low. A warning chime
will sound until the problem is solved.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Stop vehicle and check power
supply
This warning message is displayed
when a failure occurs in the power
supply system.
In this case, park the vehicle in a
safe location and tow your vehicle to
the nearest authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the vehicle inspect-
ed.
OLFH044240LOLFH044228L OLFH044230L
3-88
Convenient features of your vehicle
Stop vehicle to charge battery
This warning message is displayed
when the hybrid battery power
(SOC) level is low.
In this case, park the vehicle in a
safe location and wait until the hybrid
battery is charged.
You can increase the hybrid battery
charging rate by holding the acceler-
ator pedal to the floor with transmis-
sion in P.The engine will rev high but
it will be limited for charging purpose
when you hold the pedal to the floor.
Refuel to prevent Hybrid battery
damage
This warning message is displayed
when the fuel tank is nearly empty.
You should refill the fuel tank to pre-
vent hybrid battery damage.
Refill inverter coolant
This warning message is displayed
when the inverter coolant is nearly
empty.
You should refill the inverter coolant.
OLFH044232L
OLFH044242L
OLFH044244L
3-89
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Stop vehicle and check brakes
This warning message is displayed
when a failure occurs in the brake
system.
In this case, park the vehicle in a safe
location and tow your vehicle to the
nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer
and have the vehicle inspected.
Check brakes
This warning message is displayed
when the brake performance is low
or the regenerative brake does not
work properly due to a failure in the
brake system.
In this case, it may take longer for the
brake pedal to operate and the brak-
ing distance may become longer.
Check Virtual Engine Sound
System
This message is displayed when
there is a problem with the Virtual
Engine Sound System (VESS).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OLFH044234L
OLFH044543L
OLFH044250L
3-90
Convenient features of your vehicle
Coasting guide (if equipped)
A chime will sound and the coasting
guide indicator will blink four times to
inform the driver when to take the foot
off from the accelerator by anticipating
a decelerating event* based on the
analysis of driving routes and road
conditions of the navigation.It encour-
ages the driver to remove foot from the
pedal and allow coasting down the
road with EV motor only. This helps
prevent unnecessary fuel consump-
tion and increases fuel efficiency.
❈ Example of a deceleration event is
going down an extended hill, slow-
ing down approaching a toll booth,
and approaching reduced speed
zones.
• User settings
Press the Engine Start/Stop button and put the shift lever in P(Park). In the
User Settings Mode, select Driving Assist, Coasting Guide, and then On to
turn on the system.Cancel the selection of coasting guide to turn off the sys-
tem. For the explanation of the system, press and hold the [OK] button.
• Operation conditions
To activate the system, take the following procedures. Enter your destination
information on the navigation and select the driving route. Select the ECO
mode in the Integrated Driving Control System.Then, satisfy the following.
- The driving speed should be between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 99 mph (160 km/h).
❈ The operating speed may vary due to difference between instrument clus-
ter and navigation effected by tire inflation level.
OLFH044182N/OLFH045556N/OLFP045578N
OLFH045254N
➜➜
3-91
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
Coasting guide is only a supplemental
system to assist with fuel-efficient driv-
ing. Thus, the operating conditions
may be different in accordance with
traffic/road conditions (i.e. driving in a
traffic jam, driving on a slope, driving
on a curve). Thus, take the actual driv-
ing conditions into consideration, such
as distances from the vehicles ahead/
behind, while referring to the coasting
guide system as guidance.
Unplugging vehicle to start
(Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed when you
start the engine without unplugging
the charging cable. Unplug the
charging cable, and then start the
vehicle.
Remaining time to fully charge
the battery (Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed to notify
the remaining time to fully charge the
battery.
i
OLFP045258N OLFP045260N
3-92
Convenient features of your vehicle
Wait until fuel lid opens
(Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed when you
attempt to open the fuel filler door
with the fuel tank pressurized. Wait
until the fuel tank is depressurized.
Information
• It may take up to 20 seconds to open
fuel filler door.
• When the fuel filler door is frozen
and does not open after 20 seconds
at freezing temperature, slightly tap
the fuel filler door and then attempt
to open it.
Ready to refuel
(Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed when the
fuel filler door opens after the fuel
tank is depressurized. If this mes-
sage is displayed, you can refuel the
fuel tank.
Check fuel lid
(Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed when the
vehicle is driven with the fuel filler
door opened. Close the fuel filler
door and then start driving.
i
OLFP045236N OLFP045238N OLFP045252N
3-93
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Shift to P to charge
(Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed when the
charging connector is plugged with
the shift lever in R (Reverse), N
(Neutral) or D (Drive). Move the shift
lever to P (Park) and re-start the
charging process.
EV / HEV/ CHG modes
(Plug-in hybrid)
A corresponding message is displayed
when a mode is selected by pressing
the HEV button
Fully charged. Current mode
maintained / Low battery.
Maintaining current mode
(Plug-in hybrid)
A corresponding message is dis-
played when the high-voltage
(hybrid) battery is fully charged or
nearly discharged.
OLFP045563N
OLFP045566N
OLFP045564N/OLFP045565N
OLFP045567N/OLFP045568N
3-94
Convenient features of your vehicle
Charge complete!
Change to hybrid mode
(Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed when the
high-voltage (hybrid) battery is fully
charged, and when the mode is
changed to the HEV mode.
Low/High System Temp.
Maintaining hybrid mode
(Plug-in hybrid)
A corresponding message is dis-
played when the temperature of the
high-voltage (hybrid) battery is too
low or too high. This warning mes-
sage is to protect the battery and the
hybrid system.
Low/High System Temp.
Switching to hybrid mode
(Plug-in hybrid)
A corresponding message is dis-
played when the temperature of the
high-voltage (hybrid) battery is too
low or high.This warning message is
to protect the battery and the hybrid
system.
OLFP045569N OLFP045570N/OLFP045571N
OLFP045572N/OLFP045573N
3-95
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
LCD Display
LCD display control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by pressing the control
switches on the steering wheel.
(1) : Changing LCD modes or
returning to previous position
(2) ▲, ▼ : Changing items
(3) OK : Selecting or resetting
LCD modes
OLFH044553L
Modes Symbol Explanation
Tr ip
Computer
This mode displays driving information like the tripme-
ter, fuel economy, etc.
For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this
chapter.
Turn By Turn
(TBT)
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
SCC/LDWS
(If equipped)
This mode displays the state of the Smart Cruise Control
(SCC) and Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS).
For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control (SCC)"
and Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) in chapter 5.
A/V
(If equipped)
This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Information
This mode displays information such as tire pressure,
engine coolant temperature, service intervals,
warning messages related to the Blind Spot Detection
system, etc.
User Settings
In this mode, you can change settings of the doors,
lamps, etc.
or
or
3-96
Convenient features of your vehicle
Cannot edit settings while driving
This warning message appears if you
try to adjust the User Settings while
driving.
For your safety, change the User
Settings mode after parking the vehi-
cle, applying the parking brake and
moving the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
Quick guide (if equipped)
This mode provides quick guides for
the systems in the User Settings
mode.
Select an item, press and hold the
[OK] button.
For more information about each
system, refer to this Owner’s
Manual.
Trip computer mode
The trip computer mode displays
information related to vehicle driving
parameters including range, fuel
economy, trip meter information and
vehicle speed.
For more information, refer to
"Trip Computer" in this chapter.
OLF044168L OLF046563L OLFH045558N
3-97
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
Engine coolant temperature
This mode displays the temperature
of the engine coolant when the
engine is running.
When the gauge indicator gets out
of the normal range, toward the
“H”position, it indicates overheat-
ing of the engine. It may damage
the engine.
Do not continue driving with the
overheated engine. For further
information, refer to “If the Engine
Overheats” in the chapter 6.
NOTICE
OLFH045173 OLFH045206N/Q
Never remove the radiator cap or
reservoir cap when the engine is
hot. The engine coolant is under
pressure and could severely
burn.Wait until the engine is cool
before adding coolant to the
reservoir.
CAUTION
3-98
Convenient features of your vehicle
SCC/LDWS Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
Smart Cruise Control (SCC) and Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS).
For more information, refer to
"Smart Cruise Control (SCC)" and
"Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)" in chapter 5.
A/V mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
Information mode
This mode displays the service inter-
val (mileage and days).
For the setting of the service inter-
val, refer to "User Settings Mode"
of the LCD display.
Warning Message
If one of followings occurs, warning
messages will be displayed in the infor-
mation mode for about 10 seconds.
- Malfunction of the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) System
- Malfunction of the Smart Cruise
Control (SCC)
- Malfunction of the Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS)
- Malfunction of the Blind Spot
Detection (BSD)
- Low washer fluid
OLFH045174N OLFH045176N
3-99
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Service Interval
Service in
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 900 miles (1,500 km) or 30
days, "Service in" message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
you turn on the vehicle.
For the setting of the service inter-
val, refer to "User Settings Mode"
of the LCD display.
Service required
If you exceed the specified service
interval, a message indicating,
"Service required" will be displayed
each time you turn ON the vehicle.
To reset the service interval, press
the [OK] button for more than 1 sec-
ond.
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set,
"Service in OFF" message is dis-
played.
Information
If any of the following conditions
occur, the mileage and number of days
to service may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
i
OLFH045180N
OLFH045454N OLFH045456N
3-100
Convenient features of your vehicle
User settings mode
In this mode, you can change setting of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, and so on.
Driving Assist (if equipped)
Items Explanation
SCC
(Smart Cruise Control)
To adjust the sensitivity (Slow/Normal/Fast) of the Smart Cruise Control system.
For more information, refer to “Smart Cruise Control (SCC)” in chapters.
RCTA
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
To activate or deactivate the RCTA system.
For more information, refer to "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" in chapter 5.
FCW
(Forward Collision Warning)
To activate or deactivate the Forward Collision Warning System.
For more information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System” in chapter 5.
Coasting Guide
To activate or deactivate the Coasting Guide system and sound.
For more information, refer to “Coasting Guide” in this chapter.
3-101
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Items Explanation
Automatically Lock
• Disable : The auto door lock function is deactivated.
• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3mph
(15 km/h).
• Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked when the automatic transmission shift lever
is shifted from P (Park) to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive).
Automatically Unlock
• Disable : The auto door unlock function is deactivated.
• Vehicle Off: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the Engine Start/Stop button is placed
to the OFF position.
• Driver Door Unlock: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the driver's door is unlocked.
• On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the automatic transmission shift lever
is shifted to P (Park).
Two Press Unlock
• Off :The two press unlock function will be deactivated.Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door
is unlocked.
• On :The driver’s door will unlock if the door is unlocked.When the door is unlocked again within
4 seconds, all doors will unlock.
Smart Trunk
• Off :The Smart Trunk function will be deactivated.
• On :The Smart Trunk function will be activated
For more information, refer to "Smart Trunk" in this chapter.
Door
3-102
Convenient features of your vehicle
Lights
Items Explanation
One Touch Turn Signal
• Off :The one touch turn signal function is deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashes :The turn signal indicator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
slightly operated.
For more information, refer to “Light” in this chapter.
Headlamp Delay
• On :The headlamp delay function is activated.
• Off :The headlamp delay function is deactivated.
For more information, refer to “Light” in this chapter.
Welcome Light
• On :The welcome light function is activated.
• Off :The welcome light function is deactivated.
For more information, refer to “Welcome System” in this chapter.
Sound
Items Explanation
BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
Sound
• Off :The BSD sound function is deactivated.
• On :The BSD sound function is activated.
3-103
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Items Explanation
Seat Easy Access
• None:The seat easy access function is deactivated.
• Normal/Extended:
- When you turn off the engine, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward short (Normal)
or long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.
- If you change the Engine Start/Stop button from OFF position to the ACC, ON, or START posi-
tion, the driver’s seat will return to the original position.
For more information, refer to “Driver Position Memory System” in this chapter.
Items Explanation
Service Interval
• Off :The service interval function is deactivated.
• On :You can set the service interval (mileage and months).
Service interval
Seat / Steering
3-104
Convenient features of your vehicle
Other features
Items Explanation
Fuel Economy Auto Reset
• Off :The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.
• After Ignition :The average fuel economy will reset automatically when driving.
• After Refueling :The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.
For more information, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Fuel Economy Unit Choose the fuel economy unit. (US gallon, UK gallon)
Temperature Unit Choose the temperature unit. (°C,°F)
Tire Pressure Unit Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, bar)
Gear Position Pop-up
To activate or deactivate the shift gear pop-up function.
For more information, refer to “Warning and indicator lights” in this chapter.
Language Choose the language.
3-105
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
Information
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (i.e. average vehicle
speed) is reset when the battery is dis-
connected
One time driving information
mode
Hybrid
At the end of each driving cycle, the
Driving Info message is displayed.
This display shows the trip distance
(1), the average fuel economy (2), and
the remaining vehicle range (3).
This information is displayed for a few
seconds when you turn off the vehicle,
and then goes off automatically. The
information is calculated for each driving
cycle.
If the estimated remaining vehicle range
is below 1 mile (1.6 km), the range will
display as "- - -" and a "Low Fuel" warn-
ing message will be displayed.
Plug-in hybrid
At the end of each driving cycle, the
Driving Info message is displayed.
This display shows the trip distance
(1), the average speed (2), the
remaining vehicle range (3), and the
charging status (4).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
vehicle, and then goes off automati-
cally. The information is calculated
for each driving cycle.
If the estimated remaining vehicle
range is below 1 mile (1.6 km), the
range will display as "- - -" and a
"Low Fuel" warning message will be
displayed.
i
OLF044419N
OLFP045190N/OLFP045560N
3-106
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
If “Sunroof Open” warning message is
displayed in the cluster, the Driving
Information message may not be dis-
played.
Trip modes
To change the trip mode, toggle
"▲, ▼" switch on the steering wheel.
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving
distance since the last tripmeter
reset.
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
[OK] button on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
tripmeter is displayed.
i
• Tripmeter [A/B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A/B]
• Timer [A/B]
TRIP A/B
• Range (hybrid)/
Total Range (plug-in hybrid)
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
Digital Speedometer
Driving style
Energy flow
OLFH045558N
3-107
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the [OK] button on the steer-
ing wheel for more than 1 second
when the average vehicle speed is
displayed.
Information
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played, when the vehicle drives
shorter than 0.19 miles (300 meters)
or less than 10 seconds after turning
ON the Engine Start/Stop button.
• The average vehicle speed will con-
tinue to be calculated and will start
to decrease if the vehicle is stopped
while the engine is still running (for
example, when the vehicle is in traf-
fic or stopped at a stop light.)
Timer (3)
• The timer is the total driving time
since the last timer reset.
• To reset the timer, press the [OK]
button on the steering wheel for
more than 1 second when the timer
is displayed.
Information
The timer will continue to be counted
while the engine is still running (for
example, when the vehicle is in traffic
or stopped at a stop light.)
Fuel economy
Range/Total Range (1)
• Range (hybrid)
The range is the estimated distance
the vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel in the fuel tank.
If the estimated distance is below
1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will
display “---” as the range.
i
i
OLFH045437N
■ Hybrid
3-108
Convenient features of your vehicle
• Total Range (plug-in hybrid)
The range is the estimated distance
the vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel in the fuel tank and
high-voltage (hybrid) battery.
If the estimated distance is below
1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will
display “---” as the range.
Information
• When the vehicle is not on level
ground, or when the battery power
is interrupted, the range may not be
correctly calculated.
• The range may differ from the actu-
al distance, as it is estimated with
the calculated driving distance.
• The trip computer may not recog-
nize the addition of fuel of 1.6 gal-
lons or less.
• The fuel economy and range may
significantly vary in accordance
with driving conditions, driving
habits, and vehicle conditions.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To manually reset the average fuel
economy, press and hold the OK but-
ton on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second, when the average fuel
economy is displayed.
For more information about the
OK button, refer to "LCD Display
Control" in this chapter.
i
OLFP045186N/OLFP045559N
■ Plug-in hybrid
3-109
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Automatic reset
To automatically reset the average fuel
economy after refueling, select the
“After Refueling” feature in the User
Settings Mode on the LCD display
(Refer to "LCD Display" in this
chapter).
If the “After Refueling” feature is
selected, the average fuel economy
will be cleared to zero (---), when driv-
ing speed exceeds 1 mph (1km/h),
after refueling more than 1.6 gallons
(6 liters).
Information
The vehicle must be driven for a min-
imum of 0.19 mile (0.3 km) since the
last ignition key cycle before the aver-
age fuel economy is recalculated.
Automatic reset at every fueling event
is the default condition for MPG reset,
it comes that way from the factory. In
settings you can disable/enable it.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
This mode displays the instanta-
neous fuel economy while driving
when the vehicle speed is greater
than 6.2 mph (10 km/h).
Digital Speedometer
This message shows the speed of
the vehicle (km/h, MPH).
i
OLFH045440N
3-110
Convenient features of your vehicle
Driving style
• The Driving Style will display when
you are in ECO mode as selected
by the DRIVE MODE button.
When the SPORT or NORMAL
mode is selected for your driving,
each driving category will be dis-
played with “--”.
• To reset the driving style, press the
[OK] button on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
driving style is displayed.
Hybrid system energy flow
The hybrid system informs the drivers
its energy flow in various operating
modes.The energy flow can have up
to 11 different modes during driving.
Vehicle Stop
The vehicle is stopped.
(No energy flow)
OLFH044212N
OLFH044214N
3-111
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
EV Propulsion
Only the motor power is used to drive
the vehicle.
(Battery ➞ Wheel)
Power Assist
Both the motor and the engine power
are used to drive the vehicle.
(Battery & Energy ➞ Wheel)
Engine Only Propulsion
Only the engine power is used to
drive the vehicle.
(Engine ➞ Wheel)
OLFH044216N
OLFH044218N OLFH044220N
3-112
Convenient features of your vehicle
Engine Generation
When the vehicle is stopped, the
high-voltage battery is charged up by
the engine.
(Engine ➞ Battery)
Regeneration
The high-voltage battery is charged
up by the regenerative brake system.
(Wheel ➞ Battery)
Engine Brake
The engine braking is used to decel-
erate the vehicle.
(Wheel ➞ Engine)
OLFH044222N
OLFH044216N
OLFH044220N
3-113
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Power Reserve
The engine is simultaneously used to
drive the vehicle and to charge up
the high-voltage battery.
(Engine ➞ Wheel & Battery)
Engine Generation/Motor Drive
The engine charges up the high-volt-
age battery.The motor power is used
to drive the vehicle.
(Engine ➞ Battery ➞ Wheel)
Engine Generation/Regeneration
The engine and regenerative brake
system charges up the high-voltage
battery.
(Engine & Wheel ➞ Battery)
OLFH044224N
OLFH044226N OLFH044226N
3-114
Convenient features of your vehicle
Engine Brake/Regeneration
The engine braking is simultaneously
used to decelerate the vehicle and to
charge up the high-voltage battery.
(Wheel ➞ Engine & Battery)
OLFH044218N
3-115
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
LLIIGGHHTT
Exterior Lights
Lighting control
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) DRL OFF position
(2) AUTO light position
(3) Parking lamp position
(4) Headlamp position
(1) OFF position
(2) DRL position
(3) Parking lamp position
(4) Headlamp position
AUTO light position (if equipped)
The parking lamp and headlamp will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light
outside the vehicle.
Even with the AUTO light feature in
operation, it is recommended to
manually turn ON the lamps when
driving at night or in a fog, or when
you enter dark areas, such as tun-
nels and parking facilities.
OLF044085N
OLF044084N
OLF044084A
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-116
Convenient features of your vehicle
• Do not cover or spill anything on
the sensor (1) located in front of
the instrument panel.
• Do not clean the sensor using a
window cleaner the cleanser may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of metallic coat-
ing on the front windshield, the
AUTO light system may not work
properly.
Parking lamp position ( )
The parking lamp, license plate lamp
and instrument panel lamp are turned
ON.
Headlamp position ( )
The headlamp, parking lamp, license
plate lamp and instrument panel lamp
are turned ON.
Information
Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON
position to turn on the headlamp.
i
NOTICE
OLF044086N OLF044087N
3-117
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlamp,
push the lever away from you. The
lever will return to its original position.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlamp high beams are
switched on.
To turn off the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you. The low
beams will turn on.
To flash the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you, then
release the lever. The high beams
will remain ON as long as you hold
the lever towards you.
Smart High Beam
(if equipped)
The Smart High Beam is a system
that automatically adjusts the head-
lamp range (switches between high
beam and low beam) according to
the brightness of other vehicles and
road conditions.
OLF044088N
OLF044090N
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles approaching
you. Using high beam could
obstruct the other driver’s vision.
WARNING
OLF044089N
3-118
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operating condition
1. Place the light switch in the AUTO
position.
2.Turn on the high beam by pushing
the lever away from you.
The smart high beam ( ) indica-
tor will illuminate.
3.The Smart High Beam will turn on
when vehicle speed is above 28
mph (45km/h).
• If the lever is pushed away when
the Smart High Beam is operating,
the Smart High Beam will turn off
and the high beam will be on con-
tinuously. The smart high beam
( ) indicator will turn off.
• If the lever is pulled towards you
when the Smart High Beam is
operating, the Smart High Beam
will turn off.
4. If the light switch is placed to the
headlamp position, the Smart
High Beam will turn off and the low
beam will be on continuously.
The high beam switches to low beam
in the below conditions.
- When the Smart High Beam is off.
- When the light switch is not in the
AUTO position.
- When the headlamp is detected
from the on-coming vehicle.
- When the tail lamp is detected
from the front vehicle.
- When the surrounding is bright
enough high beams are not need-
ed.
- When streetlights or other lights
are detected.
- When vehicle speed is below 18
mph (35km/h).
Warning light and message
When the Smart High Beam Assist
System is not working properly, the
warning message will come on for a
few second. After the message dis-
appears, the master warning light will
illuminate. Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
■ Warning message ■ Master warning
OLF054445N/OLFH054456
3-119
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The system may not operate nor-
mally in the below conditions.
• When the light from the on-
coming or front vehicle is not
detected because of lamp dam-
age, hidden from sight, etc.
• When the lamp of the on-com-
ing or front vehicle is covered
with dust, snow or water.
• When the light from the on-
coming or front vehicle is not
detected because of exhaust
fume, smoke, fog, snow, etc.
• When the front window is cov-
ered with foreign matters such
as ice,dust,fog,or is damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
• When there is a similar shape
lamp with the front vehicle’s
lamps.
• When it is hard to see because
of fog, heavy rain or snow.
• When the headlamp is not
repaired or replaced at an
authorized dealer.
• When headlamp aiming is not
properly adjusted.
• When driving on a narrow
curved road or rough road.
• When driving downhill or uphill.
• When only part of the vehicle
in front is visible on a cross-
road or curved road.
• When there is a traffic light,
reflecting sign, flashing sign
or mirror.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the road conditions are
bad such as being wet or cov-
ered with snow.
• When the front vehicle’s head-
lamps are off but the fog lamps
on.
• When a vehicle suddenly
appears from a curve.
• When the vehicle is tilted from
a flat tire or being towed.
• When the LDWS (Lane
Departure Warning System)
warning light illuminates. (if
equipped)
3-120
Convenient features of your vehicle
Turn signals and lane change
signals
To signal a turn, push down on the
lever for a left turn or up for a right
turn in position (A). To signal a lane
change, move the turn signal lever
slightly and hold it in position (B).The
lever will return to the OFF position
when released or when the turn is
completed.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
One touch turn signal function
To activate an One Touch Turn Signal
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly and then release it. The turn
signal indicators will blink 3, 5, or 7
times, depending on the User
Settings on the LCD display.
You can activate or deactivate the
One Touch Turn Signal function or
choose the number of blinking (3, 5,
or 7) from the User Settings Mode
(Light) on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
OLF044091N
• Do not place any accessories,
stickers or tint the windshield.
• Have the windshield glass
replaced from an authorized
dealer.
• Do not remove or impact relat-
ed parts of the Smart High
Beam system.
• Be careful that water doesn’t
get into the Smart High Beam
unit.
• Do not place objects on the
dashboard that reflects light
such as mirrors, white paper,
etc.The system may malfunc-
tion if sunlight is reflected.
• At times, the Smart High
Beam system may not work
properly, always check the
road conditions for your safe-
ty. When the system does not
operate normally, manually
change between the high
beam and low beam.
WARNING
3-121
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Battery saver function
The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lamp when the
driver turns the engine off and opens
the driver-side door.
With this feature, the parking lamps
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lamps on
when the engine is turned off, perform
the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and
ON again using the light switch on
the steering column.
Headlamp delay function
(if equipped)
If engine Start/Stop button is in the
ACC or OFF position with the head-
lamps ON, the headlamps (and/or
parking lamps) remain on for about 5
minutes. However, if the driver’s door
is opened and closed, the headlamps
are turned off after 15 seconds.
However, with the engine off if the dri-
ver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlamps (and/or parking lamps)
are turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlamps (and/or parking
lamps) can be turned off by pressing
the lock button on the smart key
twice or turning the light switch to the
OFF or AUTO position. However, if
you turn the light switch to the AUTO
position when it is dark outside, the
headlamps will not be turned off.
You can activate or deactivate the
Headlamp Delay function from the
User Settings Mode (Light) on the
LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except dri-
ver’s door), the battery saver func-
tion does not operate and the
headlamp delay function does not
turn off automatically.Therefore, It
causes the battery to be dis-
charged. In this case, make sure
to turn off the lamp before getting
out of the vehicle.
NOTICE
3-122
Convenient features of your vehicle
Daytime running light (DRL)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can help for others to see the front of
your vehicle during the day, especial-
ly after dawn and before sunset.
for U.S.A
The DRL will turn off when:
• Type A
1. The light switch is not in the AUTO
position.
2. The parking brake is applied.
3. The engine is turned off.
• Type B
1. The light switch is not in DRL posi-
tion.
2. The parking brake is applied.
3. The engine is turned off.
for Canada
The DRL will turn off when:
1. The light switch is in the headlamp
position, including the operation
that the headlamp is turned on
automatically in the AUTO light
position.
2. The parking brake is applied.
3. The engine is turned off.
3-123
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Welcome System (if equipped)
Welcome light
Door handle lamp (if equipped)
When all the doors (and trunk) are
closed and locked, the door handle
lamp will come on for about 15 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
• When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.
Headlamp and Parking lamp
When the headlamp (lamp switch in
the headlamp or AUTO position) is on
and all doors (and trunk) are locked
and closed, the parking lamp and
headlamp will come on for 15 seconds
if/or any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button on the smart key the
parking lamp and headlamp will turn
off immediately.
You can activate or deactivate the
Welcome Light from the User Settings
Mode (Light) on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
Interior lamp
When the interior lamp switch is in
the DOOR position and all doors (and
trunk) are closed and locked, the
room lamp will come on for 30 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button on the smart key the
room lamp will turn off immediately.
OLFH044083N
3-124
Convenient features of your vehicle
Interior Lights
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is turned off or the battery will dis-
charge.
Interior lamp AUTO cut
The interior lamps will automatically
go off approximately 20 minutes after
the engine is turned off and the
doors closed.If a door is opened, the
lamp will go off 40 minutes after the
engine is turned off. If the doors are
locked by the smart key and the vehi-
cle enters the armed stage of the
theft alarm system, the lamps will go
off five seconds later.
Front lamps
(1) Front Map Lamp
(2) Front Door Lamp
(3) Front Room Lamp
NOTICE
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.The inte-
rior lights may obscure your view
and cause an accident.
WARNING
OLF044096N/Q
OLF044097
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-125
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Front Map Lamp:
Press either of these lens (1) to turn
the map lamp on or off.This light pro-
duces a spot beam for convenient
use as a map lamp at night or as a
personal lamp for the driver and the
front passenger.
Front Door Lamp :
The front or rear room lamps come
on when the front or rear doors are
opened if the engine is running or
not.When doors are unlocked by the
smart key, the front and rear lamps
come on for approximately 15 sec-
onds as long as any door is not
opened. The front and rear room
lamps go out gradually after approxi-
mately 15 seconds if the door is
closed.However, if engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON position, or all
doors are locked, the front and rear
lamps will turn off immediately.
If a door is opened with the ignition
switch in the ACC position or the
LOCK/OFF position, the front and
rear lamps stay on for about 20 min-
utes. However, if a door is opened
with engine Start/Stop button is in
the ON position the lamps stays on
continuously.
Front Room Lamp:
• Type A
: Press this switch to turn the
front and rear room lamps on.
: Press this switch to turn the
front and rear room lamps off.
• Type B
: Press this switch to turn the
front and rear room lamps on
and off.
3-126
Convenient features of your vehicle
Rear lamps
Rear Room Lamp :
Press this switch to turn the room
lamp on and off.
Trunk room lamp
The trunk room lamp comes on
when the trunk is opened.
The trunk lamp comes on as long
as the trunk lid is open.To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, close the trunk lid securely
after using the trunk.
Door courtesy lamp
The door courtesy lamp comes ON
when the door is opened to assist
entering or exiting the vehicle. It also
serves as a warning to passing vehi-
cles that the vehicle door is open.
When engine Start/Stop button is in
the ACC or OFF position, the door
courtesy lamp turns off after 20 min-
utes.
NOTICE
OLFH044355K OLF044256
OLF044098
OLF044099
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-127
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when
the glove box is opened.
If the glove box is not closed, the
lamp will turn off after 20 minutes.
To prevent possible battery dis-
charge, securely close the glove
box after use.
Vanity mirror lamp
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will
automatically turn on the mirror light.
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the vanity mir-
ror cover after using the mirror.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OLF044258OLF044257
3-128
Convenient features of your vehicle
A :Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C :Wash with brief wipes
Windshield Wipers
Operates as follows when engine
Start/Stop button is in the ON position.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and
release.The wipers will oper-
ate continuously if the lever is
held in this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation.
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. To
vary the speed setting, move
the speed control lever.
LO :The wiper operates continuously
at a low speed.
HI : The wiper operates continuously
at a higher speed.
Information
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or
ice before using the wiper and washer,
it may damage the wiper and washer
system.
i
WWIIPPEERRSS AANNDD WWAASSHHEERRSS
OLF044278
3-129
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Windshield Washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and
wiper operation will continue until you
release the lever. If the washer does
not work, you may need to add wash-
er fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.
If equipped with the Headlamp
Washer, washer fluid will be sprayed
on the headlamp at the same time you
operate the windshield washer when:
1. Engine Start/Stop button is in the
ON position.
2.The light switch is in the headlamp
position.
• To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers and washer system,
use anti-freezing washer fluids
in the winter season or cold
weather.
NOTICE
When the outside temperature is
below freezing,ALWAYS warm the
windshield using the defroster to
prevent the washer fluid from
freezing on the windshield and
obscuring your vision which
could result in an accident and
serious injury or death.
WARNING
OLF044095N
3-130
Convenient features of your vehicle
DDRRIIVVEERR AASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM
Rear view camera
The Rear View Camera will activate
when the engine is running and the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
This is a supplemental system that
provides a view of the area behind
the vehicle through the A/V display
while the vehicle is in the R (Reverse)
position.
Always keep the camera lens
clean. The camera may not work
normally if the lens is covered
with dirt or snow.
NOTICE
OLF044282N
OLFH044281K
The Rear View Camera is not a
safety device. It only serves to
assist the driver in identifying
objects directly behind the mid-
dle of the vehicle. The camera
does NOT cover the complete
area behind the vehicle.
WARNING
• Never rely solely on the Rear
View Camera when backing-up.
• ALWAYS look around your
vehicle to make sure there are
no objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any
direction to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven
close to objects, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children.
WARNING
3-131
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Rear parking assist system
(if equipped)
The Rear Parking Assist System
assists the driver during reverse move-
ment of the vehicle by chiming if any
object is sensed within approximately
50 in (120 cm) behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that senses objects within the
range and location of the sensors, it
cannot detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed.
Operation of the Rear Parking
Assist System
Operating condition
• This system will activate when
backing up with the ignition switch
in the ON position. However, if the
vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph
(5km/h), the system may not detect
objects.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h), the system will not warn
you even though objects are
detected.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
OLFH044062L
Sensor
• ALWAYS look around your vehi-
cle to make sure there are not
any objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any direc-
tion to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven close
to objects,particularly pedestri-
ans, and especially children.
• Be aware that some objects
may not be visible on the
screen or be detected by the
sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective-
ness of the sensor.
WARNING
3-132
Convenient features of your vehicle
Types of warning sound and indicator
• The indicator may differ from the
illustration as objects or sensors
status. If the indicator blinks,
have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the audible warning does not
sound or if the buzzer sounds
intermittently when shifting into
R (Reverse) position, this may
indicate a malfunction with the
Parking Assist System. If this
occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
To turn off the Rear Parking
Assist System
Push the button to turn off the Rear
Parking Assist System.The indicator
light on the button will turn on.
NOTICE
Types of warning sound Indicator
When an object is 24 to 47 in
(60 to 120 cm) from the rear
bumper, the warning sound
beeps intermittently.
When an object is 12 to 24 in
(30 to 60 cm) from the rear
bumper, the warning sound
beeps more frequently.
When an object is within 12 in
(30 cm) from the rear bumper,
the warning sound beeps
continuously.
OLF044479N
OLFP045479N
■ Plug-in hybrid
■ Hybrid
3-133
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Non-operational conditions of
Parking Assist System
The Rear Parking Assist System
may not operate normally when:
• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with dirt or
debris such as snow or ice, or the
sensor cover is blocked.
There is a possibility of the Rear
Parking Assist System malfunction
when:
• Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
• Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
• Heavy rain or water spray is present.
• Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are present near the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with snow.
• Any non-factory equipment or
accessories have been installed, or
if the vehicle bumper height or sen-
sor installation has been modified.
Detecting range may decrease when:
• Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
• Undetectable objects smaller than
40 inches (1 m) and narrower than
6 inches (14 cm) in diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
• Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
• Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
3-134
Convenient features of your vehicle
Rear parking assist system
precautions
• The rear parking assist system
may not operate consistently in
some circumstances depending on
the speed of the vehicle and the
shapes of the objects detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified or damaged. Any
non-factory installed equipment or
accessories may also interfere with
the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 15 in. (40 cm)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is blocked with
snow, dirt, debris, or ice, the rear
parking assist system may be inop-
erative until the snow or ice melts,
or the debris is removed. Use a
soft cloth to wipe debris away from
the sensor.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor.Sensor damage could occur.
• Do not spray the sensors or its sur-
rounding area directly with a high
pressure washer. Doing so may
cause the sensors to fail to operate
normally.
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants related to a Rear
Parking Assist System. Always
drive safely and cautiously.
WARNING
3-135
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
DDEEFFRROOSSTTEERR
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface
of the rear window, never use
sharp instruments or window
cleaners containing abrasives to
clean the window.
If you want to defrost and defog
the front windshield, refer to the
"Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging" section in this chapter.
Rear Window Defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while engine is running.
• To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel. The indicator on
the rear window defroster button illu-
minates when the defroster is ON.
• To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button again.
Information
• If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
• The rear window defroster automat-
ically turns off after approximately
20 minutes or when engine Start/Stop
button is in the OFF position.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
i
NOTICE
OLFP045580N
3-136
Convenient features of your vehicle
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
OLFH044531K
1. Driver’s temperature control knob
2. Passenger’s temperature control knob
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. OFF button
5. Fan speed control button
6. Air conditioning button
7. SYNC button
8. Front windshield defrost button
9. Rear window defrost button
10. DRIVER ONLY button
11. Mode selection button
12. ECON (Economy air conditioning)
button
13. Air intake control button
14. Climate control information screen
3-137
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically according to the tem-
perature setting.
2.Turn the temperature control knob
to set the desired temperature.
Information
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defrost button
(Press the button one more time to
deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO'
sign will illuminate on the infor-
mation display once again.)
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically without
‘AUTO’ sign.
• For your convenience, use the
AUTO button and set the tempera-
ture to 73°F (23°C).
i
OLFH044541K
OLF044217
3-138
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
A solar compensation sensor is located
inside the vehicle on the center of the
dash near the front windshield. In
order to ensure optimum control of
the heating and cooling system, never
block the sensor or place anything
near the sensor while the climate con-
trol system is operating.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pushing buttons
other than the AUTO button. In this
case, the system works sequentially
according to the order of buttons select-
ed. When pressing any button except
the AUTO button while using automatic
operation, the functions not selected
will be controlled automatically.
1.Start hybrid system.
2.Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
5.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6.If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
i
OLFH044504K
3-139
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
OLFH044540K
OLF044207
3-140
Convenient features of your vehicle
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor & Defrost (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel.To close the vent, rotate it left
(Rear : down) to the maximum posi-
tion. To open the vent, rotate it right
(Rear : up) to the desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
OLFH044539K
OLF044209
OLF044222
■ Front
■ Rear (if equipped)
3-141
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Temperature control
Turn the knob to the right to increase
the temperature.Turn the knob to the
left to decrease the temperature.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
• Press the “SYNC” button to adjust
the driver and passenger side tem-
perature equally.
The passenger side temperature
will be set to the same temperature
as the driver side temperature.
• Turn the driver side temperature
control knob. The driver and pas-
senger side temperature will be
adjusted equally.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
• Press the “SYNC” button again to
adjust the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. The
illumination of button turns off.
• Operate the driver side tempera-
ture control knob to adjust the driv-
er side temperature.
• Operate the passenger side tem-
perature control knob to adjust the
passenger side temperature.
OLFH044538K
OLF044223
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side
3-142
Convenient features of your vehicle
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Centigrade.
You can switch the temperature mode
between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as
follows;
- Automatic climate control system
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more.The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
- “User setting mode” in the cluster :
You can change the temperature
unit in the “Other features -
Temperature unit”
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
OLFH044532K
3-143
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side win-
dows and the air within the passenger
compartment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pushing the fan
speed control button.
The higher the fan speed is, the
more air is delivered.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
i
• Continued climate control
system operation in the recir-
culated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control sys-
tem operation in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
WARNING
OLFH044536K
3-144
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operating the fan speed when the
Engine Start/Stop button is in the
ON position could cause the bat-
tery to discharge. Operate the fan
speed when hybrid system is run-
ning.
Driver Only
If you press the DRIVER ONLY but-
ton( ) and the indicator light illumi-
nates, cold air mostly blows in the
direction of the driver’s seat.
However, some of the cold air may
still come out of other vents to keep
indoor air pleasant.
If you use the button with no passen-
ger in the front passenger seat, ener-
gy consumption will be reduced.
DRIVER ONLY button will be turned
off under the following conditions:
1) Defrost on
2) SYNC on
3) Adjusted front passenger seat
temperature
4) DRIVER ONLY button pushed
again
NOTICE
OLFH044535K
3-145
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Push the OFF button of the front to
turn off the air climate control system.
However, you can still operate the
mode and air intake buttons as long
as the Engine Start/Stop button is in
the ON position.
Economy air conditioning
button (ECON)
If you push the ECON button while
the air conditioning system is work-
ing, the air conditioning system will
work less and may improve fuel effi-
ciency.
If you want maximum air conditioning
turn the ECON system off by push-
ing the ECON button.
OLFH044533K
OLFH044537K
OLFH044534K
3-146
Convenient features of your vehicle
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the dust or odor has
dissipated to keep fresh air in the
vehicle.This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start hybrid system. Push the air
conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• The refrigerant system should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians to insure
proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should
be serviced in a well-ventilated
place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be
repaired or replaced with one
removed from a used or sal-
vaged vehicle and new replace-
ment MAC evaporators shall be
certified (and labeled) as meet-
ing SAE Standard J2842.
NOTICE
3-147
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine
overheating. Continue to use the
blower fan but turn the air condi-
tioning system off if the temperature
gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside the
vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to elec-
trical equipment, air conditioning
should only be used with the win-
dows closed.
Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• Use air conditioning to reduce
humidity and moisture inside the
vehicle on rainy or humid days.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle.This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
i
3-148
Convenient features of your vehicle
System maintenance
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the cli-
mate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough
roads, more frequent climate con-
trol air filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a bad influence on the air condi-
tioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
i
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage
to the vehicle and personal injury.
WARNING
3-149
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Air Conditioning refrigerant label
The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.
The symbols and specifications on
the label refer to the following:
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of the air conditioning refrig-
erant label.
POE
OLFP046583N
■ Example
3-150
Convenient features of your vehicle
WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD DDEEFFRROOSSTTIINNGG AANNDD DDEEFFOOGGGGIINNGG
• For maximum windshield defrost-
ing, set the temperature control
knob to the highest temperature
setting and the fan control knob to
the highest fan speed. Select the
front defrost button on the climate
control display. After the engine
warm-up period, warm air will be
directed to the front windshield.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set the
mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probability
of fogging up the inside of the wind-
shield.
• To reduce tendency of the glass
fogging and also to improve visibil-
ity, keep the interior surface of the
windshield clean by wiping it with a
clean cloth and glass cleaner.
If the engine temperature is still
cold after starting, then a brief
engine warm up period may be
required for the vented air flow to
become warm or hot.
NOTICE
Windshield heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility could cause an acci-
dent resulting in serious injury
or death. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan
speed control knob or button to
a lower speed.
WARNING
3-151
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Automatic Climate Control
System
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4.The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button manually.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme
hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4.The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
OLFP045581N
OLFP045582N
3-152
Convenient features of your vehicle
Defogging logic (if equipped)
To reduce the probability of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning are con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return the
defogging logic, do the following.
Automatic climate control system
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button ( ).
3.While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times with-
in 3 seconds.
The climate control information
screen will blink 3 times in 0.5 sec-
ond intervals. This indicates that the
defogging logic is cancelled.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the defogging logic
will be enabled as the default logic.
3-153
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AADDDDIITTIIOONNAALL FFEEAATTUURREESS ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Automatic Ventilation
(if equipped)
When the ignition is ON or when the
engine is running and the outside
temperature is below 59°F (15°C),
the automatic ventilation feature will
activate if the recirculated air intake
position is selected for more than 5
munutes. In this condition the air
intake position will automatically
switch to the outside (fresh) air intake
position.
To cancel or reset the Automatic
Ventilation
When the air conditioning system is
on, select Face Level mode and
while pressing the A/C button, press
the recirculated air position button
five times within three seconds.
Sunroof Inside Air
Recirculation (if equipped)
When the heater or air conditioning
system is on with the sunroof
opened, the outside (fresh) air posi-
tion will be automatically selected. At
this time, if you press the recirculated
air position button, the recirculated
air position will be selected but will
change back to the outside (fresh) air
position after 3 minutes.
When the sunroof is closed, the air
intake position will return to the orig-
inal position that was selected.
3-154
Convenient features of your vehicle
SSTTOORRAAGGEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
Center Console Storage
To open :
Pull lever (1).
Glove Box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with the mechanical key (1).
To open:
Pull the lever (2).
NOTICE
Never store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
peratures for extended periods.
WARNING
ALWAYS keep the storage com-
partment covers closed secure-
ly while driving. Items inside
your vehicle are moving as fast
as the vehicle. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or you are
involved in an accident, the
items may fly out of the com-
partment and may cause an
injury if they strike the driver or
passenger.
WARNING
OLF044261
OLF044262
ALWAYS close the glove box
door after use.
An open glove box door can
cause serious injury to the pas-
senger in an accident, even if the
passenger is wearing a seat belt.
WARNING
3-155
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Sunglass Holder
To open:
Press the cover and the holder will
slowly open. Place your sunglasses
in the compartment door with the
lenses facing out.
To close:
Push back into position.
Make sure the sunglass holder is
closed while driving.
Multi box
To open the cover, press the cover
and it will slowly open. To close the
cover, press the cover and it will
slowly close.
For the safety of the passengers,
when the cover is closed, the cover
locks if the vehicle shakes by sudden
acceleration and braking.
To unlock the cover, press the cover
twice.
OLF044263
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not attempt to force sun-
glasses into the sunglass hold-
er. If the sunglasses become
jammed and you try to open it
forcibly, personal injury may
occur.
WARNING
OLF044279N
3-156
Convenient features of your vehicle
IINNTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS
Cup Holder
Cups or small beverages cups may
be placed in the cup holders.
Rear
Pull the armrest down to use the cup
holders.
• Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
drink. If liquid spills, it may get
into the vehicle’s electrical/elec-
tronic system and damage elec-
trical/electronic parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids,
use a soft cloth. Do not use any
type of hot air dryer. Doing so
may damage the cup holder.
NOTICE
OLF044266
■ Front
■ Rear
OLF044265N
• Avoid abrupt acceleration or
braking while driving your
vehicle when the cup holder is
in use to prevent spilling your
drink. If hot liquid spills, you
could be burned. Such a burn
to the driver could cause loss
of vehicle control resulting in
an accident.
• Do not place uncovered or
unsecured cups, bottles, cans,
etc., in the cup holder contain-
ing hot liquid while the vehicle
is in motion. Injuries may
result in the event of sudden
stop or collision.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sunlight and do not leave
them in a hot vehicle. Doing so
may cause the can or bottle to
overheat and explode.
WARNING
3-157
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Sunvisor
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor forward or back-
ward (4) as needed. Use the ticket
holder (5 and 6) to hold tickets.
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor
to its original position after use.
• Do not put several tickets in the
ticket holder at one time. This
could cause damage to the tick-
et holder.
• Avoid putting a plastic card
such as a credit card in the tick-
et holder located in the outside
of the sunvisor.This could cause
damage to the plastic card.
Power Outlet
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 180 W
with the engine running.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OLF044267
For your safety, do not block
your view when using the sunvi-
sor.
WARNING
OLF044269
■ Front
■ Rear (if equipped)
OLF044268N
3-158
Convenient features of your vehicle
To prevent damage to the Power
Outlets :
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and
remove the accessory plug after
use. Using the accessory plug
for prolonged periods of time
with the engine off could cause
the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric acces-
sories which are less than 180 W
in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet.These devices may
cause excessive audio static
and malfunctions in other elec-
tronic systems or devices used
in your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Push the plug in as far as it will
go. If good contact is not made,
the plug may overheat and the
fuse may blow.
• Plug in battery equipped electri-
cal/electronic devices with reverse
current protection. The current
from the battery may flow into the
vehicle’s electrical/electronic sys-
tem and cause system malfunc-
tion.
NOTICE
Avoid electrical shocks. Do not
place your fingers or foreign
objects (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet or touch the power outlet
with a wet hand.
WARNING
3-159
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Clock
With Audio system
Whenever the battery terminals or
related fuses are disconnected, you
must reset the time.
To set the time:
Engine Start/Stop button must be in
the ACC or ON position.
• H (Hour, 1)
Each time you press the "H" button,
the clock will change backward by
one hour. Pressing and holding the
"H" button will change the clock
backward continuously.
Release the button at the desired time.
• M (Minute, 2)
Each time you press the "M" button ,
the clock will change backward by
one minute.Pressing and holding the
"M" button will change the clock
backward continuously.
Release the button at the desired time.
• Display conversion
To change the 12 hour format to the
24 hour format, press the "H" and
"M" button simultaneously for more
than 4 seconds.
For example, if the "H" and "M" but-
ton is pressed when the time is 10:15
p.m., the display will change to 22:15
With Navigation system
You can set the clock by using the
Navigation system.
Do not adjust the clock while
driving, you may lose your
steering control and cause an
accident that results in severe
personal injury or death.
WARNING
OLF044237
OLF044238
3-160
Convenient features of your vehicle
GPS Time check
The clock is automatically updated
through the navigation system.
GPS Time non-check
The clock can be manually adjusted.
1. Select the "System Settings" on
the "INFO/Setup" screen.
2. Select the "Clock Settings".
3.Select "Time Settings" on the
screen.
4. Select the "Time Format" to the 12
hour or 24 hour format.
For more information, please refer to
the manual that was separately sup-
plied with your vehicle.
Clothes Hanger
To hang items, pull the hanger down.
These hangers are not designed to
hold large or heavy items.
Do not hang other objects such
as hangers or hard objects
except clothes. Also, do not put
heavy, sharp or breakable
objects in the clothe pockets. In
an accident or when the curtain
air bag is inflated, it may cause
vehicle damage or personal
injury.
WARNING
OLF044271
■ Rear
■ Door post
OLF044482N
3-161
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Floor Mat Anchor(s)
ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors
to attach the front floor mats to the
vehicle. The anchors on the front
floor carpet keep the floor mats from
sliding forward.
OVI043427
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehi-
cle’s floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weath-
er rubber mat on top of a car-
peted floor mat). Only a single
floor mat should be installed
in each position.
(Continued)
(Continued)
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal opera-
tion, HYUNDAI recommends
that the HYUNDAI floor mat
designed for use in your vehicle
be installed.
WARNING
3-162
Convenient features of your vehicle
Side Curtain (if equipped)
To use the side curtain:
1. Pull up the curtain by the hook (1).
2. Hang the curtain on both sides of
the hook.
• Always hang both sides of the cur-
tain on the hook.This could cause
damage to the side curtain if only
one side of the curtain is hooked.
• Do not let any foreign material
get in between the vehicle and
side curtain. The side curtain
may not be lifted up.
Luggage Net Holder
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the trunk,
you can use the 4 holders located in
the trunk to attach the luggage net.
Make sure the luggage net is securely
attached to the holders in the trunk.
NOTICE
OLF044273
OLF044274N
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-
stretch the luggage net. ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of
the luggage net’s recoil path. DO
NOT use the luggage net when
the strap has visible signs of
wear or damage.
WARNING
Multimedia System
Multimedia System.................................................4-2
AUX, USB and iPod
®
Port ...............................................4-2
Antenna ...............................................................................4-2
Steering Wheel Audio Control........................................4-3
Audio / Video / Navigation System (AVN)..................4-4
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Hands-Free...........4-4
How Vehicle Audio Works ...............................................4-5
Features of Your Vehicle.................................................4-7
System Controllers and Functions
-3.8 Inch Mono TFT................................4-18, 4-111
Audio Head Unit.................................................4-18, 4-111
Setup.....................................................................4-20, 4-113
Radio : FM, AM, SiriusXM ...............................4-23, 4-116
SiriusXM, XM
TM
RADIO......................................4-26, 4-117
Basic Method of Use : Audio CD /
MP3 CD / USB / iPod
®
/ My Music .............4-28, 4-119
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio.......4-34, 4-125
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology...................4-36, 4-127
Voice Recognition..............................................4-47, 4-138
Ending Voice Recognition................................4-48, 4-139
System Controllers and Functions
- 5 Inch Color TFT LCD ..........................4-55, 4-145
Audio Head Unit.................................................4-55, 4-145
Steering-Wheel Mounted Controls ...............4-57, 4-147
Radio Mode .........................................................4-59, 4-149
SiriusXM, XM
TM
Radio Mode ...........................4-63, 4-151
Media Mode ........................................................4-65, 4-153
Audio CD Mode ..................................................4-66, 4-154
MP3 CD Mode.....................................................4-68, 4-156
USB Mode............................................................4-71, 4-159
iPod
®
Mode.........................................................4-74, 4-162
AUX Mode ...........................................................4-76, 4-164
MY Music Mode.................................................4-77, 4-165
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode.........................................................4-80, 4-168
Voice Recognition..............................................4-95, 4-183
Setup...................................................................4-101, 4-190
Rear View Camera...........................................4-106, 4-194
Blue Link
®
..........................................................4-106, 4-194
Declaration of conformity ..........................................4-198
4
4-2
• If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio
and electronic device may mal-
function.
• Prevent chemicals such as per-
fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,
hand cleaner, and air freshener
from contacting the interior parts
because they may cause damage
or discoloration.
AUX, USB and iPod
®
Port
You can use an AUX port to connect
audio devices and an USB port to
plug in an USB and also in an iPod
®
port.
Information
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Antenna
Shark fin antenna (1)
The shark fin antenna will receive the
transmit data.
Glass antenna (2)
Your vehicle uses a glass antenna to
receive both AM and FM signals.
i
NOTICE
MMUULLTTIIMMEEDDIIAA SSYYSSTTEEMM
Multimedia System
OLF044275N
OLF044240
4-3
Multimedia System
4
• Do not clean the inside of the
rear window glass with a cleaner
or scraper to remove foreign
deposits as this may cause dam-
age to the antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Ni, Cd, and so on.These
can degrade the receiving AM
and FM broadcast signals.
Steering Wheel Audio Control
Do not operate audio remote con-
trol buttons simultaneously.
VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)
• Move the VOLUME lever up to
increase volume.
• Move the VOLUME lever down to
decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK/PRESET lever is moved
up or down and held for 0.8 second
or more, it will function in the follow-
ing modes;
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button. It will SEEK until you
release the button.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET lever is moved
up or down, it will function in the fol-
lowing modes;
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION UP/DOWN button.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/
DOWN button.
NOTICE
NOTICE
■ Type A
■ Type B
OLFP046584N
4-4
MODE (3)
Press the MODE button to select
Radio, XM, Disc, or AUX.
MUTE ( ) (4)
• Press the button to mute the sound.
• Press the button again to activate
the sound.
Information
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this chapter.
Audio (Display Audio) / Video /
Navigation System (AVN)
Detailed information for the AVN sys-
tem is described in a separately sup-
plied manual.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Hands-Free
You can use the phone wirelessly by
using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
(1) Call / Answer button
(2) Call end button
(3) Microphone
Detailed information for the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free is
described in the following pages in
this chapter or in the manual sup-
plied separately.
i
Multimedia System
OLF044276
OLF044242N
4-5
Multimedia System
4
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-
cle.This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehi-
cle may not be strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long distance, low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.
JBM001
FM reception
JBM002
AM reception
4-6
Multimedia System
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station.Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, moun-
tains, and obstructions.This can lead
to undesirable or unpleasant listen-
ing conditions which might lead you
to believe a problem exists with your
radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur.Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As an FM signal
weakens, another more powerful
signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig-
nals being received from several
directions can cause distortion or
fluttering. This can be caused by a
direct and reflected signal from the
same station, or by signals from two
stations with close frequencies. If
this occurs, select another station
until the condition has passed.
JBM003
FM radio station
JBM004 JBM005
4-7
Multimedia System
4
Features of your vehicle
Satellite radio reception
You may experience difficulties in
receiving XM
™
satellite radio signals
in the following situations.
• If you are driving in a tunnel or a
covered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top
level of a multi-level freeway.
• If you are driving under a bridge.
• If you are driving next to a tall vehicle
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks
the signal.
• If you are driving in a valley where
the surrounding hills or peaks
block the signal from the satellite.
• If you are driving on a mountain
road where is the signal blocked by
mountains.
• If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (30 ft.
/10m or more), for example on an
road that goes through a dense for-
est.
• The signal can become weak in
some areas that are not covered
by the XM™ repeater network.
Information
There may also be additional unfore-
seen circumstances leading to recep-
tion problems with the XM™ satellite
radio signal.
Advisory Messages, such as ‘CH
Unavailable’ may occur when starting
XM™ Radio.
i
SATELLITE2
SATELLITE1
4-8
Multimedia System
Caring for disc
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows to venti-
late before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permission.
Use CDs that are created only by
lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such
as benzene and thinner, normal
cleaners and magnetic sprays
made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from
getting damaged, hold CDs by the
edges or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe
it from the center to the outside
edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper.
• Make certain only CDs are insert-
ed into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-
R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may
not operate normally according to
the manufacturing companies. In
such circumstances, continued
use may cause malfunctions to
your audio system.
Information
-
Playing an
Incompatible Copy Protected
Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a copy
protected CD may indicate that the
CD is defective, not the CD player.
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possible.
i
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle, a
separate external antenna must
be fitted. When a cellular phone
or a radio set is used with an
internal antenna alone, it may
interfere with the vehicle's electri-
cal system and adversely affect
safe operation of the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
WARNING
4-9
Multimedia System
4
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order : to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
❋ If no song file is contained in the
folder,that folder is not displayed.
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys-
tem. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention of
traffic conditions and increase
the likelihood of accidents. Use
the phone feature after parking
the vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
WARNING
4-10
Multimedia System
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. Spilling bever-
ages may lead to system mal-
function.
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system within
an electromagnetic environment
may result in noise interference.
• Prevent caustic solutions such
as perfume and cosmetic oil
from contacting the dashboard
because they may cause dam-
age or discoloration.
Information - Using the discs
• This device has been manufactured
to be compatible with software
bearing the following logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical
solutions, such as record sprays,
antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids,
benzene, or thinners.
• After using a disc, put the disc back
in its original case to prevent disc
scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or within
the center hole to prevent damages
to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign substances
into the disc insert/eject slot.
Introducing foreign substances
could damage the device interior.
• Do not insert two discs simultane-
ously.
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,
differences in disc reading and play-
ing times may occur depending on
the disc manufacturer, production
method and the recording method
as used by the user.
(Continued)
i
NOTICE
• Operating the device while
driving could lead to accidents
due to a lack of attention to
external surroundings. First
park the vehicle before operat-
ing the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle.
Driving in a state where exter-
nal sounds cannot be heard
may lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume
setting when turning the
device on. A sudden output of
extreme volume upon turning
the device on could lead to
hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable level
before turning off the device.)
CAUTION
4-11
Multimedia System
4
(Continued)
• Clean fingerprints and dust off the
disc surface (coated side) with a soft
cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result in
disc slot jams or difficulties in disc
removal. Such discs may also result
in noise while playing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not
properly operate depending on the
disc manufacturer, production
method and the record method as
used by the user. If problems persist,
trying using a different CD as con-
tinued use may result in malfunc-
tions.
• The performance of this product
may differ depending on the CD-
RW Drive Software.
• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type
CDs may not function in the device.
DATA discs cannot be played.
(However, such discs may still oper-
ate but will do so abnormally.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use abnormally shaped discs
(8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-
shaped) as such discs could lead to
malfunctions.
• If the disc is straddled on the disc
slot without removal for 10 seconds,
the disc will automatically be re-
inserted into the disc player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R,
CDs with labels)
Information -
Using the USB
device
• Connect the USB device after turn-
ing on the engine. The USB device
may become damaged if it is already
connected when the ignition is
turned on.The USB device may not
operate properly if the car ignition
is turned on or off with the USB
device connected.
• Heed caution to static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting USB
devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not be
recognized when connected as an
external device.
• When connecting an external USB
device, the device may not properly
recognize the USB is in some states.
• Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be
recognized.
• This device recognizes USB devices
formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file for-
mats. This device does not recognize
files in NTFS file format.
(Continued)
i
4-12
Multimedia System
(Continued)
• Some USB devices may not be sup-
ported due to compatibility issues.
• Avoid contact between the USB con-
nector with bodily parts or foreign
objects.
• Repeated connecting/disconnecting
of USB devices within short periods
of time may result in product mal-
function.
• A strange noise may occur when dis-
connecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/disconnect
external USB devices with the audio
power turned off.
• The amount of time required to rec-
ognize the USB device may differ
depending on the type, size or file
formats stored in the USB. Such dif-
ferences in time are not indications
of malfunctions.
• The device only supports USB
devices used to play music files.
• USB images and videos are not sup-
ported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the USB I/F to charge
batteries or USB accessories that
generate heat. Such acts may lead to
worsened performance or damage
to the device.
• The device may not recognize the
USB device if separately purchased
USB hubs and extension cables are
being used. Connect the USB direct-
ly with the multimedia terminal of
the vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB
devices with separate logical drives,
only files saved to the root drive can
be played.
• Files may not properly operate if
application programs are installed
to the USBs.
• The device may not operate normally
if MP3 Players, cellular phones, digi-
tal cameras, or other electronic
devices (USB devices not recognized
as portable disk drives) are connected
with the device.
(Continued)
• Charging through the USB may not
work for some mobile devices.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memo-
ry type besides (Metal Cover Type)
USB Memory.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using formats such
as HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by con-
necting an Adaptor (SD Type or CF
Type) may not be properly recog-
nized.
• The device may not operate properly
when using USB HDDs or USBs sub-
ject to connection failures caused by
vehicle vibrations. (e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)
4-13
Multimedia System
4
(Continued)
• Avoid use of USB mem-
ory products that can
also be used as key
chains or mobile phone
accessories. Use of such products
may cause damage to the USB jack.
• Connecting an MP3 device or phone
through various channels, such as
AUX/BT or Audio/ USB mode may
result in pop noises or abnormal
operation.
Information
- Using the
iPod
®
device
• iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod
®
while oper-
ating the keys, you must use a dedi-
cated iPod
®
cable. (the cable that is
supplied when purchasing iPod
®
/iPhone
®
products)
• If the iPod
®
is connected to the vehi-
cle while it is playing, a high pitch
sound could occur for approximate-
ly 1-2 seconds immediately after
connecting. If possible, connect the
iPod to the vehicle with the iPod
®
stopped/ paused.
• During ACC ON state, connecting
the iPod
®
through the iPod
®
cable
will charge the iPod
®
through the
car audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod
®
cable, make sure to fully insert the
jack to prevent communication
interference.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the EQ features of an exter-
nal device, such as the iPod
®
, and
the audio system are both active, EQ
effects could overlap and cause
sound deterioration and distortion.
Whenever possible, turn off the EQ
feature within the external device
upon use by connecting with the
audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod
®
or
AUX device is connected. When
such devices are not being used, dis-
connect the device for storage.
• When the iPod
®
or AUX device
power is connected to the power
jack, playing the external device
may result in noise. In such cases,
disconnect the power connection
before use.
• Skipping or improper operation may
occur depending on the characteris-
tics of your iPod
®
/Phone
®
device.
(Continued)
i
4-14
(Continued)
• If your iPhone
®
is connected to both
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and USB, the sound may not be
properly played. In your iPhone
®
,
select the Dock connector or
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology to
change the sound output (source).
• iPod mode cannot be operated when
the iPod
®
cannot be recognized due
to versions that do not support com-
munication protocols.
• For fifth generation iPod
®
Nano
devices, the iPod
®
may not be recog-
nized when the battery level is low.
Please charge the iPod
®
for use.
• Search/play orders shown within
the iPod
®
device may differ with the
orders shown within the audio sys-
tem.
• If the iPod
®
malfunctions due to an
iPod
®
device defect, reset the iPod
®
and try again. (To learn more, refer
to your iPod
®
manual)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some iPod
®
s may not sync with the
System depending on its version. If
the Media is removed before the
Media is recognized, then the sys-
tem may not properly restore the
previously operated mode. (iPad
®
charging is not supported.)
Information
- Using the AUX
device
• If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal,
then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is dis-
connected, the previous mode will
be restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (cam-
corder, car VCR, etc.) has been con-
nected.
• The AUX volume can be controlled
separately from other audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not
being used, also remove the connec-
tor jack.
• When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, play-
ing the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the
AUX jack upon use.
i
Multimedia System
4-15
Multimedia System
Information
- Before using
the
Bluetooth
®
handsfree
What is Bluetooth
®
?
• Bluetooth
®
refers to a short-distance
wireless networking technology
which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz fre-
quency to connect various devices
within a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices, Bluetooth
®
phones, PDAs,
various electronic devices, and auto-
motive environments, Bluetooth
®
allows data to be transmitted at high
speeds without having to use a con-
nector cable.
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to con-
veniently make phone calls with
Bluetooth
®
mobile phones through
the audio system.
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones. To
learn more about mobile device com-
patibility, visit www. hyundaiusa.com.
Information
- Precautions for
safe driving
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree is a feature
that enables drivers to practice safe
driving. Connecting the head unit
with a Bluetooth
®
phone allows the
user to conveniently make and
receive calls and use contacts.
Before using Bluetooth
®
, carefully
read the contents of this user’s man-
ual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driv-
ing practices and result in accidents.
Refrain from excessive operations
while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driv-
ing, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
Information
- When connect-
ing a
Bluetooth
®
phone
• Before connecting the head unit
with the mobile phone, check to see
that the mobile phone supports
Bluetooth
®
features.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth
®
, the phone will not be
found during device searches if the
phone has been set to hidden state
or the Bluetooth
®
power is turned
off. Disable the hidden state or turn
on the Bluetooth
®
power prior to
searching/connecting with the Head
unit.
• Bluetooth phone is automatically
connected when the ignition on.
• If you do not want automatic con-
nection with your Bluetooth
®
device,
turn off the Bluetooth
®
feature with-
in your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on the
mobile phone.
(Continued)
iii
4
4-16
Multimedia System
(Continued)
• Park the vehicle when connecting
the head unit with the mobile phone.
• Bluetooth
®
connection may become
intermittently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these steps to
try again.
1. Within the mobile phone, turn the
Bluetooth
®
function off/on and try
again.
2. Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3. Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4. Reboot the Audio System and try
again.
5. Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may differ depending on the model
of your mobile phone.
Information
- Using the voice
recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed with-
in the user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation
of the voice recognition system,
pressing any key other than the
key terminate voice recognition
mode.
• For superior voice recognition per-
formance, position the microphone
used for voice recognition above the
head of the driver’s seat and main-
tain a proper position when saying
commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the wind of the cooling /
heating device is strong
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)
(Continued)
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands can
be used only when a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device is con-
nected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book, it
takes some times to convert the
phone book data into voice informa-
tion. During this time, voice recogni-
tion may not properly operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands nat-
urally and clearly as if in a normal
conversation.
i
4-17
Multimedia System
4
The Bluetooth and Voice Recognition Manual is provided in two versions due to software version differences.
Before reading the manual, check the following.
Press the key in FM Radio screen.
1. If you can find "FM <89.1>" on the screen,
(Go to 4-18 page)
2. If you can find "FM <87.5~107.9>" on the screen,
(Go to 4-111 page)
4-18
Multimedia System
SSYYSSTTEEMM CCOONNTTRROOLLLLEERRSS AANNDD FFUUNNCCTTIIOONNSS
Audio Head Unit
Name Description
Ejects the disc.
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode is
changed in order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟
XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up screen will
be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned
.
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or keys ~ to
select the desired mode.
61
On
RADIO
Name Description
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode is
changed in order of CD, USB, iPod, AUX, My
Music, BT Audio modes.
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop up screen
will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is
turned .
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or keys ~ to
select the desired mode.
• Operates Phone Screen
• Radio Mode : Automatically searches for
broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes :
- Shortly press the key :Moves to next or previous
song(file)
- Press and hold the key : Rewinds or fast-for
wards the current song(file)
• Power Knob :Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
• Volume Knob : Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
• Radio Mode : Saves frequencies (channels)
or receives saved frequencies (channels)
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
2
1
51
On
POWER/
VOL knob
~
(Preset)
61
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
MEDIA
4-19
Multimedia System
4
Name Description
• Each time the button is shortly pressed, it
sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟ Screen
Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and only the
screen will be turned Off. In the screen Off
state, press any key to turn the screen On
again.
DISP
Name Description
• Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews each broad
cast for 5 seconds each
- Press and hold the key :Previews the broadcasts
saved in Preset ~ for 5 seconds
each.
❈ Press the key again to continue
listening to the current frequency.
• Sirius
XM RADIO Mode
- Press and hold the key : Previews all
receivable broadcasts for 10 seconds each
• CD, USB, iPod mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each
❈ Press the key again to continue
listening to the current song (file).
• Shortly press the key : Moves to the Display,
Sound, Phone, System setting modes
• Displays menus for the current mode.
• Radio Mode
- Sirius
XM RADIO
: Category Search
• MP3 CD, USB mode : Folder Search
❈ May differ depending on the selected audio
• Radio mode : Changes frequency by turning
the knob left/right
• Sirius
XM RADIO
mode : Changes channel by
turning the knob left/right
• CD, USB, iPod mode: Searches songs
(files) by turning the knob left/right
❈ When the desired song is displayed, press
the knob to play the song.
SCAN
SCAN
61
TUNE
knob
CAT
FOLDER
MENU
SETUP
SCAN
4-20
Multimedia System
SSEETTUUPP
Display Settings
Press the key Select
[Display] through TUNE knob or
key
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes
/
selection mode
• During On state, press the
or key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
MEDIA
RADIO
OffOn
1
SETUP
4-21
Multimedia System
4
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] through TUNE knob or
key
Tone
This menu allows you to set the
Bass, Middle, Treble.
Select [Tone] Select menu through
TUNE knob Turn TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Position
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Position] Select menu
through TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob left/right to set.
• Fader, Balance : Selects the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [SDVC] Turn SDVC On/Off
by pressing the Tune knob.
Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE
knob
2
SETUP
4-22
Multimedia System
System Settings
Press the key Select [System]
through tune knob or key
Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through
TUNE
knob
• Normal(On) : This mode is for
beginner users and provides
detailed instructions during voice
command operation.
• Expert(Off) :This mode is for expert
users and omits some information
during voice command operation.
(When using Expert mode, guid-
ance instructions can be heard
through the [Help] or [Menu] com-
mands.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through TUNE
knob
❈The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈Language support by region
-
4
SETUP
4-23
Multimedia System
4
RRAADDIIOO :: FFMM,, AAMM,, SSiirriiuussXXMM
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key : Changes
the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key :
Automatically searches for the next
frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
frequency saved in the correspon-
ding key.
• Pressing and holding the key :
Pressing and holding the desired
key from
~
will save the
currently playing broadcast to the
selected key and sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key : The
broadcast frequency increases
and previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each. After scanning all
frequencies, returns and plays the
current broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key :
Previews the broadcasts saved in
Preset ~ for 5 seconds
each.
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
Menu
Press the key Select [
Auto Store] through the TUNE knob
or key
A.Store
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to ~ keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
61
1
MENU
61
SCAN
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
4-24
SSiirriiuussXXMM
®®
SSAATTEELLLLIITTEE RRAADDIIOO
IINNFFOORRMMAATTIIOONN
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a
3-month trial subscription to the
Sirius Select package.You’ll get over
140 channels, including commercial-
free music, plus all your favorite
sports, exclusive talk, entertainment,
and a selection of premium program-
ming. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM channels,
visit siriusxm.com in the United
States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception fac-
tors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio sys-
tem. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your
reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio serv-
ice:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broad-
casts music, sports, news and enter-
tainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or facto-
ry installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and
other select channels over the
Internet using any computer con-
nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-
tomers only).
For information on extended sub-
scription terms, contact SiriusXM
at 1-888-539-7474.
Multimedia System
4-25
Multimedia System
4
NOTE:
SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatical-
ly renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for com-
plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous USA, DC and PR
(with coverage limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also
available in Canada; see www.sir-
iusxm. ca. All fees and program-
ming subject to change. Sirius,
XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc.
4-26
Multimedia System
SSiirriiuussXXMM RRAADDIIOO
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped
with a 3-month trial subscription to
SiriusXM so you have access to over
140 channels of music, information,
and entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the RID /
ESN, turn on the radio, press the
key, and tune to channel
zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key : select
previous or next channel.
• Pressing and holding the key :con-
tinuously move to previous or next
channel.
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key : Previews
each broadcast for 10 seconds
each
❈ Press the key again to con-
tinue listening to the current fre-
quency
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
RADIO
4-27
Multimedia System
4
Category
Press the key Set through
the
TUNE
knob
• The display will indicate the catego-
ry menus, highlight the category
that the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press
the key to navigate cate-
gory list.
• Press the tune knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
category.
❈ If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
Preset
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds):Pressing and holding
the desired key from
~
will save the current broadcast to
the selected key and sound a
BEEP.
Information
- Trobleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is broken
or unplugged. Please consult with
your Hyundai dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SiriusXM Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the key
Select [ Info] through the TUNE
knob or key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.
1
MENU
i
61
61
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
4-28
Multimedia System
BASIC METHOD OF USE : Audio CD / MP3 CD /
USB / iPod
®
/ My Music
Name Description
While song (file) is playing key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode:
• Repeats the current song
MP3 CD, USB mode:
• Repeats songs within the current folder.
(Pressing the key twice).
❈Press the key again to turn off
repeat.
While song (file) is playing key
Audio CD, iPod
®
, My Music mode:
• Plays all songs randomly
MP3 CD, USB mode:
• Folder Random : Plays all files within the
current folder in random order.
• All Random : Plays all files in random
order(Pressing the key twice).
❈ Press the key again to turn off
repeat.
While song (file) is playing key
• Shortly pressing the key : plays the current
song from the beginning / plays the next
song.
• Pressing and holding the key : Rewinds the
song / fast forwards the song.
❈ If the key is pressed again with-
in 1 second, the previous song is played.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
2
RDM
2
RDM
1
RPT
1
RPT
Repeat
Random
Changing
Song/File
4-29
Multimedia System
4
Name Description
While song (file) is playing key
Scans all songs for 10 seconds starting
from the next song.
❈ Press the key again to turn off.
❈ The SCAN function is not supported
in iPod
®
mode.
While file is playing key
• Searches the previous / next folder
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing the
TUNE knob, the first file within the
selected folder will be played.
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
Scan
Folder
Search :
MP3 CD,
USB Mode
4-30
Multimedia System
MENU : Audio CD
In Audio CD mode, press key.
Repeat
Set [ RPT] through the
TUNE
knob or key to repeat the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Set [ RDM] through the
TUNE
knob or key to randomly play
songs within the current CD.
❈Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Set [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob or key to display informa-
tion of the current song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
In MP3 CD / USB mode, press
key.
Repeat
Set [ RPT] through the
TUNE
knob or key to repeat the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Folder Random
Set [ F.RDM] through the
TUNE
knob or key to randomly play
songs within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
2
RDM
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
3
2
RDM
1
RPT
MENU
4-31
Multimedia System
4
Folder Repeat
Set [ F.RPT] through the
TUNE
knob or key to repeat songs
within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Set [ A.RDM] through the
TUNE
knob or key to randomly play all
songs within the CD/USB.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Set [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob or key to display informa-
tion of the current song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Copy
Set [ Copy] through the
TUNE
knob or key.
❈This is used to copy the current
song into My Music. You can play
the copied Music in My Music
mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod
®
, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copy-
ing is canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
MENU : iPod
®
In iPod mode, press key.
Repeat
Set [ RPT] through the
TUNE
knob or key to repeat the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Set [ RDM] through the TUNE
knob or key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
2
RDM
1
RPT
MENU
6
MENU
5
4
3
4-32
Multimedia System
Information
Set [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob or key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Search
Set [ Search] through the
TUNE
knob or key.
Displays iPod
®
category list.
❈ Searching iPod® category is
key pressed, move to par-
ent category.
MENU : My Music Mode
In My Music mode, press
key.
Repeat
Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob
or key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob
or key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing folder in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random
off.
Information
Set [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob
or key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Set [ Delete] through the TUNE
knob or key.
• Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
• Deletes file from list
➀Select the file you wish to delete by
using the TUNE knob.
➁Press the key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
MENU
4
MENU
3
2
RDM
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
4
MENU
3
4-33
Multimedia System
4
Delete All
Set [ Del.All] through the TUNE
knob or key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.
➁After selecting, press the
key and select the delete menu.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed to the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the key to
change to AUX mode.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
MEDIA
MENU
6
MENU
5
4-34
Multimedia System
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology allows
devices to be connected in a short dis-
tance, including hands-free devices,
stereo headsets, wireless remote con-
trollers, etc.For more information, visit
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
website
at www.Bluetooth.com
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned .
Starting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the key to change
the mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio will
start playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈ The title / artist info may not be
supported in some mobile phone.
When it is not supported, no
title/no artist will be displayed.
• Previous / Next song
Press or to play
previous or next song.
❈ The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
MEDIA
On
4-35
Multimedia System
4
Making a call using the Steering wheel remote
controller
The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illus-
tration.
Name
MODE
key
key
VOL-VOL+
Description
• Each time this key is pressed, the mode is changed in
order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3
➟ CD ➟ USB or iPod ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio
• If the media is not connected or a disc is not insert-
ed, corresponding modes will be disabled.
Raises or lowers speaker volume.
Places and transfers calls.
Ends calls or cancels functions.
• Check call history and making call
- Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the key on
the steering remote controller.
- The call history list will be displayed on the screen.
- Press the key again to connect a call to the
selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called number
- Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the key on
the steering remote controller.
- The most recently called number is redialed.
4-36
Multimedia System
BBlluueettooootthh
®®
WWiirreelleessss
TTeecchhnnoollooggyy
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
Phone (if equipped)
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone
features
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile
phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion(IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the first
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically con-
nected once you are in the vicinity
of the vehicle. If you do not want
automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone connection, set
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology power to OFF.
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
WARNING
4-37
Multimedia System
4
Pairing key / key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1. Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller.The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Select [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
During the pairing process, make sure
that all connection requests on the
phone are accepted for phonebook
download and to allow acceptance of
all future connection requests. Visit
http://www.hyundaiusa.com/Bluetooth
for additional information on pairing
your Bluetooth-enabled mobile
phone, and to view a phone compat-
ibility list.
If
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the fol-
lowing screen. Select [Pair] button
to pair a new device or select
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.
PHONE
NOTICE
PHONE
PHONE
4-38
Multimedia System
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
1. The following steps are the same
as those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
Information
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures supported within the vehicle
are as follows. Some features may
not be supported depending on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Operations during a call (Switch to
Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC
on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired to
the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connected
at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree and
Bluetooth audio related features are
supported.
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio fea-
tures, such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone or a
Bluetooth audio device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes discon-
nected due to being out of communi-
cation range, turning the device
OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication error,
corresponding Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices are automatical-
ly searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable due
to communication errors between
the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon reset-
ting Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, the system will be restored.
• After pairing is complete, a contacts
download request is sent once to the
mobile phone. Some mobile phones
may require confirmation upon
receiving a download request,
ensure your mobile phone accepts
the connection. Refer to your
phones user’s manual for additional
information regarding phone pair-
ing and connections.
i
SETUP
4-39
Multimedia System
4
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect].
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
SETUP
SETUP
4-40
Multimedia System
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then select [Change
Priority] button from the Menu. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.
Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a pri-
ority phone.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.
SETUP
NOTICE
4-41
Multimedia System
4
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.
Information
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
"Pairing through Phone Setup" sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
SETUP
i
SETUP
4-42
Multimedia System
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
"Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection" section with-
in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
1)Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/disconnects currently
selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
3)Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen
Information -
Before down
loading contacts
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile phone
supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user's manual.
• The contacts for only the connected
phone can be downloaded.
i
SETUP
4-43
Multimedia System
4
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
Information
• Upon downloading phone contacts,
the previous corresponding data is
deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
going volume level.
Information
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the key.
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology related features
will not be supported within the audio
system.
Information
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and select “Yes”.
SETUP
i
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
i
SETUP
i
SETUP
4-44
Multimedia System
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the key to display the Phone
menu screen.
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access
2) Call History : Displays the call his-
tory list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
Information
• If you select the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data stored,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press key on
the steering wheel while the call is
incoming.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
i
PHONE
4-45
Multimedia System
4
Information
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
Information
• To save Favorite, contacts should be
downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the con-
tact has been updated in the phone.
To update Favorites, delete the
Favorite and create a new Favorite.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is not
possible when there is no call histo-
ry stored or a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
PHONE
i
PHONE
i
4-46
Multimedia System
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
NOTE:
Find a contact in an alphabetical
order, press the key.
Information
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have been
downloaded to the car cannot be edit-
ed or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed
separately for each paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device (max 5
devices x 1,000 contacts each).
Previously downloaded data is main-
tained even if the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device has been discon-
nected.
(However, the contacts and call histo-
ry saved to the phone will be deleted
if a paired phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the icon
will be displayed within the status
bar.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• It is not possible to begin download-
ing a contact list when the contact
download feature has been turned off
within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device. In addition, some
devices may require device authori-
zation upon attempting to download
contacts. If downloading does not
normally occur, check the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device settings
or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones. For more information of sup-
ported Bluetooth
®
devices and func-
tion support, refer to your phone’s
user manual.
i
MENU
PHONE
4-47
Multimedia System
4
VVOOIICCEE RREECCOOGGNNIITTIIOONN
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel. Say a command.
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say "Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)"
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say "(BEEP)"
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
Information
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4)Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
“ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep tone will
sound.After the “beep”, say the voice
command.
i
SETUP
4-48
Multimedia System
EENNDDIINNGG VVOOIICCEE RREECCOOGGNNIITTIIOONN
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the
steering remote controller
Information
• While using voice command, press-
ing any steering wheel control or a
different key will end voice com-
mand.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say "cancel" or
"end" to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold the
key on the steering wheel to end
voice command.
Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
The Hyundai Voice Recognition
System may have difficulty under-
standing some accents or uncom-
mon names.
When using Voice Recognition to
place a call, speak in a moderate
tone, with clear pronunciation To
maximize the use of Voice
Recognition, consider these guide-
lines when storing contacts:
• Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead,
always use full names (including first
and last names) for these contacts
• Do not use special characters
(e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)
• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or
acronyms (i.e., use "County Finance
Department" instead of "C. F. D."; Be
sure to say the name exactly as it is
entered in the contacts list
i
4-49
Multimedia System
4
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Ending voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep or say "help" for more
information.
Please say the contact name you want to call.
Please say a command
after the beep or say "help"
for more information.
Beep~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
(BEEP)
Please say a...
4-50
Multimedia System
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections.
•
When listening to the radio, displays the
next radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
XM1
➟
XM2
➟
XM3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
(Call by Name)
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
4-51
Multimedia System
4
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1701 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
XM (Satellite)
•
When currently listening to the SiriusXM
®
,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM
®
screen.
XM (Satellite)
1~3
Displays the selected SiriusXM
®
screen.
XM Plays the selected SiriusXM
®
channel.
Channel
0~223
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod music.
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Mute Mutes the sound
Command Function
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
4-52
Multimedia System
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available
during USB and MP3 CD operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available dur-
ing FM, AM radio operation
• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the cur-
rent broadcast and plays for 10 seconds
each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiv-
ing RBDS broadcasts.)
Command Function
Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
4-53
Multimedia System
4
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technologyaudio streaming from mobile phone oper-
ation Command Operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
•iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
operation
• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in
sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
4-54
Multimedia System
Information
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod
®
mobile digital device
sold separately. The Bluetooth
®
word
mark and logos are registered trade-
marks owned by Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by
Hyundai is under license. SiriusXM
services require a subscription sold
separately, or as a package, by Sirius
XM Radio Inc. If you decide to con-
tinue service after your trial, the sub-
scription plan you choose will auto-
matically renew thereafter and you
will be charged according to your cho-
sen payment method at thencurrent
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel
you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-
2349. See SiriusXM Customer
Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S.
satellite and data services are avail-
able only in the 48 contiguous USA,
DC and PR (with coverage limita-
tions). SiriusXM satellite service is
also available in Canada; see www.sir-
iusxm.ca. All fees and programming
subject to change.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Sirius, XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc. Android™ is a trademark
of Google, Inc. BlackBerry is a regis-
tered trademark of Research In
Motion Limited (RIM). All other
marks, channel names and logos are
the property of their respective own-
ers. All rights reserved.
i
4-55
Multimedia System
4
SSYYSSTTEEMM CCOONNTTRROOLLLLEERRSS AANNDD FFUUNNCCTTIIOONNSS
Audio Head Unit
Name Description
Ejects the disc.
• Convert to Radio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the mode is
changed in order of FM1, FM2, AM, XM1,
XM2, XM3.
• Convert to Media Mode
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode is
changed in order of CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio.
MEDIA
RADIO
Name Description
(for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology equipped
model)
• Converts to Phone mode
❈ When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
• Power : Press to turn power on/off.
• Volume : Turn left/right to control volume.
• When pressed shortly
- Radio mode : plays previous/next frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music) modes :
changes the track, Song(file)
• When pressed and held
- Radio mode : continuously changes the
frequency. Upon release, plays the current
frequency.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music) modes :
rewinds or fast forwards the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls the call
volume.
• SiriusXM RADIO : Category Search
• MP3 CD/USB mode : Search Folder
POWER/
VOL knob
CAT
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
4-56
Multimedia System
No will be shown if the feature is
not supported.
Name Description
• Turns the monitor display on/off.
When the button is pressed, stops sound and
"Audio Mute" is displayed on LCD.
• Radio Mode : previews all receivable broad
casts for 5 seconds each
• SiriusXM RADIO Mode : previews all receivable
broadcasts for 10 seconds each. broadcasts
for 10 seconds each
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes :
previews each song (file) for 10 seconds
each.
Converts to Setup mode.
• Radio mode : turn to change broadcast
frquencies.
• SiriusXM RADIO Mode : turn to change
broadcast channels
• Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music) modes :
turn to search tracks/ channels/files.
TUNE
knob
SETUP
SCAN
MUTE
DISP
4-57
Multimedia System
4
Steering-Wheel Mounted Controls
The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illus-
tration.
Name
MODE
,
,
VOL-VOL+
Description
• When pressed shortly
- Starts voice recognition
- When selecting during a voice prompt, stops the
prompt and converts to voice command waiting state
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- Ends voice recognition
• Each time this key is pressed, the mode is changed in
order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3
➟ CD ➟ USB or iPod ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio
• If the media is not connected or a disc is not insert-
ed, corresponding modes will be disabled.
Used to control volume.
• When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode : searches broadcast frequencies and
channels saved to presets.
- Media(CD / USB / iPod
®
/ My Music / BT Audio)
modes : changes the track, file or chapter.
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode, automatically searches broadcast fre-
quencies and channels
- Media(CD / USB / iPod
®
/ My Music) modes,
rewinds or fast forwards the track or song(file)
- BT Audio mode may not be supported in some
mobile phones.
4-58
Multimedia System
Name
Description
• When pressed shortly
- When pressed in the phone screen, displays call
history screen
- When pressed in the dial screen, makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming call screen,
answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting, switches to
waiting call (Call Waiting)
• When pressed and held
(over 0.8 seconds)
- When pressed in the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree wait mode, redials the last
call
- When pressed during a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree call, switches call back to
mobile phone (Private)
- When pressed while calling on the mobile phone,
switches call back to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree (Operates only when
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree is con-
nected)
Ends phone call
4-59
Multimedia System
4
RRAADDIIOO MMOODDEE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
3. Preset
Displays current preset number
~ .
4. Preset Display
Displays preset buttons.
5. A.store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
Switching to Radio Mode
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of FM1➟
➟
FM2➟AM➟XM1➟XM2➟XM3
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Radio
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
RADIO
SETUP
RADIO
P6
P1
4-60
Multimedia System
Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the key to play the
previous/next frequency.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
• FM : Increases/decreased by
200kHz
• AM : Increased/decreased by 9
(Only GUAM), 10kHz
Using Radio Mode
Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
Press the button to display
the broadcast information for the fre-
quency saved to each button.
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
Information
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the ~ preset but-
tons (over 0.8 seconds) to save the cur-
rent frequency to the selected preset.
Auto Store
Press the button to automati-
cally save receivable frequencies to
Preset buttons.
Information
While Auto Store is operating, press-
ing the button again will cancel
Auto Store and restore the previous
frequency.
Scan
Press the key to preview fre-
quencies with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5
seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored.
While Scan is operating, pressing
the key will cancel the scan
operation.
SCAN
SCAN
SCAN
A.Store
i
A.Store
P6P1
i
P6P1
Preset
SEEK
TRACK
4-61
Multimedia System
SiriusXM
®
Satellite Radio
information
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a
3-month trial subscription to the
Sirius Select package.You’ll get over
140 channels, including commercial-
free music, plus all your favorite
sports, exclusive talk, entertainment,
and a selection of premium program-
ming. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM channels,
visit siriusxm.com in the United
States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception fac-
tors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio sys-
tem. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your
reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio serv-
ice:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broad-
casts music, sports, news and enter-
tainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or facto-
ry installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and
other select channels over the
Internet using any computer con-
nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-
tomers only).
For information on extended sub-
scription terms, contact SiriusXM
at 1-888-539-7474.
4
4-62
Multimedia System
NOTE:
SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatical-
ly renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for com-
plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous USA, DC and PR
(with coverage limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also
available in Canada; see www.sir-
iusxm. ca. All fees and program-
ming subject to change. Sirius,
XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc.
4-63
Multimedia System
4
SSiirriiuussXXMM RRAADDIIOO MMOODDEE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Channel Information
Displays the category, channel num-
ber, channel name, artist and title
information.
3. Preset
Displays currently playing preset
number ~ .
4. Preset Display
Displays saved presets.
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped
with a 3-month trial subscription to
SiriusXM so you have access to over
140 channels of music, information,
and entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the RID /
ESN, turn on the radio, press the
key, and tune to channel
zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
Using SEEK
Press the key to play the
previous/next channel.
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SEEK
TRACK
RADIO
P6P1
4-64
Multimedia System
SCAN
Press the key to scan all
channels with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous-
ly played channel will be restored.
During Scan, pressing the
key again will cancel the scan opera-
tion and restore the previously
played channel.
If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the cur-
rent category.
Searching Categories
Select the category by using the
key and press the
TUNE knob to select.
Channels for the selected category
are played.
Information
- Trobleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is broken
or unplugged. Please consult with
your Hyundai dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SiriusXM Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
Selecting Presets/Saving
Presets
Press the button to display
the broadcast information for the
channel saved to each button.
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
Information
While listening to a channel you want
to save as a preset, press and hold one
of the ~ preset buttons to
save the current channel to the select-
ed preset.
P6P1
i
P6P1
Preset
i
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
4-65
Multimedia System
4
MMEEDDIIAA MMOODDEE
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of CD
➟
USB(iPod
®
)
➟
AUX
➟
My Music
➟
BT
Audio.
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Media
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
Information
The media mode pop up screen can be
displayed only when there are two or
more media modes turned on.
Title Icon
When a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology, iPod
®
, USB, or AUX
device is connected or a CD is
inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.
Icon Title
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
CD
iPod
®
USB
AUX
i
MEDIA
SETUP
MEDIA
4-66
Multimedia System
AAUUDDIIOO CCDD MMOODDEE
Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
Information
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R,
CDs with labels)
• The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track
information is included within the
audio CD.
Changing Tracks
Press the key to move to
the previous or next track.
Information
• Pressing the key after the
track has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current track from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the track has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous track.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
i
SEEK
TRACK
i
4-67
Multimedia System
4
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track,
press the TUNE knob to start
playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
key to rewind or fast-for-
ward the current track.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
Audio CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current disc.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the button to play tracks
in random(Shuffle) order.
Press the button again to turn
the Random(Shuffle) feature off.
• Random(Shuffle): Plays all tracks
in random(Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current track. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat :Repeats the current track.
List
Press the button to display the
track list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.
List
Repeat
Shuffle
Shuffle
Info
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
4-68
Multimedia System
MMPP33 CCDD MMOODDEE
Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
mode will automatically start and
being playing.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
Information
If there are numerous files and folders
within the disc, reading time could
take more than 10 seconds and the list
may not be displayed or song searches
may not operate. Once loading is com-
plete, try again.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
• Pressing the key after
the file has been playing for 2
seconds will start the current
file from the beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1
seconds will start the previous
file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
i
NOTICE
4-69
Multimedia System
4
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
Searching Folders
Press the key to select and
search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
MP3 CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat, Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
Information
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set
as the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file
information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion are recorded within the MP3
file ID3 tag.
i
Info
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
4-70
Multimedia System
Random(Shuffle)
Press the button to play files
in random(Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
(Shuffle) Folder
➟ Random (Shuffle)
All ➟ Off.
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays all
files within the current folder in
Random (Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All :Plays all files
in Random(Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
➟Repeat Folder➟Off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files
within the current Folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
Information
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes'.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
i
Copy
Repeat
Shuffle
4-71
Multimedia System
4
UUSSBB MMOODDEE
Using USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin
playing a USB file.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
Information
• Loading may require additional time
if there are many files and folders
within the USB and result in faulty
list display or file searching. Normal
operations will resume once loading
is complete.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memo-
ry type besides (Metal Cover Type)
USB Memory.
Changing Files
Press the keys to move to
the previous or next file.
Information
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
i
SEEK
TRACK
i
4-72
Multimedia System
Searching Folders
Press the key to select
and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
USB Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat, Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
Information
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file
information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion are recorded within the MP3
file ID3 tag.
i
Info
CAT
FOLDER
4-73
Multimedia System
4
Random (Shuffle)
Press the button to play files
in random(Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of
Random(Shuffle) Folder
➟Random
(Shuffle) All➟Off.
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays the
files in the current folder in ran-
dom(Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All :Plays all files
in random(Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat➟
Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
Information
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes'.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
i
Copy
Repeat
Shuffle
4-74
Multimedia System
iiPPoodd
®
MMOODDEE
Using iPod
®
Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod
®
Songs
Once an iPod
®
is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod
®
song.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
Information
iPod
®
s with unsupported communica-
tion protocols may not properly oper-
ate in the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the key to move to
the previous or next song.
• Pressing the key after
the song has been playing for 2
seconds will start the current
song from the beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the song has been playing for 1
seconds will start the previous
song.
• Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod
®
product.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Songs
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current
song.
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
Information
There are eight categories that can be
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.
i
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
i
NOTICE
4-75
Multimedia System
4
Category Menu
Within the iPod
®
Category menu,
you will have access to the ,
Home, and features.
1. : Displays the play screen
2. Home : Moves to the iPod
®
root cat-
egory screen
3. : Moves to the previous cate-
gory
Information
• If the search mode is accessed while
playing a song, the most recently
searched category is displayed.
• Search steps upon initial connection
may differ depending on the type of
iPod
®
device.
iPod
®
Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Random(Shuffle),
Repeat and List features.
Random (Shuffle)
Press the button to play
songs in random(Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all
songs in Random(Shuffle) order.
Shuffle
i
4-76
Multimedia System
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
List
Press the button to display the
Category Menu.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
AAUUXX MMOODDEE
Using AUX Mode
Press the key Select [AUX]
An external device can be connected
to play music.
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders,
car VCR, etc.) can be played through
a dedicated cable.
MEDIA
List
Repeat
4-77
Multimedia System
4
MMYY MMUUSSIICC MMOODDEE
Using My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
Information
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the button will be
disabled.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
Information
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Files
While playing, press and hold the
key to rewind or fast-for-
ward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
i
SEEK
TRACK
My Music
i
4-78
Multimedia System
My Music Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat, Delete and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
Information
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information
is recorded within the MP3 file ID3
tag.
Random
Press the button to play files
in random order. Press the button
again to turn the Random feature off.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
Deleting Files
Press the button to delete the
current file.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
Delete
Repeat
Shuffle
i
Info
4-79
Multimedia System
4
List Menu
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.
Press the button or individ-
ually select the files you want to
delete. Once files are selected, the
button and buttons
will be enabled.
1) :Moves to the previous screen
2) Sellect All: Selects all files
3) Unsellet All: Deselects all selected
files
4) Delete: Deletes selected files
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the button to
delete the selected files.
Information
• If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved.
• Identical files cannot be copied
more than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go to
[System] [Memory
Information]
SETUP
i
Delete
Delete
Unselect All
Select All
4-80
Multimedia System
Information
-
Using the
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
audio mode
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode can be used only when
a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone has been connected.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available
when connecting mobile phones that
do not support this feature.
• While Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio is playing, if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected, then the music
will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio mode may result
in pop noises in some mobile phones.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When returning to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may
not automatically restart in some
mobile phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or mak-
ing an outgoing call while playing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio may result in audio interfer-
ence.
BBlluueettooootthh
®®
WWiirreelleessss
TTeecchhnnoollooggyy AAUUDDIIOO MMOODDEE
((IIff eeqquuiippppeedd))
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio
Once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected, the
mode will automatically start.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
i
4-81
Multimedia System
4
Information
The play/pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device has not been connected,
press the key [Phone] but-
ton to display the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology connection
screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete fea-
tures from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone.
Information
• If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play but-
ton once may start playing the mode.
Check to see that music is playing
from the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device after converting
to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode.
Information
- Pairing through
[PHONE] Setup
• The Bluetooth
®
and Voice
Recognition Manual is provided in
two versions due to software version
differences.
• Before reading the manual, check
the following.
• Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
• From your Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
SETUP
ii
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
i
4-82
Multimedia System
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
Pairing key / key on
the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1.Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2.Press the button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3.From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
OK
PHONE
PHONE
4-83
Multimedia System
4
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
If
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the fol-
lowing screen. Press the [Pair]
button to pair a new device or
press the [Connect] to connect a
previously paired device.
Pairing through [PHONE] Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
(For USA)
(Except USA)
(❈ the screen can be different by region.)
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
SETUP
PHONE
NOTICE
4-84
Multimedia System
Information
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures supported within the vehicle
are as follows. Some features may
not be supported depending on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls
- Operations during a call (Switch to
Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC
on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired to
the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connected
at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired while
a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth audio relat-
ed features are supported.
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio fea-
tures, such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone or a
Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes discon-
nected due to being out of communi-
cation range, turning the device
OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication error,
corresponding Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices are automatical-
ly searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable due to
communication errors between the
car Handsfree and the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device, reset the
device by turning off and back on
again. Upon resetting Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device, the sys-
tem will be restored.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• After pairing is complete, a contacts
download request is sent once to the
mobile phone. Some mobile phones
may require confirmation upon
receiving a download request,
ensure your mobile phone accepts
the connection. Refer to your
phones user’s manual for additional
information regarding phone pair-
ing and connections.
i
4-85
Multimedia System
4
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the button.
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
SETUP
Connect
SETUP
4-86
Multimedia System
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then press the
button from the Menu.
The selected device will be changed
to the highest priority.
Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a pri-
ority phone.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the button.
Disconnect
SETUP
NOTICE
Change priority
4-87
Multimedia System
4
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the button.
Information
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the key to display the Phone
menu screen.
(For USA)
(Except USA)
(❈ the screen can be different by region.)
PHONE
i
Delete
SETUP
4-88
Multimedia System
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access
2) Call History : Displays the call his-
tory list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls
5) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings
Information
• If you press the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you press the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data stored,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
3)Delete All : Delete all stored
favorite contacts
Information
• To save Favorite, contacts should be
downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not be
automatically updated if the contact
has been updated in the phone. To
update Favorites, delete the Favorite
and create a new Favorite.
i
PHONE
i
4-89
Multimedia System
4
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the button to down-
load the call history.
1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download :Download Recent Call
History
• Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.Press the but-
ton to download the call history.
Download
PHONE
Download
PHONE
4-90
Multimedia System
1) Contacts List :
- Displays downloaded contacts
entries
- Connects call upon selection
2) Sort by : Find a contact in an
alphabetical order.
3) Download : Download contacts
entries
Information
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed
separately for each paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device (max 5
devices x 1,000 contacts each).
Previously downloaded data is main-
tained even if the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device has been discon-
nected.
(However, the contacts and call histo-
ry saved to the phone will be deleted
if a paired phone is deleted.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the sta-
tus bar.
• It is not possible to begin download-
ing a contact list when the contact
download feature has been turned
off within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device. In addition,
some devices may require device
authorization upon attempting to
download contacts. If downloading
does not normally occur, check the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device settings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones. For more information of
supported Bluetooth
®
devices and
function support, refer to your
phone’s user manual.
Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the key Select [Dial
Number]
1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone
number
2)Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number If no
number has been entered, switch
es to call history screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone
number
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time
PHONE
i
4-91
Multimedia System
4
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Accept : Accepts the incoming call
4) Reject : Rejects the incoming call
Information
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
During a Handsfree Call
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Call time : Displays the call time
4) End : Ends call
5) Private :Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as
heard by the other party
7) Mute :Turns Mic Mute On/Off
Information
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
i
i
4-92
Multimedia System
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Setting
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
(For USA)
(Except USA)
(❈ the screen can be different by region.)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section with-
in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
1) : Moves to the previous
screen
2)Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
3)Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
SETUP
SETUP
4-93
Multimedia System
4
Information
- Before down-
loading contacts
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile phone
supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected
phone can be downloaded.
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
Information
• Upon downloading phone contacts,
the previous corresponding data is
deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the
key.
SEEK
TRACK
NOTICE
SETUP
i
SETUP
i
4-94
Multimedia System
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
(For USA)
(Except USA)
To turn
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and press “Yes".
SETUP
NOTICE
SETUP
4-95
Multimedia System
4
VVOOIICCEE RREECCOOGGNNIITTIIOONN
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel remote controller.Say
a command.
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
For proper recognition, say the
command after the voice instruc-
tion and beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4)Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
“ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep tone will
sound.After the “beep”, say the voice
command.
NOTICE
SETUP
4-96
Multimedia System
❈ Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Ending voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep or say "help" for more
information.
Please say a command after
the beep or say "help" for more
information.
Please say a...
Please say the contact name you want to call.
Ding~
Ding~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
(BEEP)
4-97
Multimedia System
4
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Dial Number”, “Call History” or
“Contacts” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections.
•
When listening to the radio, displays the
next radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
XM1
➟
XM2
➟
XM3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
(Call by Name)
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
4-98
Multimedia System
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1701 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
XM (Satellite)
•
When currently listening to the SiriusXM
®
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM
®
screen.
XM
(Satellite) 1~3
Displays the selected SiriusXM
®
screen.
XM Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM
®
channel.
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod music.
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
Command Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Mute Mutes the sound
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
0~223
4-99
Multimedia System
4
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
• MP3 CD / USB commands:Commands available dur-
ing USB and MP3 CD operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused track.
Pause Pauses the current track.
Shuffle Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play tracks in
sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder
• FM/AM radio commands: available during FM, AM
radio operation
• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the cur-
rent broadcast and plays for 10 seconds
each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiv-
ing RBDS broadcasts.)
Command Function
Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
4-100
Multimedia System
•iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
operation
• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
Shuffle Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play songs in
sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
4-101
Multimedia System
4
SSEETTUUPP
Starting Mode
Press the key to display the
Setup screen.
You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound], [Phone]
and [System].
Display Settings
Adjusting the Brightness
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Brightness]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
screen brightness or set the
Brightness on Automatic, Day, or
Night mode.
Press the button to reset.
1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically
2) Day : Always maintains the bright-
ness on high
3) Night : Always maintains the
brightness on low
Mode Pop up
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Mode Pop up]
This feature is used to display the
Pop-up Mode screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the or key
will display the Pop-up Mode screen.
Information
The media Pop-up Mode screen can
be displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.
i
MEDIA RADIO
SETUP
Default
SETUP
SETUP
4-102
Multimedia System
MP3 Information Display
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Media Display]
This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
1) Folder/File : Displays file name
and folder name
2)Album/Artist/Song : Displays
album name/artist name/song
Sound Settings
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]
Use the , , , buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the button to reset.
Default
SETUP
SETUP
4-103
Multimedia System
4
Variable EQ
This is a premium sound system fea-
ture in which the acoustical mode
can be selected according to musical
preferences.
Select [Variable EQ] Set menu
through TUNE knob
• Innocente(Normal) : Natural
sound, sound optimized for driver.
• Forza(Dynamic) : Powerful sound
emphasizing bass, stereo sound.
• Concerto(Concert) : Sound similar
to a concert or live hall
❈ May differ depending on the
selected audio.
SDVC (Speed Dependent
Volume Control)
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]
The volume level is controlled auto-
matically according to the vehicle
speed.SDVC can be set by selecting
from On / Off.
Voice Recognition Volume
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.]
Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the
Voice Recognition volume.
SETUP
SETUP
4-104
Multimedia System
Touch Screen Beep
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Touch Screen Beep]
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
Blue Link Voice Volume
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Blue Link Voice Vol.]
Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the
Blue Link Voice Volume.
❈ Blue Link
®
may differ depending
on the selected audio.
System Setting
Memory Information
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Memory Information]
This feature displays information
related to system memory.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity
SETUP
SETUP SETUP
4-105
Multimedia System
4
Prompt Feedback
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Prompt Feedback]
This feature is used to select the
desired prompt feedback option from
ON and OFF.
1) ON : When using voice recogni-
tion, provides detailed guidance
prompts
2) OFF : When using voice recogni-
tion, omits some guidance
prompts
Language
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Language]
❈This feature is used to change the
system and voice recognition lan-
guage.
❈if the language is changed, the
system will restart and apply the
selected language.
SETUP SETUP
4-106
Multimedia System
RREEAARR VVIIEEWW CCAAMMEERRAA
((iiff eeqquuiippppeedd))
• The system has been equipped
with a rear view camera for user
safety by allowing a wider rear
range of vision.
• The rear view camera will automat-
ically operate when the ignition key
is turned ON and the shift lever is
set to R (Reverse).
• The rear view camera will automat-
ically stop operating when shift
lever is set to different position.
BBLLUUEE LLIINNKK
®®
((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Hyundai aims to offer differentiated
customer values through a
‘Connected Car Life,’ which is to pro-
vide consumers with fast and reliable
IT technology.As consumers’lifestyles
become more and more mobile in
thanks to remarkable advances in
smart phones, tablet PCs and overall
wireless telecommunication, new
lifestyle patterns demand seamless
connection between one’s office,
home, outdoors and automobiles.
Automobile companies are now faced
with the task of shifting their paradigm
from vehicle-centered services to cus-
tomer value-centered services, with
the ultimate goal of securing global
leadership in the field of vehicle IT and
telematics.
Hyundai Motor plans to achieve this
by realizing a terminal platform flexi-
ble to changes in IT technology,
cooperating with global IT compa-
nies, creating an eco-system and
providing the latest contents & servic-
es based on an open environment.
The rear view camera has been
equipped with an optical lens to
provide a wider range of vision
and may appear different from
the actual distance. For safety,
directly check the rear and
left/right sides.
CAUTION
4-107
Multimedia System
4
Using the Room Mirror Key
Selecting the room mirror key will
allow you to make service required
inquiries, POI info searches, and
emergency rescues by connecting to
the Blue Link
®
Center.
Such features can be used only after
subscribing to the Blue Link
®
service.
➀ (Blue Link
®
Center)
Makes requests for Blue Link
®
serv-
ice related inquiries and consulta-
tions.
A call is connected to the Blue Link
®
service center employee.
Re-pressing the key will end the call.
This feature does not operate when
you are on a Bluetooth
®
phone call.
➁ (Blue Link
®
for POI)
• Blue Link
®
for Voice command
Starts Blue Link
®
voice command.
Voice receiving voice guidance,
shortly press the button to convert to
voice command mode. Press and
hold the button to end voice com-
mand.
• TBT VR Commands
1. Navigate to
“Navigate to”voice command is used
to request the download of route
data for a new destination, saved
destinations, daily routes and previ-
ous destinations.
2. Save Destination
“Save Destination” VR command is
used to assign a voice tag to the last
downloaded destination and store it
in a destination directory.
Information
The Turn by Turn (TBT) feature sup-
ports the store of ten (10) destinations
in the TBT destinations directory.
3. Route Preview
“Route Preview”VR command allows
the user to preview the route instruc-
tions (upcoming maneuver instruc-
tions) at any time during the route
guidance.
4. Destinations List
“Destinations List” VR command
allows the user to preview and delete
the stored destinations with their
associated voice tags in the Turn by
Turn destinations directory.
5.Voice Guidance
“Voice Guidance”VR command allows
the user to mute/unmute the Turn by
Turn(TBT) direction announcements.
i
4-108
Multimedia System
6. Suspend Route
“Suspend Route” VR command
allows the user to suspend and
pause Turn by Turn(TBT) route guid-
ance while in the guidance mode.
7. Resume Route
“Resume Route” VR command
allows the user to resume Turn by
Turn(TBT) route guidance.
➂ (Blue Link
®
for SOS)
In the case of an emergency,
requests for help to the Blue Link
®
center.
Call is connected to the Blue Link
®
emergency rescue center. Re-press-
ing the key will end the call.
If already on a Bluetooth
®
phone call,
the call will end to connect you to the
Blue Link
®
Emergency Rescue
Center.
Information
• You cannot talk simultaneously on
the Bluetooth
®
phone and Blue
Link
®
phone.
• While on a Bluetooth
®
call, pressing
the key or key will dis-
play a message indicating that you
are currently on a call.
• A message will be displayed if you
receive a Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology call while already
on a Blue Link
®
call. At this time,
press the key on the steering
wheel remote controller to accept the
call. The phone bell will not ring.
i
4-109
Multimedia System
4
Turn by Turn
The Turn by Turn feature can be used
through Blue Link
®
.
1.Direction Indicator Image
2.Remaining distance until next point
3.The Count bar is divided into a
total of 9 levels.
9 Level 0.5mi 8 Level 0.4mi
7 Level 0.3mi 6 Level 0.2mi
5 Level 0.1mi 4 Level 400ft
3 Level 300ft 2 Level 200ft
1 Level 100ft
4.Next Street name
5.Distance to destination
6.Expected Time Arrival
7. Current Street name
❈ For information on specific
Blue Link
®
operations, please refer
to a separate manual.
4-110
Multimedia System
Information
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod
®
mobile digital device
sold separately. The Bluetooth
®
word
mark and logos are registered trade-
marks owned by Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by
Hyundai is under license. SiriusXM
services require a subscription sold
separately, or as a package, by Sirius
XM Radio Inc. If you decide to con-
tinue service after your trial, the sub-
scription plan you choose will auto-
matically renew thereafter and you
will be charged according to your cho-
sen payment method at thencurrent
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel
you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-
2349. See SiriusXM Customer
Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S.
satellite and data services are avail-
able only in the 48 contiguous USA,
DC and PR (with coverage limita-
tions). SiriusXM satellite service is
also available in Canada; see www.sir-
iusxm.ca. All fees and programming
subject to change.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Sirius, XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc. Android™ is a trademark
of Google, Inc. BlackBerry is a regis-
tered trademark of Research In
Motion Limited (RIM). All other
marks, channel names and logos are
the property of their respective own-
ers. All rights reserved.
i
4-111
Multimedia System
4
SSYYSSTTEEMM CCOONNTTRROOLLLLEERRSS AANNDD FFUUNNCCTTIIOONNSS
Audio Head Unit
Name Description
Ejects the disc.
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode is
changed in order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟
XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up screen will
be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned
.
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or keys ~ to
select the desired mode.
61
On
RADIO
Name Description
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode is
changed in order of CD, USB, iPod, AUX, My
Music, BT Audio modes.
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop up screen
will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is
turned .
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or keys ~ to
select the desired mode.
• Operates Phone Screen
• Radio Mode : Automatically searches for
broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes :
- Shortly press the key :Moves to next or previous
song(file)
- Press and hold the key : Rewinds or fast-for
wards the current song(file)
• Power Knob :Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
• Volume Knob : Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
• Radio Mode : Saves frequencies (channels)
or receives saved frequencies (channels)
• CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
2
1
51
On
PWR/
VOL knob
~
(Preset)
61
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
MEDIA
4-112
Multimedia System
Name Description
• Each time the button is shortly pressed, it
sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟ Screen
Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and only the
screen will be turned Off. In the screen Off
state, press any key to turn the screen On
again.
DISP
Name Description
• Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews each broad
cast for 5 seconds each
- Press and hold the key :Previews the broadcasts
saved in Preset ~ for 5 seconds
each.
❈ Press the key again to continue
listening to the current frequency.
•
XM
™
Radio Mode
- Press and hold the key : Previews all
receivable broadcasts for 10 seconds each
• CD, USB, iPod mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each
❈ Press the key again to continue
listening to the current song (file).
• Shortly press the key : Moves to the Display,
Sound, Phone, System setting modes
• Displays menus for the current mode.
• Radio Mode
- XM™ RADIO : Category Search
• MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder Search
❈ May differ depending on the selected audio
• Radio mode : Changes frequency by turning
the knob left/right
• XM™ Radio mode : Changes channel by
turning the knob left/right
• CD, USB, iPod mode: Searches songs (files)
by turning the knob left/right
❈ When the desired song is displayed, press
the knob to play the song.
SCAN
SCAN
61
TUNE
knob
CAT
FOLDER
MENU
SETUP
SCAN
4-113
Multimedia System
4
SSEETTUUPP
Display Settings
Press the key Select
[Display] through TUNE knob or
key
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes
/
selection mode
• During On state, press the
or key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
MEDIA
RADIO
OffOn
1
SETUP
4-114
Multimedia System
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] through TUNE knob or
key
Sound Settings
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Sound Settings] Select
menu through TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [SDVC] Turn SDVC On/Off
by pressing the Tune knob.
Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE
knob
2
SETUP
4-115
Multimedia System
4
System Settings
Press the key Select [System]
through tune knob or key
Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through
TUNE
knob
• Normal(On) : This mode is for
beginner users and provides
detailed instructions during voice
command operation.
• Expert(Off) :This mode is for expert
users and omits some information
during voice command operation.
(When using Expert mode, guid-
ance instructions can be heard
through the [Help] or [Menu] com-
mands.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through TUNE
knob
❈The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈Language support by region
-
4
SETUP
4-116
Multimedia System
RRAADDIIOO :: FFMM,, AAMM
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key : Changes
the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key :
Automatically searches for the next
frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
frequency saved in the correspon-
ding key.
• Pressing and holding the key :
Pressing and holding the desired
key from
~
will save the
currently playing broadcast to the
selected key and sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key : The
broadcast frequency increases
and previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each. After scanning all
frequencies, returns and plays the
current broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key :
Previews the broadcasts saved in
Preset ~ for 5 seconds
each.
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• FM : Changes by 200KHz
• AM : Changes by 9 (Only GUAM),
10KHz
Menu
Press the key Select [
Auto Store] through the TUNE knob
or key
A.Store
Press the key Set [A.Store]
through TUNE knob or key
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to ~ keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
61
1
MENU
1
MENU
61
SCAN
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
4-117
Multimedia System
4
XXMM
TTMM
RRAADDIIOO
Your vehicle is equipped with a 3
month complimentary period of XM
™
Satellite Radio. XM
™
provides
access to over 130 channels of
music, information, and entertain-
ment programming.
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key : select
previous or next channel.
• Pressing and holding the key :con-
tinuously move to previous or next
channel.
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key : Previews
each broadcast for 10 seconds
each
❈ Press the key again to con-
tinue listening to the current fre-
quency
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Category
Press the key Set through
the
TUNE
knob
• The display will indicate the catego-
ry menus, highlight the category
that the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press
the key to navigate cate-
gory list.
• Press the tune knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
category.
❈ If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
4-118
Multimedia System
Preset
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds):Pressing and holding
the desired key from
~
will save the current broadcast to
the selected key and sound a
BEEP.
Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the key
Select [ Info] through the TUNE
knob or key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.
1
MENU
61
61
4-119
Multimedia System
4
BASIC METHOD OF USE : Audio CD / MP3 CD /
USB / iPod
®
/ My Music
Name Description
While song (file) is playing key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode:
• Repeats the current song
MP3 CD, USB mode:
• Repeats songs within the current folder.
(Pressing the key twice).
❈Press the key again to turn off
repeat.
While song (file) is playing key
Audio CD, iPod
®
, My Music mode:
• Plays all songs randomly
MP3 CD, USB mode:
• Folder Random : Plays all files within the
current folder in random order.
• All Random : Plays all files in random
order(Pressing the key twice).
❈ Press the key again to turn off
repeat.
While song (file) is playing key
• Shortly pressing the key : plays the current
song from the beginning / plays the next
song.
• Pressing and holding the key : Rewinds the
song / fast forwards the song.
❈ If the key is pressed again with-
in 1 second, the previous song is played.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
2
RDM
2
RDM
1
RPT
1
RPT
Repeat
Random
Changing
Song/File
4-120
Multimedia System
Name Description
While song (file) is playing key
Scans all songs for 10 seconds starting
from the next song.
❈ Press the key again to turn off.
❈ The SCAN function is not supported
in iPod
®
mode.
While file is playing key
• Searches the previous / next folder
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing the
TUNE knob, the first file within the
selected folder will be played.
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
Scan
Folder
Search :
MP3 CD,
USB Mode
4-121
Multimedia System
4
MENU : Audio CD
In CD mode, press key.
Repeat
Set [ RPT] through the
TUNE
knob or key to repeat the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Set [ RDM] through the
TUNE
knob or key to randomly play
songs within the current folder.
❈Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Set [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob or key to display informa-
tion of the current song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
In MP3 CD / USB mode, press
key.
Repeat
Set [ RPT] through the
TUNE
knob or key to repeat the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Folder Random
Set [ F.RDM] through the
TUNE
knob or key to randomly play
songs within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
2
RDM
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
3
2
RDM
1
RPT
MENU
4-122
Multimedia System
Folder Repeat
Set [ F.RPT] through the
TUNE
knob or key to repeat songs
within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Set [ A.RDM] through the
TUNE
knob or key to randomly play all
songs within the CD.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Set [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob or key to display informa-
tion of the current song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Copy
Set [ Copy] through the
TUNE
knob or key.
❈This is used to copy the current
song into My Music. You can play
the copied Music in My Music
mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod
®
, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copy-
ing is canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
MENU : iPod
®
In iPod mode, press key.
Repeat
Set [ RPT] through the
TUNE
knob or key to repeat the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Set [ RDM] through the TUNE
knob or key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
2
RDM
1
RPT
MENU
6
MENU
5
4
3
4-123
Multimedia System
4
Information
Set [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob or key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Search
Set [ Search] through the
TUNE
knob or key.
Displays iPod
®
category list.
❈ Searching iPod® category is
key pressed, move to par-
ent category.
MENU : My Music Mode
In My Music mode, press
key.
Repeat
Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob
or key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob
or key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing folder in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random
off.
Information
Set [ Info] through the
TUNE
knob
or key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Set [ Delete] through the TUNE
knob or key.
• Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
• Deletes file from list
➀Select the file you wish to delete by
using the TUNE knob.
➁Press the key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
MENU
4
MENU
3
2
RDM
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
4
MENU
3
4-124
Multimedia System
Delete All
Set [ Del.All] through the TUNE
knob or key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.
➁After selecting, press the
key and select the delete menu.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed to the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the key to
change to AUX mode.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
MEDIA
MENU
6
MENU
5
4-125
Multimedia System
4
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology allows
devices to be connected in a short dis-
tance, including hands-free devices,
stereo headsets, wireless remote con-
trollers, etc.For more information, visit
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
website
at www.Bluetooth.com
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned .
❈ Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Streaming :
Press the key Select
[Phone] through the tune knob or
key Select [Audio
Streaming] through the TUNE
knob Set
/
Starting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the key to change
the mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio will
start playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈ The play / pause functions may not
be supported in some mobile
phones.
MEDIA
OffOn
3
SETUP
On
4-126
Multimedia System
Making a call using the Steering wheel remote
controller
The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illus-
tration.
Name
MODE
key
key
VOL-VOL+
Description
• Each time this key is pressed, the mode is changed in
order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3
➟ CD ➟ USB or iPod ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio
• If the media is not connected or a disc is not insert-
ed, corresponding modes will be disabled.
Raises or lowers speaker volume.
Places and transfers calls.
Ends calls or cancels functions.
• Check call history and making call
➀Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the key
on the steering remote controller.
➁The call history list will be displayed on the screen.
➂Press the key again to connect a call to the
selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called number
➀Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the key
on the steering remote controller.
➁The most recently called number is redialed.
4-127
Multimedia System
4
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
PHONE (if equipped)
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone
features
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion(IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the first
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle.If you
do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone connec-
tion, set the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology power to OFF.
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
WARNING
4-128
Multimedia System
Pairing Key / Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1.Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Select [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1)Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2)Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
4.After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
During the pairing process, make sure
that all connection requests on the
phone are accepted for phonebook
download and to allow acceptance of
all future connection requests. Visit
http://www.hyundaiusa.com/Bluetooth
for additional information on pairing
your Bluetooth-enabled mobile
phone, and to view a phone compat-
ibility list.
If
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the fol-
lowing screen. Select [Pair] button
to pair a new device or select
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.
PHONE
NOTICE
PHONE
PHONE
4-129
Multimedia System
4
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
1.The following steps are the same
as those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
Information
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures supported within the vehicle
are as follows. Some features may
not be supported depending on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls
(Continued)
(Continued)
- Operations during a call (Switch to
Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC
on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired to
the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connected
at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree and
Bluetooth audio related features are
supported.
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio fea-
tures, such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone or a
Bluetooth audio device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes discon-
nected due to being out of communi-
cation range, turning the device
OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication error,
corresponding Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices are automatical-
ly searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable due
to communication errors between
the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon reset-
ting Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, the system will be restored.
• After pairing is complete, a contacts
download request is sent once to the
mobile phone. Some mobile phones
may require confirmation upon
receiving a download request,
ensure your mobile phone accepts
the connection. Refer to your
phones user’s manual for additional
information regarding phone pair-
ing and connections.
i
SETUP
4-130
Multimedia System
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect].
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
SETUP
SETUP
4-131
Multimedia System
4
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then select [Change
Priority] button from the Menu. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.
Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a pri-
ority phone.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.
SETUP
NOTICE
4-132
Multimedia System
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.
Information
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
SETUP
i
SETUP
4-133
Multimedia System
4
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section with-
in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
1)Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/disconnects currently
selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
3)Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen
Information -
Before down
loading contacts
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile phone
supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected
phone can be downloaded.
i
SETUP
4-134
Multimedia System
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
Information
• Upon downloading phone contacts,
the previous corresponding data is
deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
going volume level.
Information
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the key.
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
Information
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and select “Yes”.
SETUP
i
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
i
SETUP
i
SETUP
4-135
Multimedia System
4
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
key to display the Phone menu screen.
1)Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access
2)Call History :Displays the call histo-
ry list screen
3)Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4)Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
Information
• If you select the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data stored,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press key on
the steering wheel while the call is
incoming.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
i
PHONE
4-136
Multimedia System
Information
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
Information
• To save Favorite, contacts should be
downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the con-
tact has been updated in the phone.
To update Favorites, delete the
Favorite and create a new Favorite.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is not
possible when there is no call histo-
ry stored or a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
PHONE
i
PHONE
i
4-137
Multimedia System
4
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
NOTE:
Find a contact in an alphabetical
order, press the key.
Information
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have been
downloaded to the car cannot be edit-
ed or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed
separately for each paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device (max 5
devices x 1,000 contacts each).
Previously downloaded data is main-
tained even if the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device has been discon-
nected.
(However, the contacts and call histo-
ry saved to the phone will be deleted
if a paired phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the icon
will be displayed within the status
bar.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• It is not possible to begin download-
ing a contact list when the contact
download feature has been turned off
within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device. In addition, some
devices may require device authori-
zation upon attempting to download
contacts. If downloading does not
normally occur, check the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device settings
or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones. For more information of sup-
ported Bluetooth
®
devices and func-
tion support, refer to your phone’s
user manual.
i
MENU
PHONE
4-138
Multimedia System
VVOOIICCEE RREECCOOGGNNIITTIIOONN
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel. Say a command.
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
Information
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4)Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
“ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep tone will
sound.After the “beep”, say the voice
command.
i
SETUP
4-139
Multimedia System
4
EENNDDIINNGG VVOOIICCEE RREECCOOGGNNIITTIIOONN
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the
steering remote controller
Information
• While using voice command, press-
ing any steering wheel control or a
different key will end voice com-
mand.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold the
key on the steering wheel to end
voice command.
Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
The Hyundai Voice Recognition
System may have difficulty under-
standing some accents or uncom-
mon names.
When using Voice Recognition to
place a call, speak in a moderate
tone, with clear pronunciation To
maximize the use of Voice
Recognition, consider these guide-
lines when storing contacts:
• Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead,
always use full names (including first
and last names) for these contacts
• Do not use special characters
(e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)
• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or
acronyms (i.e., use "County Finance
Department" instead of "C. F. D."; Be
sure to say the name exactly as it is
entered in the contacts list
i
4-140
Multimedia System
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep or say "help" for more
information.
Please say a...
Contacts.
Please say the name of the contact you want
to call.
(BEEP)
Please say a command
after the beep or say "help"
for more information.
Beep Beep.. (end beep)
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)
Beep~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
4-141
Multimedia System
4
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Display the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections.
•
When listening to the radio, displays the
next radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
XM1
➟
XM2
➟
XM3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
(Call by Name)
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
4-142
Multimedia System
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1701 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
SiriusXM
TM
•
When currently listening to the SiriusXM
TM
,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM
TM
screen.
SiriusXM
TM
1~3
Displays the selected XM
™
screen.
SiriusXM
TM
Plays the selected XM
™
channel.
Channel
0~255
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod music.
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Mute Mutes the sound
Command Function
Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.
Mute Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
4-143
Multimedia System
4
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available
during USB and MP3 CD operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available dur-
ing FM, AM radio operation
• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the cur-
rent broadcast and plays for 10 seconds
each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiv-
ing RBDS broadcasts.)
Command Function
Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
4-144
Multimedia System
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technologyaudio streaming from mobile phone oper-
ation Command Operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
•iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
operation
• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in
sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
4-145
Multimedia System
4
SSYYSSTTEEMM CCOONNTTRROOLLLLEERRSS AANNDD FFUUNNCCTTIIOONNSS
Audio Head Unit
Name Description
Ejects the disc.
• Convert to Radio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the mode is
changed in order of FM1, FM2, AM, XM1,
XM2, XM3.
• Convert to Media Mode
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode is
changed in order of CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio.
MEDIA
RADIO
Name Description
(for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology equipped
model)
• Converts to Phone mode
❈ When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
• Power : Press to turn power on/off.
• Volume : Turn left/right to control volume.
• When pressed shortly
- Radio mode : plays previous/next frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music) modes :
changes the track, Song(file)
•When pressed and held
- Radio mode : continuously changes the
frequency. Upon release, plays the current
frequency.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music) modes :
rewinds or fast forwards the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls the call
volume.
• XM™ RADIO : Category Search
• CD/USB/MP3 mode : Search Folder
PWR/
VOL knob
CAT
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
4-146
Multimedia System
No will be shown if the feature is
not supported.
Name Description
• Turns the monitor display on/off.
When the button is pressed, stops sound and
"Audio Mute" is displayed on LCD.
• Radio Mode : previews all receivable broad
casts for 5 seconds each
• XM™ Radio Mode: previews all receivable
broadcasts for 10 seconds each
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes :
previews each song (file) for 10 seconds
each.
Converts to Setup mode.
• Radio mode : turn to change broadcast
frquencies.
• XM™ Radio mode : turn to change broadcast
channels
• Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music) modes :
turn to search tracks/ channels/files.
TUNE
knob
SETUP
SCAN
MUTE
DISP
4-147
Multimedia System
4
Steering-Wheel Mounted Controls
The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illus-
tration.
Name
MODE
,
,
VOL-VOL+
Description
• When pressed shortly
- Starts voice recognition
- When selecting during a voice prompt, stops the
prompt and converts to voice command waiting state
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- Ends voice recognition
• Each time this key is pressed, the mode is changed in
order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3
➟ CD ➟ USB or iPod ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio
• If the media is not connected or a disc is not insert-
ed, corresponding modes will be disabled.
Used to control volume.
Mute the microphone during a call.
• When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode : searches broadcast frequencies and
channels saved to presets.
- Media(CD / USB / iPod
®
/ My Music / BT Audio)
modes : changes the track, file or chapter.
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode, automatically searches broadcast fre-
quencies and channels
- Media(CD / USB / iPod
®
/ My Music) modes,
rewinds or fast forwards the track or song(file)
- BT Audio mode may not be supported in some
mobile phones.
4-148
Multimedia System
Name
Description
• When pressed shortly
- When pressed in the phone screen, displays call
history screen
- When pressed in the dial screen, makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming call screen,
answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting, switches to
waiting call (Call Waiting)
• When pressed and held
(over 0.8 seconds)
- When pressed in the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree wait mode, redials the last
call
- When pressed during a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree call, switches call back to
mobile phone (Private)
- When pressed while calling on the mobile phone,
switches call back to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree (Operates only when
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree is con-
nected)
Ends phone call
4-149
Multimedia System
4
RRAADDIIOO MMOODDEE
BBaassiicc MMooddee SSccrreeeenn
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
3. Preset
Displays current preset number
~ .
4. Preset Display
Displays preset buttons.
5. A.store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
Switching to Radio Mode
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of
FM1➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟XM2➟XM3
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Radio
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
RADIO
SETUP
RADIO
P6
P1
4-150
Multimedia System
Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the key to play the
previous/next frequency.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
• FM : Increases/decreased by
200kHz
• AM : Increased/decreased by 9
(Only GUAM), 10kHz
Using Radio Mode
Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
Press the button to display
the broadcast information for the fre-
quency saved to each button.
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
Information
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the ~ preset but-
tons (over 0.8 seconds) to save the cur-
rent frequency to the selected preset.
Auto Store
Press the button to automati-
cally save receivable frequencies to
Preset buttons.
Information
While Auto Store is operating, press-
ing the [Cancel] button again will can-
cel Auto Store and restore the previ-
ous frequency.
Scan
Press the key to preview fre-
quencies
with superior reception for 5 seconds
each.
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5
seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored.
While Scan is operating, pressing
the key will cancel the scan
operation.
SCAN
SCAN
SCAN
i
A.Store
P6P1
i
P6P1
Preset
SEEK
TRACK
4-151
Multimedia System
4
XXMM
TTMM
RRAADDIIOO MMOODDEE
BBaassiicc MMooddee SSccrreeeenn
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Channel Information
Displays the category, channel num-
ber, channel name, artist and title
information.
3. Preset
Displays currently playing preset
number ~ .
4. Preset Display
Displays saved presets.
Using SEEK
Press the key to play the
previous/next channel.
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SEEK
TRACK
P6P1
4-152
Multimedia System
SCAN
Press the key to scan all
channels with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous-
ly played channel will be restored.
During Scan, pressing the
key again will cancel the scan opera-
tion and restore the previously
played channel.
If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the cur-
rent category.
Searching Categories
Select the category by using the
key and press the
TUNE knob to select.
Channels for the selected category
are played.
Selecting Presets/Saving
Presets
Press the button to display
the broadcast information for the
channel saved to each button.
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
Information
While listening to a channel you want
to save as a preset, press and hold one
of the ~ preset buttons to
save the current channel to the select-
ed preset.
P6P1
i
P6P1
Preset
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
4-153
Multimedia System
4
MMEEDDIIAA MMOODDEE
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of CD
➟
USB(iPod
®
)
➟
AUX
➟
My Music
➟
BT
Audio.
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Media
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
Information
The media mode pop up screen can be
displayed only when there are two or
more media modes turned on.
Title Icon
When a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology, iPod
®
, USB, or AUX
device is connected or a CD is
inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.
Icon Title
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
CD
iPod
®
USB
AUX
i
MEDIA
SETUP
MEDIA
4-154
Multimedia System
AAUUDDIIOO CCDD MMOODDEE
Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
Information
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R,
CDs with labels)
• The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track
information is included within the
audio CD.
Changing Tracks
Press the key to move to
the previous or next track.
Information
• Pressing the key after the
track has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current track from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the track has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous track.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
i
SEEK
TRACK
i
4-155
Multimedia System
4
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track,
press the TUNE knob to start
playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
key to rewind or fast-for-
ward the current track.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
Audio CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current disc.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the button to play tracks
in random(Shuffle) order.
Press the button again to turn
the Random(Shuffle) feature off.
• Random(Shuffle): Plays all tracks
in random(Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current track. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat :Repeats the current track.
List
Press the button to display the
track list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.
List
Repeat
Shuffle
Shuffle
Info
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
4-156
Multimedia System
MMPP33 CCDD MMOODDEE
Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
mode will automatically start and
being playing.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
Information
If there are numerous files and folders
within the disc, reading time could
take more than 10 seconds and the list
may not be displayed or song searches
may not operate. Once loading is com-
plete, try again.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
• Pressing the key after
the file has been playing for 2
seconds will start the current
file from the beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1
seconds will start the previous
file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
i
NOTICE
4-157
Multimedia System
4
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
Searching Folders
Press the key to select and
search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
MP3 CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat, Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
Information
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set
as the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file
information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion are recorded within the MP3
file ID3 tag.
i
Info
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
4-158
Multimedia System
Random(Shuffle)
Press the button to play files
in random(Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
(Shuffle) Folder
➟ Random (Shuffle)
All ➟ Off.
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays all
files within the current folder in
Random (Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All :Plays all files
in Random(Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
➟Repeat Folder➟Off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files
within the current Folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
Information
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes'.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
i
Copy
Repeat
Shuffle
4-159
Multimedia System
4
UUSSBB MMOODDEE
Using USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin
playing a USB file.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
Information
• Loading may require additional time
if there are many files and folders
within the USB and result in faulty
list display or file searching. Normal
operations will resume once loading
is complete.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memo-
ry type besides (Metal Cover Type)
USB Memory.
Changing Files
Press the keys to move to
the previous or next file.
Information
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
i
SEEK
TRACK
i
4-160
Multimedia System
Searching Folders
Press the key to select
and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
USB Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat, Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
Information
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file
information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion are recorded within the MP3
file ID3 tag.
i
Info
CAT
FOLDER
4-161
Multimedia System
4
Random (Shuffle)
Press the button to play files
in random(Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of
Random(Shuffle) Folder
➟Random
(Shuffle) All➟Off.
• Random(Shuffle) Folder : Plays the
files in the current folder in ran-
dom(Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All :Plays all files
in random(Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat➟
Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
Information
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes'.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
i
Copy
Repeat
Shuffle
4-162
Multimedia System
iiPPoodd
®
MMOODDEE
Using iPod
®
Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod
®
Songs
Once an iPod
®
is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod
®
song.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
Information
iPod
®
s with unsupported communica-
tion protocols may not properly oper-
ate in the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the key to move to
the previous or next song.
• Pressing the key after
the song has been playing for 2
seconds will start the current
song from the beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the song has been playing for 1
seconds will start the previous
song.
• Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod
®
product.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Songs
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current
song.
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
Information
There are eight categories that can be
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.
i
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
i
NOTICE
4-163
Multimedia System
4
Category Menu
Within the iPod
®
Category menu,
you will have access to the ,
Home, and features.
1. : Displays the play screen
2. Home : Moves to the iPod
®
root cat-
egory screen
3. : Moves to the previous cate-
gory
Information
• If the search mode is accessed while
playing a song, the most recently
searched category is displayed.
• Search steps upon initial connection
may differ depending on the type of
iPod
®
device.
iPod
®
Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Random(Shuffle),
Repeat and List features.
Random(Shuffle)
Press the button to play
songs in random(Shuffle) order.
• Random(Shuffle) All : Plays all
songs in Random(Shuffle) order.
Shuffle
i
4-164
Multimedia System
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
List
Press the button to display the
Category Menu.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
AAUUXX MMOODDEE
Using AUX Mode
Press the key Select [AUX]
An external device can be connected
to play music.
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders,
car VCR, etc.) can be played through
a dedicated cable.
MEDIA
List
Repeat
4-165
Multimedia System
4
MMYY MMUUSSIICC MMOODDEE
Using My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
Information
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the button will be
disabled.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
Information
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Files
While playing, press and hold the
key to rewind or fast-for-
ward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
i
SEEK
TRACK
My Music
i
4-166
Multimedia System
My Music Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat, Delete and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
Information
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information
is recorded within the MP3 file ID3
tag.
Random
Press the button to play files
in random order. Press the button
again to turn the Random feature off.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
Deleting Files
Press the button to delete the
current file.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
Delete
Repeat
Shuffle
i
Info
4-167
Multimedia System
4
List Menu
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.
Press the button or individ-
ually select the files you want to
delete. Once files are selected, the
button and buttons
will be enabled.
1) :Moves to the previous screen
2) Sellect All: Selects all files
3) Unsellet All: Deselects all selected
files
4) Delete: Deletes selected files
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the button to
delete the selected files.
Information
• If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved.
• Identical files cannot be copied
more than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go to
[System] [Memory
Information]
SETUP
i
Delete
Delete
Unselect All
Select All
4-168
Multimedia System
Information
-
Using the
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
audio mode
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode can be used only when
a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone has been connected.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available
when connecting mobile phones that
do not support this feature.
• While Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio is playing, if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected, then the music
will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio mode may result
in pop noises in some mobile phones.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When returning to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may
not automatically restart in some
mobile phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or mak-
ing an outgoing call while playing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio may result in audio interfer-
ence.
BBlluueettooootthh
®®
WWiirreelleessss
TTeecchhnnoollooggyy AAUUDDIIOO MMOODDEE
((IIff eeqquuiippppeedd))
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio
Once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected, the
mode will automatically start.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
i
4-169
Multimedia System
4
Information
The play/pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device has not been connected, press
the key [Phone] button to
display the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology connection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete fea-
tures from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone.
Information
• If the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio is not operating properly,
check whether the feature is turned
off at [Phone] [Streaming
Audio]. If the feature is off, turn back
on and try again.
• If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play but-
ton once may start playing the mode.
Check to see that music is playing
from the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device after converting
to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode.
Information
- Pairing through
[PHONE] Setup
• The Bluetooth
®
and Voice
Recognition Manual is provided in
two versions due to software version
differences.
• Before reading the manual, check
the following.
• Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
• From your Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
SETUP
i
SETUP
i
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
i
4-170
Multimedia System
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
Pairing Key / Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1.Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2.Press the button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1) Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair
the device
3.From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
OK
PHONE
PHONE
4-171
Multimedia System
4
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
If
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the fol-
lowing screen. Press the [Pair]
button to pair a new device or
press the [Connect] to connect a
previously paired device.
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
(❈ the screen can be different by region.)
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
SETUP
PHONE
NOTICE
4-172
Multimedia System
Information
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures supported within the vehicle
are as follows. Some features may
not be supported depending on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls
- Operations during a call (Switch to
Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC
on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired to
the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connected
at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired while
a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth audio relat-
ed features are supported.
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio fea-
tures, such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone or a
Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes discon-
nected due to being out of communi-
cation range, turning the device
OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication error,
corresponding Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices are automatical-
ly searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable due to
communication errors between the
car Handsfree and the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device, reset the
device by turning off and back on
again. Upon resetting Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device, the sys-
tem will be restored.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• After pairing is complete, a contacts
download request is sent once to the
mobile phone. Some mobile phones
may require confirmation upon
receiving a download request,
ensure your mobile phone accepts
the connection. Refer to your
phones user’s manual for additional
information regarding phone pair-
ing and connections.
i
4-173
Multimedia System
4
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the button.
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
SETUP
Connect
SETUP
4-174
Multimedia System
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then press the
button from the Menu.
The selected device will be changed
to the highest priority.
Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a pri-
ority phone.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the button.
Disconnect
SETUP
NOTICE
Change priority
4-175
Multimedia System
4
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the button.
Information
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the key to display the Phone
menu screen.
(❈ the screen can be different by region.)
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access
2) Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls
3) Call History : Device the call histo-
ry list screen
PHONE
i
Delete
SETUP
4-176
Multimedia System
4) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
5) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings
Information
• If you press the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you press the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data stored,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
3)Delete All : Delete all stored
favorite contacts
Information
• To save Favorite, contacts should be
downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not be
automatically updated if the contact
has been updated in the phone. To
update Favorites, delete the Favorite
and create a new Favorite.
i
PHONE
i
4-177
Multimedia System
4
Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the key Select [Dial
Number]
1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone
number
2)Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number If no
number has been entered, switch
es to call history screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone
number
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
1)Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2)Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3)Accept : Accept the incoming call
4)Reject : Reject the incoming call
Information
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.
i
PHONE
4-178
Multimedia System
During a Handsfree Call
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Call time : Displays the call time
4) End : Ends call
5) Private :Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as
heard by the other party
7) Mute :Turns Mic Mute On/Off
Information
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the button to down-
load the call history.
1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download :Download Recent Call
History
• Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
Download
PHONE
i
4-179
Multimedia System
4
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.Press the but-
ton to download the call history.
1) Contacts List :
- Displays downloaded contacts
entries
- Connects call upon selection
2) Sort by : Find a contact in an
alphabetical order.
3)Download : Download contacts
entries
Information
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed
separately for each paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-
tacts each). Previously downloaded
data is maintained even if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device has been disconnected.
(However, the contacts and call histo-
ry saved to the phone will be deleted
if a paired phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the sta-
tus bar.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• It is not possible to begin download-
ing a contact list when the contact
download feature has been turned
off within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device. In addition,
some devices may require device
authorization upon attempting to
download contacts. If downloading
does not normally occur, check the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device settings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones. For more information of
supported Bluetooth
®
devices and
function support, refer to your
phone’s user manual.
i
Download
PHONE
4-180
Multimedia System
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Setting
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
(❈ the screen can be different by region.)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section with-
in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
1) : Moves to the previous
screen
2)Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
3)Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
SETUP
SETUP
4-181
Multimedia System
4
Information
- Before down-
loading contacts
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile phone
supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected
phone can be downloaded.
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
Information
• Upon downloading phone contacts,
the previous corresponding data is
deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the
key.
SEEK
TRACK
NOTICE
SETUP
i
SETUP
i
4-182
Multimedia System
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
To turn
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and press "Yes".
SETUP
NOTICE
SETUP
4-183
Multimedia System
4
VVOOIICCEE RREECCOOGGNNIITTIIOONN
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel remote controller.Say
a command.
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
For proper recognition, say the
command after the voice instruc-
tion and beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4) Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
“ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep ton will
sound.After the “beep”, say the voice
command.
NOTICE
SETUP
4-184
Multimedia System
❈ Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep or say "help" for more
information.
Please say a command after
the beep or say "help" for more
information.
Please say a...
Contacts
Please say the name of the contacts you want
to call (BEEP)
Ding~
(BEEP)
Ding~
Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
4-185
Multimedia System
4
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Dial Number”, “Call History” or
“Contacts” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Display the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections.
•
When listening to the radio, displays the
next radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
XM1
➟
XM2
➟
XM3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
(Call by Name)
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
4-186
Multimedia System
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1701 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
XM
™
(Satellite)
•
When currently listening to the SiriusXM
TM
,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM
TM
screen.
XM
™
(Satellite) 1~3
Displays the selected SiriusXM
TM
screen.
XM
™
Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM
TM
channel.
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod music.
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
Command Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.
Mute Mutes the sound
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
0~255
4-187
Multimedia System
4
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
• MP3 CD / USB commands:Commands available dur-
ing USB and MP3 CD operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused track.
Pause Pauses the current track.
Shuffle Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play tracks in
sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder
• FM/AM radio commands: available during FM, AM
radio operation
• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the cur-
rent broadcast and plays for 10 seconds
each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiv-
ing RBDS broadcasts.)
Command Function
Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
4-188
Multimedia System
•iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
operation
• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
Shuffle Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play songs in
sequential order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
4-189
Multimedia System
4
Information
SiriusXM™ service requires a sub-
scription, sold separately, after 3-
month trial included with vehicle pur-
chase. If you decide to continue your
SiriusXM™ service at the end of your
trial subscription, the plan you choose
will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call us at
1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See our
Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com. Other
fees and taxes apply. All fees and pro-
gramming are subject to change.
Sirius satellite service is available only
to those at least 18 and older in the 48
contiguous USA, D.C., and PR (with
coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout
our satellite service area and in AK
and HI. Certain channels are not
available on our Internet radio service
or on mobile devices. SiriusXM™
Traffic available in select markets. See
siriusxm.com/traffic for more infor-
mation. © 2013 Sirius XM™ Radio
Inc. Sirius, XM™ and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of
Sirius XM™ Radio Inc.
(Continued)
(Continued)
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
iPod
®
mobile digital device sold sepa-
rately. The Bluetooth
®
word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Hyundai is
under license. A Bluetooth
®
enabled
cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology. All
rights reserved.
i
4-190
Multimedia System
SSEETTUUPP
Starting Mode
Press the key to display the
Setup screen.
You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound], [Phone]
and [System].
Display Settings
Adjusting the Brightness
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Brightness]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
screen brightness or set the
Brightness on Automatic, Day, or
Night mode.
Press the button to reset.
1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically
2) Day : Always maintains the bright-
ness on high
3)Night : Always maintains the
brightness on low
Mode Pop up
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Mode Pop up]
This feature is used to display the
Pop-up Mode screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the or key
will display the Pop-up Mode screen.
Information
The media Pop-up Mode screen can
be displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.
i
MEDIA RADIO
SETUP
Default
SETUP
SETUP
4-191
Multimedia System
4
MP3 Information Display
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Media Display]
This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
1) Folder/File : Displays file name
and folder name
2)Album/Artist/Song : Displays
album name/artist name/song
Sound Settings
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]
Use the , , , buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the button to reset.
Default
SETUP
SETUP
4-192
Multimedia System
Variable EQ
This is a premium sound system fea-
ture in which the acoustical mode
can be selected according to musical
preferences.
Select [Variable EQ] Set menu
through TUNE knob
• Innocente(Normal) : Natural
sound, sound optimized for driver.
• Forza(Dynamic) : Powerful sound
emphasizing bass, stereo sound.
• Concerto(Concert) : Sound similar
to a concert or live hall
❈ May differ depending on the
selected audio.
SDVC (Speed Dependent
Volume Control)
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]
The volume level is controlled auto-
matically according to the vehicle
speed.SDVC can be set by selecting
from On / Off.
Voice Recognition Volume
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.]
Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the
Voice Recognition volume.
Touch Screen Beep
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Touch Screen Beep]
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
Blue Link Voice Volume
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Blue Link Voice Vol.]
Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the
Blue Link Voice Volume.
❈ Blue Link
®
may differ depending
on the selected audio.
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
4-193
Multimedia System
4
System Setting
Memory Information
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Memory Information]
This feature displays information
related to system memory.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity
Prompt Feedback
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Prompt Feedback]
This feature is used to select the
desired prompt feedback option from
ON and OFF.
1) ON : When using voice recogni-
tion, provides detailed guidance
prompts
2) OFF : When using voice recogni-
tion, omits some guidance
prompts
Language
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Language]
❈This feature is used to change the
system and voice recognition lan-
guage.
❈if the language is changed, the
system will restart and apply the
selected language.
SETUP SETUP
SETUP
4-194
Multimedia System
RREEAARR VVIIEEWW CCAAMMEERRAA
((iiff eeqquuiippppeedd))
• The system has been equipped
with a rear view camera for user
safety by allowing a wider rear
range of vision.
• The rear view camera will automat-
ically operate when the ignition key
is turned ON and the shift lever is
set to R (Reverse).
• The rear view camera will automat-
ically stop operating when shift
lever is set to different position.
BBLLUUEE LLIINNKK
®®
((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Hyundai aims to offer differentiated
customer values through a
‘Connected Car Life,’ which is to pro-
vide consumers with fast and reliable
IT technology.As consumers’lifestyles
become more and more mobile in
thanks to remarkable advances in
smart phones, tablet PCs and overall
wireless telecommunication, new
lifestyle patterns demand seamless
connection between one’s office,
home, outdoors and automobiles.
Automobile companies are now faced
with the task of shifting their paradigm
from vehicle-centered services to cus-
tomer value-centered services, with
the ultimate goal of securing global
leadership in the field of vehicle IT and
telematics.
Hyundai Motor plans to achieve this
by realizing a terminal platform flexi-
ble to changes in IT technology,
cooperating with global IT compa-
nies, creating an eco-system and
providing the latest contents & servic-
es based on an open environment.
The rear view camera has been
equipped with an optical lens to
provide a wider range of vision
and may appear different from
the actual distance. For safety,
directly check the rear and
left/right sides.
CAUTION
4-195
Multimedia System
4
Using the Room Mirror Key
Selecting the room mirror key will
allow you to make service required
inquiries, POI info searches, and
emergency rescues by connecting to
the Blue Link
®
Center.
Such features can be used only after
subscribing to the Blue Link
®
service.
➀ (Blue Link
®
Center)
Makes requests for Blue Link
®
serv-
ice related inquiries and consulta-
tions.
A call is connected to the Blue Link
®
service center employee.
Re-pressing the key will end the call.
This feature does not operate when
you are on a Bluetooth
®
phone call.
➁ (Blue Link
®
for POI)
• Blue Link
®
for Voice command
Starts Blue Link
®
voice command.
Voice receiving voice guidance,
shortly press the button to convert to
voice command mode. Press and
hold the button to end voice com-
mand.
• TBT VR Commands
1. Navigate to
"Navigate to" voice command is used
to request the download of route
data for a new destination, saved
destinations, daily routes and previ-
ous destinations.
2. Save Destination
"Save Destination" VR command is
used to assign a voice tag to the last
downloaded destination and store it
in a destination directory.
Information
The Turn by Turn (TBT) feature sup-
ports the store of ten (10) destinations
in the TBT destinations directory.
3. Route Preview
"Route Preview" VR command
allows the user to preview the route
instructions (upcoming maneuver
instructions) at any time during the
route guidance.
4. Destinations List
"Destinations List" VR command
allows the user to preview and delete
the stored destinations with their
associated voice tags in the Turn by
Turn destinations directory.
5.Voice Guidance
"Voice Guidance" VR command
allows the user to mute/unmute the
Turn by Turn (TBT) direction
announcements.
i
4-196
Multimedia System
6. Suspend Route
"Suspend Route" VR command
allows the user to suspend and
pause Turn by Turn(TBT) route guid-
ance while in the guidance mode.
7. Resume Route
"Resume Route" VR command
allows the user to resume Turn by
Turn(TBT) route guidance.
➂ (Blue Link
®
for SOS)
In the case of an emergency,
requests for help to the Blue Link
®
center.
Call is connected to the Blue Link
®
emergency rescue center. Re-press-
ing the key will end the call.
If already on a Bluetooth
®
phone call,
the call will end to connect you to the
Blue Link
®
Emergency Rescue
Center.
Information
• You cannot talk simultaneously on
the Bluetooth
®
phone and Blue
Link
®
phone.
• While on a Bluetooth
®
call, pressing
the key or key will dis-
play a message indicating that you
are currently on a call.
• A message will be displayed if you
receive a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology call while already on a
Blue Link
®
call. At this time, press the
Eco Coach
• What is Eco Coach?
Every 2.5 minutes, Eco Coach com-
pares your fuel economy against the
government tested average (EPA) or
other similar Hyundai models (com-
munity), based on your preference.
Each month, or after every tank fill
up, Eco Coach rates your extended
average and gives you a reward star
if you best the average.
See your My Hyundai web page for
more information.
i
4-197
Multimedia System
4
• What does the bar graph and hori-
zontal line mean?
The horizontal line is adjusted once
per month or at each tank full, based
on your preference; it represents the
EPA combined average or communi-
ty average fuel economy target.
• What is My Eco MPG?
Your actual fuel economy average
over 2.5 minutes.
This value is also shown in bar graph
as your “now” rating.
• What are Eco Rewards?
If you beat the average (the EPA or
community), you will receive an Eco
Reward point.
See your my Hyundai web page for
more information.
[Eco Driving] will not operate if the
vehicle ignition is not turned on.
Please operate with the ignition
turned on.
Turn by Turn
The Turn by Turn feature can be used
through Blue Link
®
.
1.Direction Indicator Image
2.Remaining distance until next point
3.The Count bar is divided into a
total of 9 levels.
9 Level 0.5mi 8 Level 0.4mi
7 Level 0.3mi 6 Level 0.2mi
5 Level 0.1mi 4 Level 400ft
3 Level 300ft 2 Level 200ft
1 Level 100ft
4.Next Street name
5.Distance to destination
6.Expected Time Arrival
7. Current Street name
❈ For information on specific
Blue Link
®
operations, please refer
to a separate manual.
4-198
FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi-
dential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions,may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tel-
evision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-
rect the interference by one ormore of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void your authori-
ty to operate this equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operatedwith minmum 20cm between the and your body.This transmitter must
not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by the
FCC.
DDEECCLLAARRAATTIIOONN OOFF CCOONNFFOORRMMIITTYY
Multimedia System
Driving your vehicle
Before driving.........................................................5-4
Before entering the vehicle ...........................................5-4
Before starting...................................................................5-4
Engine start/stop button ......................................5-5
Illuminated Engine Start/Stop button ..........................5-6
Engine Stop/Start button positions..............................5-7
Starting the hybrid system .............................................5-9
Automatic transmission.......................................5-12
Automatic transmission operation ..............................5-12
Parking...............................................................................5-17
Good driving practices...................................................5-17
Braking system.....................................................5-19
Power brakes ...................................................................5-19
Disc brakes wear indicator...........................................5-20
Foot parking brake .........................................................5-20
Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)...................................5-22
AUTO HOLD ......................................................................5-28
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-32
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-34
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-38
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-39
Good braking practices..................................................5-40
Drive mode integrated control system .............5-41
Hybrid vehicle ..................................................................5-41
Plug-in hybrid vehicle....................................................5-43
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system........5-45
FCW operation .................................................................5-45
Limitations of the system .............................................5-47
Blind Spot Detection system (BSD) ..................5-48
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist).............................................5-49
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..................................5-52
Limitations of the system .............................................5-55
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)........5-56
LDWS operation...............................................................5-57
Warning light and message ..........................................5-58
Limitations of the system .............................................5-58
Cruise Control.......................................................5-60
Cruise Control Operation...............................................5-60
Smart cruise control system ..............................5-65
To adjust the sensitivity of Smart Cruise Control ..5-66
To convert to Cruise Control Mode............................5-67
Smart Cruise Control speed..........................................5-67
Smart Cruise Control vehicle-to-vehicle distance..5-72
SCC front radar sensor..................................................5-74
Limitations of the system .............................................5-76
5
5
Special driving conditions...................................5-81
Hazardous driving conditions.......................................5-81
Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-81
Smooth cornering ...........................................................5-82
Driving at night................................................................5-82
Driving in the rain ...........................................................5-83
Driving in flooded areas................................................5-83
Highway driving...............................................................5-84
Winter driving.......................................................5-85
Snow or icy conditions ..................................................5-85
Winter Precautions.........................................................5-87
Vehicle load limit..................................................5-90
Tire loading information label......................................5-91
Trailer towing .......................................................5-95
5-3
Driving your vehicle
5
Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.
Do not inhale engine exhaust.
If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.Exposure to CO can cause
unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If
you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the
vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only
long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.
Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle , be sure to do so only in an
open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
Keep the air intakes clear.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield
clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.
If you must drive with the trunk open:
Close all windows.
Open instrument panel air vents.
Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.
WARNING
5-4
Driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle
• Be sure all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean
and unobstructed.
• Remove frost, snow, or ice.
• Visually check the tires for uneven
wear and damage.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Before starting
• Make sure the hood, the trunk, and
the doors are securely closed and
locked.
• Adjust the position of the seat and
steering wheel.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Verify all the lights work.
• Fasten your seatbelt.Check that all
passengers have fastened their
seatbelts.
• Check the gauges and indicators in
the instrument panel and the mes-
sages on the instrument display
when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check that any items you are car-
rying are stored properly or fas-
tened down securely.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
including components found in
the interior furnishings in a
vehicle, contain or emit harmful
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects and reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and cer-
tain products of components
contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive
harm.
WARNING
BBEEFFOORREE DDRRIIVVIINNGG
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-
lowing precautions:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
All passengers must be prop-
erly belted whenever the vehi-
cle is moving. For more infor-
mation, refer to "Seat Belts" in
chapter 2.
• Always drive defensively.
Assume other drivers or pedes-
trians may be careless and
make mistakes.
• Stay focused on the task of
driving. Driver distraction can
cause accidents.
• Leave plenty of space between
you and the vehicle in front of
you.
WARNING
5-5
Driving your vehicle
5
NEVER drink or take drugs and
drive.
Drinking or taking drugs and
driving is dangerous and may
result in an accident and SERI-
OUS INJURY or DEATH.
Drunk driving is the number
one contributor to the highway
death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, percep-
tions and judgment. Just one
drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions
and emergencies and your reac-
tion time gets worse with each
additional drink.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
or more dangerous than driving
under the influence of alcohol.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
You are much more likely to have
a serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive. If you are
drinking or taking drugs, don’t
drive. Do not ride with a driver
who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated
driver or call a taxi.
EENNGGIINNEE SSTTAARRTT//SSTTOOPP BBUUTT--
TTOONN
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-
lowing precautions:
• NEVER allow children or any
person who is unfamiliar with
the vehicle to touch the
Engine Start/Stop button or
related parts. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
can occur.
• NEVER reach through the
steering wheel for the Engine
Start/Stop button, or any other
control, while the vehicle is in
motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area may
cause a loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
WARNING
5-6
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated Engine Start/Stop
button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the Engine Start/Stop button will illu-
minate and will go off 30 seconds
after the door is closed.
OLFP055007K
To turn the hybrid system off in
an emergency:
Press and hold the Engine
Start/Stop button for more than
two seconds OR rapidly press
and release the Engine Start/
Stop button three times (within
three seconds).
If the vehicle is still moving, you
can restart the hybrid system
without depressing the brake
pedal by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.
WARNING
• NEVER press the Engine
Start/Stop button while the
vehicle is in motion except in
an emergency. This will result
in the hybrid system turning
off and loss of power assist
for the steering and brake
systems. This may lead to
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, set the parking brake,
press the Engine Start/Stop
button to the OFF position,and
take the Smart Key with you.
Unexpected vehicle movement
may occur if these precautions
are not followed.
WARNING
5-7
Driving your vehicle
5
Engine Stop/Start button positions
Button Position Action Notice
OFF
To turn off the hybrid system, press the
Engine Start/Stop button with shift lever in P
(Park).
When you press the Engine Start/Stop button
without the shift lever in P (Park), the Engine
Start/Stop button does not turn to the OFF
position, but turns to the ACC position.
ACC
Press the Engine Start/Stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the brake pedal.
Electrical accessories are usable.
If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ACC position for more than one hour, the
battery power will turn off automatically to
prevent the battery from discharging.
5-8
Driving your vehicle
Button Position Action Notice
ON
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it
is in the ACC position without depressing
the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked before
the hybrid system is started.
Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ON position when the hybrid system is
not running to prevent the battery from dis-
charging.
START
To start the hybrid system, depress the
brake pedal and press the Engine
Start/Stop button with the shift lever in the P
(Park) position.
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button
without depressing the brake pedal, the
hybrid system does not start and the Engine
Start/Stop button changes as follows:
OFF
→→
ACC
→→
ON
→→
OFF or ACC
5-9
Driving your vehicle
5
Starting the hybrid system
Information
• The hybrid system will start by
pressing the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton, only when the smart key is in
the vehicle.
• Even when the smart key is in the
vehicle, and when it is far away
from the driver, the hybrid system
may not start.
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ACC or ON position, if any
door is open, the system checks for
the smart key. If the smart key is not
in the vehicle, the " " indicator
will blink and the warning "Key not
in vehicle" will come on. If all doors
are closed, the chime will also sound
for about 5 seconds. Keep the smart
key in the vehicle when in the ACC
position or if the hybrid system is
ON.
1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5 Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton.If the hybrid system starts, the
" " indicator will come on.
i
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as high
heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-
flops, etc., may interfere with
your ability to use the brake
and accelerator pedals.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle can move and lead
to an accident.
WARNING
5-10
Driving your vehicle
Information
• Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains station-
ary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
• Always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while start-
ing the vehicle. Do not race the
engine while warming it up.
• If ambient temperature is low, the
" " indicator may remain illumi-
nated longer than the normal amount
of time.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• If the " " indicator turns off
while you are in motion, do not
attempt to move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position.
If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving
and press the Engine Start/Stop
button in an attempt to restart
the hybrid system.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the hybrid system.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
Do not press the Engine Start/Stop
button for more than 10 seconds
except when the stop lamp fuse is
blown.
When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you cannot normally start the
hybrid system. Replace the fuse
with a new one. If you are not able
to replace the fuse, you can start
the hybrid system by pressing
and holding the Engine Start/Stop
button for 10 seconds with the
Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC position.
For your safety always depress
the brake pedal before starting the
hybrid system.
NOTICENOTICE
i
5-11
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
If the smart key battery is weak or the
smart key does not work correctly,
you can start the hybrid system by
pressing the Engine Start/Stop button
with the smart key in the direction of
the picture above.
i
OLFP055009K
5-12
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transmission opera-
tion
The automatic transmission has six
forward speeds and one reverse
speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically in the D (Drive) posi-
tion.
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN
The shift lever can freely operate.
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
Press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
Sports mode
++
++
((
((
UU
UU
PP
PP
))
))
--
--
((
((
DD
DD
OO
OO
WW
WW
NN
NN
))
))
OLF054012
5-13
Driving your vehicle
5
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the Engine Start/Stop button is
in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above
and still cannot shift the lever out of
P (Park), see "Shift-Lock Release"
in this chapter.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the hybrid system off.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surround-
ing areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the Engine
Start/Stop button in the OFF
position. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed.
• Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slip-
pery roads. The vehicle may
slip causing an accident.
• When using Manual Shift
Mode: Do not shift from a high
gear to lower gear rapidly on
slippery roads. The vehicle
may slip causing an accident.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
hybrid system off.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake.
WARNING
5-14
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position.
The transmission will automatically
shift through a 6-gear sequence, pro-
viding the best fuel economy and
power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or driving uphill, depress
the accelerator fully. The transmis-
sion will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear (or gears, as
appropriate).
The DRIVE MODE switch, located on
the shift lever console, allows the driv-
er to switch from NORMAL mode to
SPORT or ECO mode.
For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" later in this chapter.
NOTICE
5-15
Driving your vehicle
5
Manual shift mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual shift mode is
selected by pushing the shift lever
from the D (Drive) position into the
manual gate. To return to D (Drive)
range operation, push the shift lever
back into the main gate.
In Manual Shift Mode, moving the
shift lever backwards and forwards
will allow you to select the desired
range of gears for the current driving
conditions.
+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
Information
• Only the six forward gears can be
selected. To reverse or park the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1st gear is auto-
matically selected.
• In sports mode, the driver must exe-
cute upshifts in accordance with
road conditions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is
operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+ (Up) position. This causes the
transmission to shift into the 2nd
gear which is better for smooth driv-
ing on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the - (Down) side to shift
back to the 1st gear.
• When accelerating from a stop on a
slippery road, push the shift lever
forward into the + (Up) position.
This causes the transmission to shift
into the 2nd gear which is better for
smooth driving on a slippery road.
Push the shift lever to the - (Down)
side to shift back to the 1st gear.
i
OLF054013
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
5-16
Driving your vehicle
Shift-lock system
For your safety, the automatic trans-
mission has a shift-lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the hybrid system or place
the Engine Start/Stop button in the
ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
Shift-lock release
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depress-
ing the brake, and then do the follow-
ing:
1. Place the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton in the OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-
ering the shift-lock access hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-
driver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.
5. Move the shift lever while holding
down the screwdriver.
6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock
override access hole then install
the cap.
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, have the system inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
immediately.
OLF054015N
5-17
Driving your vehicle
5
Parking
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton in the OFF position.Take the Key
with you when exiting the vehicle.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N
(Neutral) when driving. Doing so
may result in an accident because
of a loss of engine braking and the
transmission could be damaged.
• Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
consistent pedal pressure can
result in the brakes overheating,
brake wear and possibly even
brake failure.
• Always apply the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle. Do not
depend on placing the transmis-
sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears.On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator.
When you stay in the vehicle
with the engine running, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. The engine or exhaust
system may overheat and start
a fire.
The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
Do not stop or park over flam-
mable materials, such as dry
grass, paper or leaves. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
WARNING
5-18
Driving your vehicle
Information
- Kickdown
Mechanism
Use the kickdown mechanism for
maximum acceleration. Depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure
point. The automatic transmission will
shift to a lower gear depending on the
engine speed.
i
(Continued)
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belt-
ed occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-19
Driving your vehicle
5
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
If the hybrid system is not on or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
You can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than typical. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be longer than
with power brakes.
When the hybrid system is not on,
the reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
Do not depress the brake pedal
continuously without the " "
indicator ON. The battery may be
discharged.
NOTICE
BBRRAAKKIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM
Take the following precautions:
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, exces-
sive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending down a
long or steep hill, move the
gear shift lever to Manual
Shift Mode and manually
downshift to a lower gear in
order to control your speed
without using the brake pedal
excessively. Applying the
brakes continuously will
cause the brakes to overheat
and could result in a tempo-
rary loss of braking perform-
ance.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle’s ability to safely slow
down; the vehicle may also
pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Applying
the brakes lightly will indicate
whether they have been
affected in this way. Always
test your brakes in this fash-
ion after driving through deep
water.To dry the brakes, light-
ly tap the brake pedal to heat
up the brakes while maintain-
ing a safe forward speed until
brake performance returns to
normal. Avoid driving at high
speeds until the brakes func-
tion correctly.
WARNING
5-20
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn out
and new pads are required, you will
hear a high pitched warning sound
from your front or rear brakes. You
may hear this sound come and go or
it may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Note that some driving conditions or
climates may cause a brake squeal
when you first apply (or lightly apply)
the brakes. This is normal and does
not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
Information
Always replace brake pads as com-
plete front or rear axle sets.
Foot parking brake
(if equipped)
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then
depress the parking brake pedal
down as far as possible.
Releasing the parking brake
To release:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Depress the parking brake pedal
down and it will release automatical-
ly.
If the parking brake does not release
or does not release all the way, have
the system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
i
NOTICE
ODH053142
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, do not oper-
ate the parking brake while the
vehicle is moving except in an
emergency situation. It could
damage the brake system and
lead to an accident.
WARNING
ODH053143
5-21
Driving your vehicle
5
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal while the parking brake is
engaged. If you depress the
accelerator pedal with the park-
ing brake engaged, warning will
sound. Damage to the parking
brake may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake
on can overheat the braking sys-
tem and cause premature wear
or damage to brake parts. Make
sure the parking brake is
released and the Brake Warning
Light is off before driving.
Check the Parking
Brake Warning Light
by placing the Engine
Start/Stop button to
the ON position (do
not start the hybrid
system).
This light will be illuminated when the
parking brake is applied with the
Engine Start/Stop button in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is released and the Brake
Warning Light is OFF.
If the Parking Brake Warning Light
remains on after the parking brake is
released while hybrid system is ON,
there may be a malfunction in the
brake system. Immediate attention is
necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately.If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location.
NOTICE
• Whenever leaving the vehicle
or parking, always come to a
complete stop and continue
to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P
(Park) position, then apply the
parking brake, and place the
Engine Start/Stop button in
the OFF position.
Vehicles with the parking
brake not fully engaged are at
risk for moving inadvertently
and causing injury to yourself
or others.
• NEVER allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• Only release the parking
brake when you are seated
inside the vehicle with your
foot firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING
(red color)
5-22
Driving your vehicle
Electronic Parking Brake
(EPB) (if equipped)
Applying the parking brake
To apply the EPB:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Pull upwards on the EPB switch.
Make sure the Parking Brake Warning
Light ( , red color) comes on.
Also, the EPB is applied automatical-
ly if the [AUTO HOLD] switch is on
when the engine is turned off.
However, to prevent the EPB from
being automatically applied, turn off
the AUTO HOLD before turning off
the vehicle.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the EPB
With the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ON position.
1. Depress the brake pedal and hold.
2. Press the EPB switch downwards.
Make sure the Parking Brake Warning
Light ( , red color) goes off.
OLF054016N
OLF054017N
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, do not oper-
ate the EPB while the vehicle is
moving except in an emergency
situation. It could damage the
brake system and lead to an
accident.
WARNING
5-23
Driving your vehicle
5
To release EPB automatically:
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of P
(Park) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of N
(Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D
(Drive).
Make sure the Parking Brake Warning
light ( , red color) goes off.
Information
• For your safety, you can engage the
EPB even though the Engine
Stop/Start button is in the OFF posi-
tion, but you cannot release it.
• For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking brake
manually with the EPB switch when
you drive downhill or when backing
up the vehicle.
• If the parking brake warning light
( , red color) is still on even
though the EPB has been
released,have the system checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
the EPB applied. It may cause
excessive brake pad and brake
rotor wear.
When the EPB does not release:
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer by loading the vehicle on a
flatbed tow truck and have the sys-
tem checked.
EPB may be automatically applied
when:
• The EPB is overheated
• It is requested by other systems
• The hybrid system is turned off
with the EPB applied
Information
If the driver turns the hybrid system
off while Auto Hold is operating, EPB
will be automatically applied.
However, to prevent the EPB from
being automatically applied, turn off
the AUTO HOLD before turning off
the vehicle.
i
NOTICE
i
5-24
Driving your vehicle
Warning messages
Release parking brake
If the mentioned situation occurs,
depress the brake pedal and release
EPB by pressing the EPB switch.
• When you try to drive with the EPB
applied, a warning will sound and a
message will appear.
• When the driver's seat belt is
unfastened or the driver’s door is
open, when the engine hood is
open with the shift lever in D
(Drive), or when the trunk is open
with the shift lever in R (Reverse),
a warning message will be dis-
played with a warning sound.
• When there is a problem with the
vehicle, a warning may sound and
a message may appear.
OLFH054232L
• Whenever leaving the vehicle
or parking, always come to a
complete stop and continue
to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P
(Park) position, pull up the
EPB switch, and press the
Engine Start/Stop button to
the OFF position. Take the
Smart Key with you when exit-
ing the vehicle.
Vehicles not fully engaged in
P (Park) with the parking
brake set are at risk for mov-
ing inadvertently and causing
injury to yourself or others.
• NEVER allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the EPB switch. If the
EPB is released unintentional-
ly, serious injury may occur.
• Only release the EPB when
you are seated inside the
vehicle with your foot firmly
on the brake pedal.
WARNING
5-25
Driving your vehicle
5
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal while the parking brake is
engaged. If you depress the
accelerator pedal with the EPB
engaged, a warning will sound.
• Driving with the parking brake
on can overheat the braking sys-
tem and cause premature wear
or damage to brake parts. Make
sure the EPB is released and the
parking brake warning light
( ,red color) is off before driv-
ing.
Information
• A clicking sound may be heard
while operating or releasing the
EPB. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the EPB is func-
tioning properly.
• When leaving your keys with a park-
ing attendant or assistant, make sure
to inform him/her how to operate
the EPB.
AUTO HOLD deactivating.
Press brake pedal
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
i
NOTICE
OLFH044408L
5-26
Driving your vehicle
Parking brake automatically locked
If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold
is activated, a warning will sound and
a message will appear.
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates if the
Engine Start/Stop button is changed
to the ON position and goes off in
approximately 3 seconds if the sys-
tem is operating normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator
remains on, comes on while driving,
or does not come on when the
Engine Start/Stop button is changed
to the ON position, this indicates that
the EPB may have malfunctioned.
If this occurs, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
The EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator
comes on to indicate that the ESC is
not working properly, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the EPB.
OLF054022
OLF044411N
5-27
Driving your vehicle
5
• If the EPB warning light is still
on, we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the parking brake warning
light ( , red color) does not
illuminate or blinks even though
the EPB switch was pulled up,
the EPB may not be applied.
• If the parking brake warning
light ( , red color) blinks when
the EPB warning light is on,
press the switch, and then pull it
up. Repeat this one more time. If
the EPB warning does not go
off, have the system checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake
pedal while driving, emergency brak-
ing is possible by pulling up and
holding the EPB switch. Braking is
possible only while you are holding
the EPB switch.
Information
During emergency braking the park-
ing brake warning light ( , red
color) will illuminate to indicate the
system is operating.
If there is a noise or burning smell
after using the emergency brake,
have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
When the EPB does not release
If the EPB does not release normal-
ly, contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer by loading the vehicle on a
flatbed tow truck and have the sys-
tem checked.
NOTICE
i
NOTICE
Do not operate the parking
brake while the vehicle is mov-
ing except in an emergency sit-
uation. It could damage the
brake system and lead to a
severe accident.
WARNING
5-28
Driving your vehicle
AUTO HOLD (if equipped)
This feature helps keep the brake
applied when the shift lever is in D
(Drive), R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or
Sports Mode with the feature
enabled and when the brake pedal
has been depressed to stop the vehi-
cle.
To apply :
1. With the driver's door, engine
hood and trunk closed, fasten the
driver's seat belt or depress the
brake pedal and then press the
[AUTO HOLD] switch. The white
"AUTO HOLD" indicator will come
on and the system will be in the
standby position.
2. When you stop the vehicle com-
pletely by depressing the brake
pedal, the "AUTO HOLD" indicator
changes from white to green.
3. The vehicle will remain stationary
even if you release the brake
pedal.
4. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
OLF054018N
WW
WW
hh
hh
ii
ii
tt
tt
ee
ee
OLF054019
WW
WW
hh
hh
ii
ii
tt
tt
ee
ee
GG
GG
rr
rr
ee
ee
ee
ee
nn
nn
5-29
Driving your vehicle
5
To prevent, unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement,
ALWAYS press your foot on the
brake pedal to cancel the Auto
Hold before you:
- Drive downhill.
- Drive the vehicle in R (Reverse).
- Park the vehicle.
WARNING
To release :
If you press the accelerator pedal
with the shift lever in R (Reverse), D
(Drive) or Sports Mode, the Auto
Hold will be released automatically
and the vehicle will start to move.
The indicator changes from green to
white.
To cancel :
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the [AUTO HOLD] switch.
The "AUTO HOLD" indicator will turn
off.
When the AUTO HOLD is auto-
matically released by depress-
ing the accelerator pedal, always
take a look around your vehicle.
Slowly depress the accelerator
pedal for a smooth start.
WARNING
OLF054020N
LL
LL
ii
ii
gg
gg
hh
hh
tt
tt
oo
oo
ff
ff
ff
ff
5-30
Driving your vehicle
Information
• The Auto Hold does not operate
when:
- The driver's seat belt is unfastened
and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The trunk is opened
- The shift lever is in P (Park)
- The EPB is applied
• For your safety, the Auto Hold auto-
matically switches to EPB when:
- The driver's seat belt is unfastened
and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened with the
shift lever is in D (Drive)
- The trunk is opened with the shift
lever is in R (Reverse)
- The vehicle stops for more than 10
minutes
- The vehicle stands on a steep slope
- The vehicle moves several times
(Continued)
(Continued)
In these cases, the parking brake
warning light ( , red color) illu-
minates, the “AUTO HOLD” indi-
cator color changes from green to
white, and a message will be dis-
played with warning sound to
inform you that EPB is automatical-
ly applied.
• If the "AUTO HOLD" indicator
changes to yellow, the Auto Hold is
not working properly. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• While operating Auto Hold, you may
hear mechanical noise. However, it is
normal operating noise.
If there is a malfunction with the
driver's door, engine hood or
trunk open detection system, the
Auto Hold may not work properly.
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
NOTICE
i
• Press the accelerator pedal
slowly when you start the
vehicle.
• For your safety, cancel the
Auto Hold when you drive
downhill, back up the vehicle
or park the vehicle.
WARNING
5-31
Driving your vehicle
5
Warning messages
Parking brake automatically locked
When the EPB is applied from Auto
Hold, a warning will sound and a
message will appear.
AUTO HOLD deactivating.
Press brake pedal
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
When this message is displayed,
the Auto Hold and EPB may not
operate. For your safety, depress
the brake pedal.
Press brake pedal to deactivate
AUTO HOLD
If you did not apply the brake pedal
when you release the Auto Hold by
pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch, a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
NOTICE
OLF044411N
OLFH044408L OLFH044407L
5-32
Driving your vehicle
AUTO HOLD conditions not met.
Close door, hood, trunk, and fasten
seatbelt
When you press the [AUTO HOLD]
switch, if the driver’s door, engine
hood and trunk are not closed or the
driver’s seat belt is unfastened, a
warning will sound and a message
will appear on the LCD display.Press
the [AUTO HOLD] button again after
closing the driver’s door, engine
hood and trunk and fastening the
seat belt.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS is an electronic braking system
that helps prevent a braking skid.
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time.
An Anti-Lock Braking System
(ABS) or an Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system will not
prevent accidents due to
improper or dangerous driving
maneuvers. Even though vehi-
cle control is improved during
emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance
between you and objects ahead
of you. Vehicle speeds should
always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The
braking distance for cars
equipped with ABS or ESC may
be longer than for those without
these systems in the following
road conditions.
• Drive your vehicle at reduced
speeds during the following
conditions:
• Rough, gravel or snow-cov-
ered roads.
(Continued)
WARNING
OLFP045577N
(Continued)
• On roads where the road sur-
face is pitted or has different
surface height.
• Tire chains are installed on
your vehicle.
The safety features of an ABS
or ESC equipped vehicle should
not be tested by high speed
driving or cornering.This could
endanger the safety of yourself
or others.
5-33
Driving your vehicle
5
Using ABS
To obtain the maximum benefit from
your ABS in an emergency situation,
do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Depress your
brake pedal as hard as possible.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and it means your ABS is
active.
ABS does not reduce the time or dis-
tance it takes to stop the vehicle.
Always maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front of you.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from sudden changes in
direction, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather con-
ditions.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of stabili-
ty. Always steer moderately when
braking hard. Severe or sharp steer-
ing wheel movement can still cause
your vehicle to veer into oncoming
traffic or off the road.
On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake sys-
tem may result in a longer stopping
distance than for vehicles equipped
with a conventional brake system.
The ABS warning light ( ) will stay
on for several seconds after the
Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON
position. During that time, the ABS
will go through self-diagnosis and the
light will go off if everything is nor-
mal. If the light stays on, you may
have a problem with your ABS.
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
If the ABS warning light ( ) is
on and stays on, you may have a
problem with the ABS. Your
power brakes will work normally.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, contact your
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
WARNING
5-34
Driving your vehicle
When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and apply your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light ( ) may illuminate. Pull
your car over to a safe place and
turn the engine off.
Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your ABS
system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with your ABS system.
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
Information
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the ABS
warning light ( ) may turn on at the
same time. This happens because of
the low battery voltage. It does not
mean your ABS is malfunctioning.
Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system helps to stabilize the
vehicle during cornering maneuvers.
ESC checks where you are steering
and where the vehicle is actually
going. ESC applies braking pressure
to any one of the vehicle’s brakes
and intervenes in the engine man-
agement system to assist the driver
with keeping the vehicle on the
intended path. It is not a substitute
for safe driving practices. Always
adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
i
NOTICE
OLF054448
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when
cornering. The ESC system will
not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers, and hydroplaning
on wet surfaces can result in
severe accidents.
WARNING
5-35
Driving your vehicle
5
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position, the ESC and
the ESC OFF indicator lights illumi-
nate for approximately three seconds
and goes off, then the ESC is turned
on.
When operating
When the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON position,
the ESC and the ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for
approximately three sec-
onds. After both lights go
off, the ESC is enabled.
• When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal.This is
normal and it means your ESC is
active.
• When the ESC activates, the
engine may not respond to the
accelerator as it does under routine
conditions.
• If the Cruise Control was in use
when the ESC activates, the Cruise
Control automatically disengages.
The Cruise Control can be reen-
gaged when the road conditions
allow.See "Cruise Control System"
later in this chapter.
• When moving out of the mud or
driving on a slippery road, the
engine rpm (revolutions per minute)
may not increase even if you press
the accelerator pedal deeply.This is
to maintain the stability and traction
of the vehicle and does not indicate
a problem.
5-36
Driving your vehicle
ESC OFF condition
To cancel ESC operation :
• State 1
Press the ESC OFF button briefly.
The ESC OFF indicator light and
message will illuminate. In this state,
the traction control function of ESC
(engine management) is disabled,
but the brake control function of ESC
(braking management) still operates.
• State 2
Press the ESC OFF button continu-
ously for more than 3 seconds. The
ESC OFF indicator light and mes-
sage illuminates and a warning
chime sounds. In this state, both the
traction control function of ESC
(engine management) and the brake
control function of ESC (braking
management) are disabled.
If the Engine Start/Stop button is
placed to the OFF position when
ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the ESC will
automatically turn on again.
Indicator lights
When the Engine Start/Stop button
is pressed to the ON position, the
ESC indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if the ESC system is operat-
ing normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever the ESC is operating.
If ESC indicator light stays on, your
vehicle may have a malfunction with
the ESC system. When this warning
light illuminates, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
OLF054101N
OLF054100N
■ ESC indicator light (blinks)
■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)
5-37
Driving your vehicle
5
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
Driving with wheels and tires with
different sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. Before
replacing tires, make sure all four
tires and wheels are the same
size. Never drive the vehicle with
different sized tires and wheels
installed.
ESC OFF usage
When Driving
The ESC OFF mode should only be
used briefly to help free the vehicle if
stuck in snow or mud by temporarily
stopping operation of the ESC to
maintain wheel torque.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving on
a flat road surface.
To prevent damage to the trans-
mission:
• Do not allow wheel(s) of one
axle to spin excessively while
the ESC, ABS, and parking brake
warning ( , red color) lights
are displayed.The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Reduce engine power
and do not spin the wheel(s)
excessively while these lights
are displayed.
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, make sure the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated).
Information
Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or standard brake system opera-
tion.
i
NOTICE
NOTICE
When the ESC is blinking, this
indicates the ESC is active:
Drive slowly and NEVER
attempt to accelerate. NEVER
turn the ESC off while the ESC
indicator light is blinking or you
may lose control of the vehicle
resulting in an accident.
WARNING
5-38
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle Stability Management
(VSM)
The Vehicle Stability Management
(VSM) is a function of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system. It
helps ensure the vehicle stays stable
when accelerating or braking sud-
denly on wet, slippery and rough
roads where traction over the four
tires can suddenly become uneven.
VSM operation
VSM ON condition
The VSM operates when:
• The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 9 mph (15 km/h) on curve
roads.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 12 mph (20 km/h) when the
vehicle is braking on rough roads.
When operating
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may activate the
ESC, you may hear sounds from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sen-
sation in the brake pedal.This is nor-
mal and it means your VSM is active.
Information
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradi-
ent or incline.
• Driving rearward.
• ESC OFF indicator light is on.
• EPS (Electric Power Steering) warn-
ing light ( ) is on.
i
Take the following precautions
when using the Vehicle Stability
Management (VSM):
• ALWAYS check the speed and
the distance to the vehicle
ahead. The VSM is not a sub-
stitute for safe driving prac-
tices.
• Never drive too fast for the
road conditions.The VSM sys-
tem will not prevent acci-
dents. Excessive speed in bad
weather, slippery and uneven
roads can result in severe
accidents.
WARNING
5-39
Driving your vehicle
5
VSM OFF condition
To cancel VSM operation, press the
ESC OFF button.ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) will illuminate.
To turn on VSM, press the ESC OFF
button again.The ESC OFF indicator
light will go out.
Driving with wheels and tires with
different sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. Before
replacing tires, make sure all four
tires and wheels are the same
size. Never drive the vehicle with
different sized tires and wheels
installed.
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
helps prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards when starting a vehicle
from a stop on a hill. The system
operates the brakes automatically for
approximately 2 seconds and releas-
es the brake after 2 seconds or when
the accelerator pedal is depressed.
• The HAC does not operate when
the shift lever is in P (Park) or N
(Neutral).
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is off but does not acti-
vate when the ESC has malfunc-
tioned.
NOTICE
NOTICE
If ESC indicator light ( ) or
EPS warning light ( ) stays
on, your vehicle may have a mal-
function with the VSM system.
When the warning light illumi-
nates have the vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er as soon as possible.
WARNING
Always be ready to depress the
accelerator pedal when starting
off on a incline.The HAC activates
only for approximately 2 seconds.
WARNING
5-40
Driving your vehicle
Good braking practices
Wet brakes can be dangerous! The
brakes may get wet if the vehicle is
driven through standing water or if it
is washed.Your vehicle will not stop
as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet
brakes may cause the vehicle to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns
to normal, taking care to keep the
vehicle under control at all times. If
the braking action does not return to
normal, stop as soon as it is safe to
do so and call an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
DO NOT drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
constant pedal pressure can result in
the brakes overheating, brake wear,
and possibly even brake failure.
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe location.
Keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped to
prevent the vehicle from rolling for-
ward.
Whenever leaving the vehicle or
parking, always come to a com-
plete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, then apply the parking
brake, and place the Engine
Start/Stop button in the OFF
position.
Vehicles parked with the park-
ing brake not applied or not
fully engaged may roll inadver-
tently and may cause injury to
the driver and others. ALWAYS
apply the parking brake before
exiting the vehicle.
WARNING
5-41
Driving your vehicle
5
DDRRIIVVEE MMOODDEE IINNTTEEGGRRAATTEEDD CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
Hybrid vehicle
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver’s preference
or road condition.
The system resets to be in the ECO
mode, when the hybrid system is
restarted.
Information
If there is a problem with the instru-
ment cluster, the drive mode will be in
ECO mode and may not change to
NORMAL mode or SPORT mode.
The mode changes, as below,
whenever the DRIVE MODE button
is pressed.
When NORMAL mode is selected,
it is not displayed on the instrument
cluster.
ECO mode (Active ECO)
When the Drive Mode is
set to ECO mode, the
engine and transmission
control logic are changed
to maximize fuel efficiency
When the ECO mode is selected by
pressing the DRIVE MODE button,
the ECO indicator (green color) will
illuminate.
Information
The ECO mode will provide best effi-
ciency for customer driving habits
that are not aggressive in accelerating
and in conditions not involving many
rolling hills to drive through. Under
situation of aggressive driving style or
driving conditions involving rolling
hills causing frequent gear shifts you
should try NORMAL mode instead as
it may actually yield your best econo-
my and drivability. Compare between
the 2 modes.
i
i
NORMAL
ECO SPORT
OLF054021N
5-42
Driving your vehicle
When ECO mode is activated:
• The acceleration response may be
slightly reduced as the accelerator
pedal is depressed moderately.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited.
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transmission may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when ECO mode is acti-
vated to improve fuel efficiency.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode manages
the driving dynamics by
automatically adjusting
the steering wheel and
hybrid system for enhanced driver
performance.
• When SPORT mode is selected by
pressing the DRIVE MODE button,
the SPORT indicator (yellow color)
will illuminate.
• Whenever the hybrid system is
restarted, the Drive Mode will
revert back to ECO mode. If
SPORT mode is desired, re-select
SPORT mode from the DRIVE
MODE button.
Information
In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency
may decrease.
i
5-43
Driving your vehicle
Plug-in hybrid vehicle
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver’s preference
or road condition.
The system resets to be in the ECO
mode, when the hybrid system is
restarted.
Information
If there is a problem with the instru-
ment cluster, the drive mode will be in
ECO mode and may not change to
NORMAL mode.
The mode changes, as below,
whenever the DRIVE MODE button
is pressed.
When NORMAL mode is selected,
it is not displayed on the instrument
cluster.
ECO mode
When the Drive Mode is
set to ECO mode, the
engine and transmission
control logic are changed
to maximize fuel efficiency.
When the ECO mode is selected by
pressing the DRIVE MODE button,
the ECO indicator (green color) will
illuminate.
Information
The ECO mode will provide best effi-
ciency for customer driving habits
that are not aggressive in accelerating
and in conditions not involving many
rolling hills. Under aggressive driving
style or driving conditions involving
rolling hills, it is advised to use NOR-
MAL mode for better fuel economy
and drivability. Compare between the
2 modes.
i
i
DDRRIIVVEE MMOODDEE IINNTTEEGGRRAATTEEDD CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
5
OLFP055021N
NORMAL
ECO
5-44
When ECO mode is activated:
• The acceleration response may be
slightly reduced as the accelerator
pedal is depressed moderately.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited.
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transmission may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when ECO mode is acti-
vated to improve fuel efficiency.
Driving your vehicle
5-45
Driving your vehicle
5
The Forward Collision Warning
System helps avoid accidents by
identifying critical situations early
and warning the driver.
FCW operation
To operate:
Go to the User Settings mode
(Driving Assist) and select FCW
(Forward Collision Warning) on the
LCD display. The system will turn on
and standby to activate. The system
will activate when vehicle speed is
above 25 mph (40 km/h) and below
90 mph (145 km/h).
When the FCW is turned off
on the User Settings mode,
FCW warning light will illu-
minate on the instrument
cluster. When the FCW warning light
remains illuminated, even though the
FCW is turned on, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
FCW will default ON when vehicle is
restarted even though FCW was
turned off on the User Settings
mode.
FFOORRWWAARRDD CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN WWAARRNNIINNGG ((FFCCWW)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OLF054428N
5-46
Driving your vehicle
Warning message
A warning message and chime will
be provided when rapidly approach-
ing a slower moving, braking or
stopped vehicle ahead.
Immediately reduce your speed to
prevent a collision.
Information
The maximum warning speed for a
stopped vehicle is 53 mph (85 km/h).
FCW malfunction message
When the FCW is not working prop-
erly, the FCW warning light ( ) will
illuminate and the warning message
will come on for a few seconds. After
the message disappears, the master
warning light will illuminate.
i
• The Forward Collision Warning
System is a supplemental sys-
tem to assist you and its
effects may differ according to
road and driving conditions.
Do not solely rely on the sys-
tem and always pay attention
to prevent dangerous situa-
tions from occurring.
• FCW is a warning system and
does not apply the brakes
automatically in a near crash
situation. FCWS may not pro-
vide a warning with enough
time to help avoid a crash.
FCWS does not detect pedes-
trians, animals, signs, con-
struction or other objects. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to pay attention to the roadway
to prevent collisions.
WARNING
OLF054223N/OLFH054456
■ Master warning light■ Warning message
OLF054105N
5-47
Driving your vehicle
5
Limitations of the system
The Forward Collision Warning
System may have limits to its ability
to detect distance to the vehicle
ahead due to road and traffic condi-
tions.
The FCW cannot detect vehicles or
detect objects as vehicles when:
- The camera lens is covered with
dirt.
- There is heavy rain or heavy snow.
- Driving in a curve.
- Driving uphill or downhill.
- An object ahead is very narrow
such as motorcycles or bicycles.
- A vehicle suddenly enters your
lane.
- The front vehicle suddenly departs
from the lane or it is hidden by other
objects.
- A vehicle passes by at a higher rate
of speed.
- An unusual shape vehicle is ahead
such as a trailer, special access
vehicle or a truck with unique
shaped cargo.
- The rear lamps of the vehicle
ahead is missing, installed on an
unusual place or installed unevenly.
- The front vehicle installs a separate
lamp or LED lamp at the rear of the
vehicle.
- Coming in or out a tunnel, where
the illumination intensity is high.
- Driving with the sun in front of you.
- The approaching vehicle has the
high beam on.
- The vehicle vibrates heavily due to
road conditions.
- The vehicle is tilted from a flat tire
or being towed.
- The vehicle ahead is not distin-
guishable due to similar shape
lamps.
- An object ahead is mistaken for a
vehicle such as a shadow, sign, etc.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
i
5-48
The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses radar sensors in the rear
bumper to monitor and warn the driv-
er of an approaching vehicle in the
driver's blind spot area.
The system monitors the rear area of
the vehicle and provides information
to the driver with an audible alert and
an indicator on the outside side view
mirrors.
(1)BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The blind spot detection range
varies relative to vehicle speed.
Note that if your vehicle is travel-
ing much faster than the vehicles
around you, the warning will not
occur.
(2)LCA (Lane Change Assist)
The Lane Change Assist feature
will alert you when a vehicle is
approaching in an adjacent lane
at a high rate of speed.If the driv-
er activates the turn signal when
the system detects an oncoming
vehicle, the system sounds an
audible alert.
(3)RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert fea-
ture monitors approaching cross
traffic from the left and right side
of the vehicle when your vehicle is
moving in reverse.The feature will
operate when the vehicle is mov-
ing in reverse below about 6 mph
(10 km/h). If oncoming cross traf-
fic is detected a warning chime
will sound.
BBLLIINNDD SSPPOOTT DDEETTEECCTTIIOONN SSYYSSTTEEMM ((BBSSDD)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Driving your vehicle
OTL055139
Blind spot area
Closing at high speed
• Always be aware of road con-
ditions while driving and be
alert for unexpected situations
even though the Blind Spot
Detection System is operating.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemen-
tal system to assist you.Do not
entirely rely on the system.
Always pay attention, while
driving, for your safety.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is not a substi-
tute for proper and safe driv-
ing. Always drive safely and
use caution when changing
lanes or backing the vehicle
up. The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) may not detect
every object alongside the
vehicle.
WARNING
5-49
Driving your vehicle
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions
To operate:
Press the BSD switch with the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
The indicator on the BSD switch will
illuminate. When the vehicle speed
exceeds 20 mph (30 km/h), the sys-
tem will be activated.
To cancel:
Press the BSD switch again. The
indicator on the switch will turn off.
When the system is not used, turn the
system off by turning the switch off.
Information
• If the Engine Start/Stop button is
pressed OFF and then ON again, the
BSD system returns to the previous
state.
• When the system is turned on, the
warning light will illuminate for 3
seconds on the outer side view mir-
ror.
The system will activate when:
1. The system is on.
2. The vehicle speed is above 20
mph (30 km/h).
3. An vehicle is detected in the blind
spot area.
i
5
OLF054037
5-50
First stage alert
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outer side
view mirror.
Once the detected vehicle is no
longer within the blind spot area, the
warning will turn off according to the
driving conditions of the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
OLFC054051
OLFC054052
■ Left side
OLFC054053
■ Right side
Second stage alert
A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:
1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system
(the warning light will illuminate on the outer side view mirror) AND
2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being
detected).
When this alert is activated, the warning light on the side view mirror will
also blink.
If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the warning chime will be deacti-
vated.
5-51
Driving your vehicle
• The second stage warning chime
may be deactivated.
- To activate the warning chime:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and select "BSD" on the
LCD display.
- To deactivate the warning chime:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and deselect "BSD" on the
LCD display.
Information
The warning chime function helps
alert the driver. Deactivate this func-
tion only when it is necessary.
Detecting sensor
The sensors are located inside the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the proper operation of the sys-
tem.
Warning message
• This warning message may appear
when :
- One or both of the sensors on the
rear bumper is blocked by dirt or
snow or a foreign object.
- Driving in rural areas where the
BSD sensor does not detect
another vehicle for an extended
period of time.
- When there is inclement weather
such as heavy snow or rain.
If any of these conditions occur, the
light on the BSD switch and the sys-
tem will turn off automatically.
i
5
OLFH054054
OLF054217N
5-52
When the BSD cancelled warning
message is displayed in the cluster,
check to make sure that the rear
bumper is free from any dirt or snow
in the areas where the sensor is
located. Remove any dirt, snow, or
foreign material that could interfere
with the radar sensors.
Once dirt or debris is removed, the
BSD system should operate normal-
ly after about 10 minutes of driving
the vehicle.
If the system still does not operate
normally have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If there is a problem with the BSD
system, a warning message will
appear and the light on the switch will
turn off.The system will turn off auto-
matically. Have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert feature
monitors approaching cross traffic
from the left and right side of the
vehicle when your vehicle is moving
in reverse.
Driving your vehicle
OLFH054435L
5-53
Driving your vehicle
Operating conditions
To operate:
Go to the User Settings Mode
(Driving Assist) and select RCTA
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert) on the LCD
display (For more information,
refer to "LCD Display" in chapter
3.). The system will turn on and
standby to activate. The system will
activate when vehicle speed is below
6 mph (10 km/h) with the shift lever in
R (Reverse).
Information
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
detecting range is approximately 1 -
65 ft (0.5 – 20 m). An approaching
vehicle will be detected if their vehicle
speed is within 2.5 - 22.5 mph (4 - 36
km/h).
Note that the detecting range may
vary under certain conditions. As
always, use caution and pay close
attention to your surroundings when
backing your vehicle.
Warning type
If the vehicle detected by the sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warn-
ing chime will sound, the warning
light on the outer side view mirror will
blink and a message will appear on
the LCD display.
Information
• The warning chime will turn off
when the detected vehicle moves out
of the sensing area or if your vehicle
is moved away from the detected
vehicle.
• The system may not operate proper-
ly due to other factors or circum-
stances. Always pay attention to
your surroundings.
• If the sensing area near the rear
bumper is blocked by either a wall
or barrier or by a parked vehicle,
the system sensing area may be
reduced.
i
i
5
■ Left ■ Right
OLFH054219L/OLFH054218L
5-54
• The system may not work prop-
erly when the bumper has been
damaged, or if the rear bumper
has been replaced or repaired.
• The sensing range differs some-
what according to the width of
the road. When the road is nar-
row, the system may detect
other vehicles in the next lane.
• The system may turn off due to
strong electromagnetic waves.
Non-operating condition
The BSD indicator on the outer side
view mirror may not illuminate
properly when:
- The outer side view mirror housing
is damaged.
- The mirror is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris.
- The window is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris.
- The window is tinted.
NOTICE
Driving your vehicle
• The warning light on the outer
side view mirror will illumi-
nate whenever a vehicle is
detected at the rear side by
the system.
To avoid accidents, do not
focus only on the warning light
and neglect to see the sur-
rounding of the vehicle.
• Drive safely even though the
vehicle is equipped with a
Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA). Do not solely rely
on the system.Check your sur-
rounding before changing
lanes or backing up the vehi-
cle.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check your surround-
ings while driving.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) are not a
substitute for proper and safe
driving practices. Always drive
safely and use caution when
changing lanes or backing up
your vehicle. The Blind Spot
Detection System (BSD) may
not detect every object along-
side the vehicle.
WARNING
5-55
Driving your vehicle
Limitations of the system
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations, because the sys-
tem may not detect other vehicles or
objects in certain circumstances.
- The vehicle drives on a curved road
or through a tollgate.
- The sensor is polluted with rain,
snow, mud, etc.
- The rear bumper where the sensor
is located is covered with a foreign
object such as a bumper sticker, a
bumper guard, a bike stand, etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged, or
the sensor is out of the original
default position.
- The vehicle height gets lower or
higher due to heavy loading in a
trunk, abnormal tire pressure, etc.
- The vehicle drives in inclement
weather such as heavy rain or
snow.
- There is a fixed object near the
vehicle, such as a guardrail.
- A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer is near.
- If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to
you and has accelerated.
- When the other vehicle passes at a
very fast speed.
- While changing lanes.
- While going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
- When the other vehicle approaches
very close.
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
- When the temperature near the
rear bumper area is high or low.
- When the sensors are blocked by
the other vehicles, walls or parking-
lot pillars.
- When the detected vehicle also
moves back, as your vehicle drives
back.
- If there are small objects in the
detecting area such as a shopping
cart or a baby carriage.
- If there is a low height vehicle such
as a sports car.
- When other vehicles are close to
your vehicle.
- When the vehicle in the next lane
moves two lanes away from you
OR when the vehicle two lanes
away moves to the next lane from
you.
- When driving through a narrow
road with many trees or bushes.
- When driving on wet surface.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
i
5
5-56
The Lane Departure Warning
(LDWS) System feature is designed
to monitor the vehicle's position rela-
tive to the lane in front of you and
detect when the vehicle begins to
move out of its lane.
LLAANNEE DDEEPPAARRTTUURREE WWAARRNNIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM ((LLDDWWSS)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Driving your vehicle
OLFH054034N
OLF054035
Take the following precautions
when using the Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS):
• ALWAYS check your sur-
roundings and the road condi-
tions before changing lanes.
The LDWS does not control
the vehicle to change lanes or
to stay in the current lane
• Do not make abrupt maneu-
vers or turn the steering
wheel suddenly if the LDWS
alerts you that the vehicle is
departing from the lane
• If the camera recognition sys-
tem does not properly detect
the lane, the LDWS may not
notify you if the vehicle
departs from the lane
• The LDWS does not operate
until the vehicle speed reach-
es approximately 40 mph (64
km/h)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The LDWS camera recogni-
tion system is located in front
of the rear view mirror at the
center of the front windshield.
Do not spray water or any
type of liquid near the camera.
The system may become
damaged.
• Do not attempt to repair the
LDWS camera and do not
remove any parts
• Do not place objects that
reflect light on the dashboard
while driving
• The operation of the LDWS
may be affected by several
factors including environmen-
tal conditions that affect the
ability of the camera to detect
the lanes in front of you. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to pay careful attention to the
roadway and to maintain the
vehicle in its intended lane at
all times.
WARNING
5-57
Driving your vehicle
LDWS Operation
To activate the LDWS:
With the ignition switch is in the ON
position, press the LDWS button
located on the instrument panel on
the lower left hand side of the driver.
The indicator in the cluster display
will initially illuminate white.This indi-
cates the LDWS is in the READY but
NOT ENABLED state.
Note that the vehicle speed must be
at least approximately 40 mph (64
km/h) to ENABLE the LDWS. The
indicator in the cluster display will
illuminate green.
If your vehicle speed exceeds 40
mph (64 km/h) and the LDWS button
is ON, the system is enabled. If your
vehicle departs from the projected
lane in front of you, the LDWS oper-
ates as follows:
1. A visual warning appears on the
cluster LCD display. Either the left
lane line or the right lane line in
the cluster LCD display will blink
depending on which direction the
vehicle is veering.
2. An audible warning sounds to
alert the driver.
5
OLF054206N
OLF054207N
■ Lane line detected
■ Lane line undetected
OLFH055036N
OLF054208N/OLF054209N
OLF054210N/OLF054211N
■ Lane Departure Warning
• Right • Left
• Right • Left
■ Lane Departure Warning + Smart Cruise Control
5-58
Warning Light and Message
If there is a malfunction with the
LDWS, the indicator on the cluster
will illuminate yellow. Additionally, a
message that reads, "Check LDWS",
will appear on the cluster LCD dis-
play. After the message disappears,
the master warning light ( ) will
illuminate.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
tem checked.
The LDWS does not operate when:
• The driver turns on the turn signal
to change lanes or operates the
hazard warning flasher.
• The camera recognition system
detects that the vehicle is driving
on the lane lines.
Information
Always operate the turn signal before
changing lanes.
Limitations of the system
The LDWS may operate prematurely
even if the vehicle does not depart
from the intended lane, OR, the
LDWS may not warn you if the vehi-
cle leaves the intended lane under
the following circumstances:
• The lanes ahead are not visible
due to rain, snow, water on the
road, damaged or stained road
surface, or other factors
• The brightness outside changes
suddenly such as when entering or
exiting a tunnel
• The brightness outside is too low
such as when the headlamps are
not on at night or the vehicle is
going through a tunnel
• It is difficult to distinguish the lane
marking from the road surface or
the lane marking is faded or not
clearly marked
• Driving on a steep grade or over a
hill, or when driving on a curved
road
i
Driving your vehicle
■ Warning message ■ Master warning light
OLF054433N/OLFH054433N
5-59
Driving your vehicle
• When light coming from a street
light or an oncoming vehicle is
reflected on a wet road surface
such as a puddle in the road
• The windshield or the LDWS cam-
era lens is blocked with dirt or
debris
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare
• The lanes are incomplete or the
area is in a construction zone
• There are more than two lane lines
on the road in front of you The lane
markings are not clearly visible
from the road
• The camera recognition system
cannot properly detect the lanes
due to fog, heavy rain, or snow
• The lane width differs from stan-
dard (either very wide or very nar-
row)
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstruct-
ed
• There are markings on the road
surface that look like a lane line
that is inadvertently being detected
by the camera
• There is a boundary structure in
the roadway such as a concrete
barrier that is inadvertently being
detected by the camera
• There is not enough distance
between you and the vehicle in
front to be able to detect the lane
line or the vehicle ahead is driving
on the lane line
• The vehicle while driving vibrates
excessively due to adverse road
conditions
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare
• The lanes are incomplete or the
area is in a construction zone
• There are more than two lane lines
on the road in front of you
5
5-60
Driving your vehicle
Cruise Control operation
1. CRUISE indicator
2. SET indicator
The Cruise Control system allows
you to drive at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h) without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Information
• During normal cruise control opera-
tion, when the SET switch is activat-
ed or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will ener-
gize after approximately 3 seconds.
This delay is normal.
• Before activating the cruise control
function, the system will check to
verify that the brake switch is oper-
ating normally. Depress the brake
pedal at least once after turning ON
the ignition or starting the engine.
i
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL
Take the following precautions:
• If the Cruise Control is left on,
("CRUISE" indicator light in
the instrument cluster is illu-
minated) the Cruise Control
can be activated unintention-
ally. Keep the Cruise Control
system off ("CRUISE" indica-
tor light OFF) when the Cruise
Control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the Cruise Control sys-
tem only when traveling on
open highways in good
weather.
• Do not use the Cruise Control
when it may be unsafe to keep
the vehicle at a constant
speed:
- When driving in heavy traffic
or when traffic conditions
make it difficult to drive at a
constant speed
- When driving on rainy, icy, or
snow-covered roads
(Continued)
(Continued)
- When driving on hilly or
windy roads
- When driving in windy areas
- When driving with limited
view (possibly due to bad
weather such as fog, snow,
rain and sandstorm)
• Do not use cruise control
when towing a trailer.
WARNING
OLF054040
5-61
Driving your vehicle
5
To set Cruise Control speed
1. Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The "CRUISE" indicator will
illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
3. Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-), and release it. The SET
indicator light will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
Information
On a steep slope, the vehicle may
slightly slow down or speed up, while
driving uphill or downhill.
To increase Cruise Control
speed
• Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+) and hold it, while monitor-
ing the SET speed on the instru-
ment cluster.
Release the toggle switch when
the desired speed is shown and
the vehicle will accelerate to that
speed.
• Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+) and release it immediately.
The cruising speed will increase
1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
toggle switch is operated in this
manner.
i
OLF054041
OLF054042/Q
OLF054043/Q
5-62
Driving your vehicle
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle attains the
desired speed, push the toggle
switch (1) down (SET-).
To decrease Cruise Control
speed
• Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-) and hold it.Your vehicle will
gradually slow down. Release the
lever at the speed you want to
maintain.
• Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-) and release it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
toggle switch is operated in this
manner.
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired
speed, push the toggle switch (1)
down (SET-).
To temporarily accelerate with
the Cruise Control ON
Depress the accelerator pedal.When
you take your foot off the accelerator,
the vehicle will return to the previ-
ously set speed.
If you push the toggle switch down
(SET-) at the increased speed, the
Cruise Control will maintain the
increased speed.
OLF054042/Q
5-63
Driving your vehicle
5
Cruise Control will be canceled
when:
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Pressing the CANCEL button
located on the steering wheel.
• Pressing the CRUISE button. Both
the CRUISE indicator and the
"SET" indicator will turn OFF.
• Moving the shift lever into N
(Neutral).
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to
less than approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h).
• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is operating.
• Downshifting to 2
nd
gear when in
Manual Shift mode.
Information
Each of the above actions will cancel
Cruise Control operation (the "SET"
indicator in the instrument cluster will
go off), but only pressing the CRUISE
button will turn the system off. If you
wish to resume Cruise Control opera-
tion, push the lever up (RES+) located
on your steering wheel. You will
return to your previously preset
speed, unless the system was turned
off using the CRUISE button.
i
OLF054044
5-64
Driving your vehicle
To resume preset Cruising
speed
Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+). If the vehicle speed is over
20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle will
resume the preset speed.
To turn Cruise Control off
• Press the CRUISE button (the
"CRUISE" indicator light will go
off).
• Turn the vehicle OFF.
OLF054042/Q
OLF054041
5-65
Driving your vehicle
5
➀ Cruise Indicator
➁ Set Speed
➂ Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance
The Smart Cruise Control System
allows you to program the vehicle to
maintain constant speed and dis-
tance detecting the vehicle ahead
without depressing the accelerator/
brake pedal.
SSMMAARRTT CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OLF054430N
For your safety, please read the
owner's manual before using
the Smart Cruise Control sys-
tem.
WARNING
Do not use cruise control when
towing a trailer.
WARNING
The Smart Cruise Control
System is not a substitute for
safe driving practices, but a
convenience function only. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to always check the speed and
distance to the vehicle ahead.
WARNING
Take the following precautions:
• If the Smart Cruise Control is
left on, ("CRUISE" indicator
light in the instrument cluster
is illuminated) the Smart
Cruise Control can be activat-
ed unintentionally. Keep the
Smart Cruise Control System
off ("CRUISE" indicator light
OFF) when the Smart Cruise
Control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the Smart Cruise Control
System when traveling on
open highways in good
weather.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-66
To adjust the sensitivity of
Smart Cruise Control
The sensitivity of vehicle speed
when following the front vehicle to
maintain the set distance can be
adjusted. Go to the User Settings
Mode (Driving Assist) and select
SCC (Smart Cruise Control). You
may select one of the three stages
you prefer.
• Slow:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is slower than normal speed.
• Normal:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is normal
• Fast:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is faster than normal speed.
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not use the Smart Cruise
Control when it may not be
safe to keep the vehicle at a
constant speed:
- When driving in heavy traffic
or when traffic conditions
make it difficult to drive at a
constant speed
- When driving on rainy, icy, or
snow-covered roads
- When driving on hilly or
windy roads
- When driving in windy areas
- When driving with limited
view (possibly due to bad
weather such as fog, snow,
rain and sandstorm)
OLF054441N
5-67
Driving your vehicle
5
To convert to Cruise Control
Mode
The driver may choose to only use
the Cruise Control Mode (speed con-
trol function) by doing as follows:
1. Turn the Smart Cruise Control
System on (the "CRUISE" indica-
tor will be on but the system will
not be activated).
2. Press and hold the Vehicle-to-
Vehicle Distance button for more
than 2 seconds.
3. Choose between "Smart Cruise
Control (SCC) Mode" and "Cruise
Control (CC) Mode".
When the system is canceled using
the CRUISE button or the CRUISE
button is used after the engine is
turned on, the SCC Mode will turn
on.
Smart Cruise Control speed
To set Smart Cruise Control
speed
1. Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The "CRUISE" indicator will
illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
The Smart Cruise Control speed
can be set as follows:
• 20 mph (30 km/h)~110 mph (180
km/h): when there is no vehicle
in front
• 0 mph (0 km/h)~110 mph (180
km/h): when there is a vehicle in
front
OLF054205N/OLF054431N
When using the Cruise Control
Mode, you must manually
adjust the distance to other
vehicles by depressing the
accelerator or brake pedal. The
system does not automatically
adjust the distance to vehicles
in front of you.
WARNING
OLF054041
5-68
Driving your vehicle
3. Push the toggle switch down
(SET-), and release it at the
desired speed. The Set Speed
and Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance
on the LCD display will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
The desired speed will automati-
cally be maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the
speed may decrease to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
To increase Smart Cruise
Control set speed
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),
and hold it.Your vehicle set speed
will increase by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the toggle switch at the
speed you want.
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will increase by 1.0
mph (1.0 km/h) each time you
move the toggle switch up in this
manner.
• You can set the speed to 110 mph
(180 km/h).
To decrease the Smart Cruise
Control set speed
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the toggle switch down (SET-),
and hold it. Your vehicle set speed
will decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the toggle switch at the
speed you want.
• Push the toggle switch down (SET-),
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will decrease by 1.0
mph (1.0 km/h) each time you move
the toggle switch down in this man-
ner.
• You can set the speed to 20 mph
(30 km/h).
OLF054042
OLF054043 OLF054042
5-69
Driving your vehicle
5
To temporarily accelerate with
the Smart Cruise Control on
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the Smart Cruise Control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with Smart Cruise Control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
If you push the toggle switch down
(SET-) at increased speed, the cruis-
ing speed will be set again.
Smart Cruise Control will be
temporarily canceled when:
Canceled manually
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Pressing the CANCEL button
located on the steering wheel.
• Depress the brake pedal and press
the CANCEL button at the same
time, when the vehicle is at a
standstill.
The Smart Cruise Control turns off
temporarily when the indicator on the
LCD display turns off.
The CRUISE indicator is illuminated
continuously.
Be careful when accelerating
temporarily, because the speed
is not controlled automatically
at this time even if there is a
vehicle in front of you.
CAUTION
OLF054044
5-70
Driving your vehicle
Canceled automatically
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The shift lever is shifted to N
(Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park).
• The EPB (Electronic Parking
Brake) is applied.
• The vehicle speed is over 120 mph
(190 km/h)
• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), TCS (Traction Control
System) or ABS is operating.
• The ESC is turned off.
• The radar or the cover is dirty or
blocked with foreign matter.
• The SCC system has malfunc-
tioned.
• When the vehicle is stopped for
more than 5 minutes.
• The driver starts driving by pushing
the toggle switch up (RES +) or
down (SET -) or depressing the
accelerator pedal, approximately 3
seconds after the vehicle is
stopped by the Smart Cruise
Control System with no other vehi-
cle ahead.
• The driver starts driving by pushing
the toggle switch up (RES +) or
down (SET -) or depressing the
accelerator pedal, after stopping
the vehicle with a vehicle stopped
far away in front.
• The accelerator pedal is continu-
ously depressed for more than one
minute.
Each of these actions will cancel
the Smart Cruise Control opera-
tion. (The Set Speed and Vehicle-
to-Vehicle Distance on the LCD
display will go off.)
In a condition the Smart Cruise
Control is canceled automatically,
the Smart Cruise Control will not
resume even though the RES+ or
SET- toggle switch is pushed. Also,
the EPB will be applied when the
vehicle is stopped.
If the Smart Cruise Control is can-
celed by other than the reasons
mentioned, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
If the system is canceled, the warn-
ing chime will sound and a message
will appear for a few seconds.
You must adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
Always check the road conditions.
Do not rely on the warning chime.
NOTICE
OLF054201N
5-71
Driving your vehicle
5
To resume Smart Cruise Control
set speed
If any method other than the cruise
lever was used to cancel cruising
speed and the system is still activat-
ed, the cruising speed will automati-
cally resume when you push the tog-
gle switch up (RES+) or down (SET-).
If you push the toggle switch up
(RES+), the speed will resume to the
recently set speed. However, if vehi-
cle speed has dropped below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h), it
will resume when there is a vehicle in
front of your vehicle.
To turn Cruise Control off
Press the CRUISE button (the
"CRUISE" indicator light will go off).
Always check the road condi-
tions when you push the toggle
switch up (RES+) to resume
speed.
CAUTION
OLF054043
OLF054041
5-72
Driving your vehicle
Smart Cruise Control vehicle-
to-vehicle distance
To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle
Distance
When the Smart Cruise Control
System is ON, you can set and main-
tain the distance from the vehicle
ahead of you without pressing the
accelerator or brake pedal.
Each time the button is pressed, the
vehicle to vehicle distance changes
as follows:
For example, if you drive at 56 mph
(90 km/h), the distance maintain as
follows:
Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet
(52.5 m)
Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet
(40 m)
Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet
(32.5 m)
Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet
(25 m)
Information
Distance 4 is always set when the sys-
tem is used for the first time after
starting the engine.
When the lane ahead is clear:
The vehicle speed will maintain the
set speed.
i
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
OLF054045
OLF054447N
5-73
Driving your vehicle
5
When there is a vehicle ahead
of you in your lane:
• Your vehicle speed will slow down
or speed up to maintain the select-
ed distance.
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up,
your vehicle will travel at a steady
cruising speed after accelerating to
the set speed.
Distance 4
Distance 3
Distance 2
Distance 1
OLF054213N/OLF054214N/
OLF054215N/OLF054216N
When using the Smart Cruise
Control System:
• The warning chime sounds
and the Vehicle-to Vehicle
Distance indicator blinks if
the vehicle is unable to main-
tain the selected distance
from the vehicle ahead.
(Continued)
WARNING
OLF054031N
(Continued)
• If the warning chime sounds,
depress the accelerator or
brake pedal to actively adjust
the vehicle speed,and the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead.
• Even if the warning chime is
not activated, always pay
attention to the driving condi-
tions to prevent dangerous
situations from occurring.
5-74
Driving your vehicle
In traffic situation
In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the
vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if
the vehicle ahead of you starts mov-
ing, your vehicle will start as well.
However, if the vehicle stops for
more than 3 seconds, you must
depress the accelerator pedal or
push up the toggle switch (RES+ or
SET-) to start driving.
SCC front radar sensor
The Smart Cruise Control uses a
radar to detect distance to the vehi-
cle ahead.
OLF054203N
OLF054204N
If the vehicle ahead (vehicle
speed: less than 20 mph
(30km/h)) disappears to the next
lane, the warning chime will
sound and a message will
appear. Adjust your vehicle
speed for vehicles or objects
that can suddenly appear in
front of you by depressing the
brake pedal.
Always pay attention to the road
condition ahead.
CAUTION
OLFH054032N
5-75
Driving your vehicle
5
Warning message
Check SCC radar
When the sensor lens cover is
blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the
Smart Cruise Control System opera-
tion may stop temporarily. If this
occurs, a warning message will
appear on the LCD display. Remove
any dirt, snow, or debris and clean
the radar sensor lens cover before
operating the Smart Cruise Control
System.
Check SCC system
The message will appear when the
vehicle to vehicle distance control
system is not functioning normally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
tem checked.
OLF054444N
OLF054440N
• Do not apply foreign objects
such as a bumper sticker or a
bumper guard near the radar
sensor. Doing so may
adversely affect the sensing
performance of the radar.
• Always keep the radar sensor
and lens cover clean and free
of dirt and debris.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash
the vehicle.Do not spray pres-
surized water directly on the
sensor or sensor cover.
• Be careful not to apply unnec-
essary force on the radar sen-
sor or sensor cover. If the sen-
sor is forcibly moved out of
proper alignment, the Smart
Cruise Control System may
not operate correctly. In this
case, a warning message may
not be displayed. Have the
vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
CAUTION
5-76
Driving your vehicle
Limitations of the system
The Smart Cruise Control System
may have limits to its ability to detect
distance to the vehicle ahead due to
road and traffic conditions.
On curves
• The Smart Cruise Control System
may not detect a moving vehicle in
your lane, and then your vehicle
could accelerate to the set speed.
Also, the vehicle speed will
decrease when the vehicle ahead
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on curves and apply the brakes or
accelerator pedal if necessary.
ODH053092
(Continued)
• If the front bumper becomes
damaged in the area around
the radar sensor, the Smart
Cruise Control System may
not operate properly. Have the
vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Use only genuine HYUNDAI
parts to repair or replace a
damaged sensor or sensor
cover. Do not apply paint to
the sensor cover.
5-77
Driving your vehicle
5
Your vehicle speed can be reduced
due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane.
Apply the accelerator pedal and
select the appropriate set speed.
Check to be sure that the road con-
ditions permit safe operation of the
Smart Cruise Control.
On inclines
• During uphill or downhill driving,
the Smart Cruise Control System
may not detect a moving vehicle in
your lane, and cause your vehicle
to accelerate to the set speed.
Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly
decrease when the vehicle ahead
is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on inclines and apply the brake or
accelerator pedal if necessary.
Lane changing
• A vehicle which moves into your
lane from an adjacent lane cannot
be recognized by the radar until it
is in the radar’s detection range.
• The radar may not detect immedi-
ately when a vehicle cuts in sud-
denly. Always pay attention to the
traffic, road and driving conditions.
• If a slower vehicle moves into your
lane, your speed may decrease to
maintain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
• If a faster vehicle moves into your
lane, your vehicle will accelerate to
the set speed.
ODH053093
ODH053094 ODH053095
5-78
Driving your vehicle
Detecting vehicles
Some vehicles in your lane cannot
be recognized by the radar:
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-
cles or bicycles
- Vehicles offset to one side
- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-
decelerating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile such
as trailers with no loads
A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-
nized correctly by the radar if any of
following occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the
trunk
- While the steering wheel is operat-
ing
- When driving to one side of the lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or on
curves
Apply the brake or accelerator pedal
if necessary.
• Your vehicle may accelerate when
a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
• When you are warned that the
vehicle ahead of you is not detect-
ed, drive with caution.
ODH053096
ODH053097
5-79
Driving your vehicle
5
• When vehicles are at a standstill
and the vehicle in front of you
changes to the next lane, be care-
ful when your vehicle starts to
move because it may not recog-
nize the stopped vehicle in front of
you.
• Always look out for pedestrians
when your vehicle is maintaining a
distance with the vehicle ahead.
• Always be cautious for vehicles
with higher height or vehicles car-
rying loads that sticks out from the
back of the vehicle.
ODH053098 ODH053099 ODH053100
5-80
Driving your vehicle
The Smart Cruise Control System
may not operate temporarily due
to:
• Electrical interference
• Modifying the suspension
• Differences of tire abrasion or
tire pressure
• Installing different type of tires
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.
i
NOTICE
When using the Smart Cruise
Control take the following pre-
cautions:
• If an emergency stop is nec-
essary, you must apply the
brakes.The vehicle cannot be
stopped by using the Smart
Cruise Control System.
• Keep a safe distance accord-
ing to road conditions and
vehicle speed. If the vehicle to
vehicle distance is too close
during a high-speed driving, a
serious collision may result.
• Always maintain sufficient
braking distance and deceler-
ate your vehicle by applying
the brakes if necessary.
• The Smart Cruise Control
System cannot recognize a
stopped vehicle, pedestrians
or an oncoming vehicle.
Always look ahead cautiously
to prevent unexpected and
sudden situations from occur-
ring.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Vehicles moving in front of
you with a frequent lane
change may cause a delay in
the system's reaction or may
cause the system to react to a
vehicle actually in an adjacent
lane. Always drive cautiously
to prevent unexpected and
sudden situations from occur-
ring.
• Always be aware of the select-
ed speed and vehicle to vehi-
cle distance.
• The Smart Cruise Control
System may not recognize
complex driving situations so
always pay attention to driv-
ing conditions and control
your vehicle speed.
5-81
Driving your vehicle
5
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving elements
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud and sand, take the
below suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and keep a longer
braking distance.
• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.
• When your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud, or sand, use second gear.
Accelerate slowly to avoid unnec-
essary wheel spin.
• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or
other non-slip materials under the
wheels to provide additional trac-
tion while the vehicle becomes
stuck in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and a for-
ward gear.
Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and
do not race the engine.
To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before
shifting gears. Release the accelera-
tor pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal while
the transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking
motion that may free the vehicle.
SSPPEECCIIAALL DDRRIIVVIINNGG CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNSS
Downshifting with an automatic
transmission while driving on
slippery surfaces can cause an
accident.The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when down-
shifting on slippery surfaces.
WARNING
If the vehicle is stuck and
excessive wheel spin occurs,
the temperature in the tires can
increase very quickly. If the tires
become damaged, a tire blow
out or tire explosion can occur.
This condition is dangerous -
you and others may be injured.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle.
If you attempt to free the vehi-
cle, the vehicle can overheat
quickly, possibly causing an
engine compartment fire or
other damage.Try to avoid spin-
ning the wheels as much as
possible to prevent overheating
of either the tires or the engine.
DO NOT allow the vehicle to
spin the wheels above 35 mph
(56 km/h).
WARNING
5-82
Driving your vehicle
Information
The ESC system must be turned OFF
before rocking the vehicle.
If you are still stuck after rocking
the vehicle a few times, have the
vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle
to avoid engine overheating, possi-
ble damage to the transmission,
and tire damage. See "Towing" in
chapter 6.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration.
Driving at night
Night driving presents more hazards
than driving in the daylight. Here are
some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lamps.
• Keep your headlamps clean and
properly aimed. Dirty or improperly
aimed headlamps will make it
much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lamps of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
NOTICE
i
5-83
Driving your vehicle
5
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous. Here are a few things to
consider when driving in the rain or
on slick pavement:
• Slow down and allow extra follow-
ing distance. A heavy rainfall
makes it harder to see and increas-
es the distance needed to stop
your vehicle.
• Turn OFF your Cruise Control.
• Replace your windshield wiper
blades when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the
windshield.
• Be sure your tires have enough
tread. If your tires do not have
enough tread, making a quick stop
on wet pavement can cause a skid
and possibly lead to an accident.
See "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.
• Turn on your headlamps to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe your brakes may be
wet, apply them lightly while driv-
ing until normal braking operation
returns.
Hydroplaning
If the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough, your vehicle may
have little or no contact with the road
surface and actually ride on the
water. The best advice is SLOW
DOWN when the road is wet.
The risk of hydroplaning increas-
es as the depth of tire tread
decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in
chapter 7.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
reduced.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
5-84
Driving your vehicle
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation, as specified.
Under-inflation may overheat or
damage the tires.
Do not install worn-out or damaged
tires, which may reduce traction or
fail the braking operation.
Information
Never over-inflate your tires above the
maximum inflation pressure, as speci-
fied on your tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
Driving at higher speeds on the high-
way consumes more fuel and is less
efficient than driving at a slower,
more moderate speed. Maintain a
moderate speed in order to conserve
fuel when driving on the highway.
Be sure to check both the engine
coolant level and the engine oil
before driving.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
overheat the engine.
i
5-85
Driving your vehicle
5
The severe weather conditions of
winter quickly wear out tires and
cause other problems. To minimize
winter driving problems, you should
take the following suggestions:
Snow or icy conditions
You need to keep sufficient distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you.
Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause the vehicle to skid.
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
Always carry emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to
carry include tire chains, tow straps
or chains, a flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables,
a window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure to use radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
The traction provided by snow tires
on dry roads may not be as high as
your vehicle's original equipment
tires. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Information
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munici-
pal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
i
WWIINNTTEERR DDRRIIVVIINNGG
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your
vehicle may be adversely affect-
ed.
WARNING
5-86
Driving your vehicle
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner than other types of tires, they
may be damaged by mounting some
types of tire chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is
recommended instead of tire chains.
Do not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; if
unavoidable use a wire type chain. If
tire chains must be used, use gen-
uine HYUNDAI parts and install the
tire chain after reviewing the instruc-
tions provided with the tire chains.
Damage to your vehicle caused by
improper tire chain use is not cov-
ered by your vehicle manufacturer’s
warranty.
Information
• Install tire chains on the front tires.
It should be noted that installing tire
chains on the tires will provide a
greater driving force, but will not
prevent side skids.
• Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and
municipal regulations for possible
restrictions against their use.
i
OLMB053046
The use of tire chains may
adversely affect vehicle han-
dling:
• Drive less than 20 mph (30
km/h) or the chain manufac-
turer’s recommended speed
limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns,
and other road hazards, which
may cause the vehicle to
bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked
wheel braking.
WARNING
5-87
Driving your vehicle
5
Chain Installation
When installing tire chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
mount them as tightly possible. Drive
slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h))
with chains installed. If you hear the
chains contacting the body or chas-
sis, stop and tighten them.If they still
make contact, slow down until the
noise stops. Remove the tire chains
as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning Flasher and place a
triangular emergency warning device
behind the vehicle (if available).
Always place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine before installing snow
chains.
When using tire chains:
• Wrong size chains or improperly
installed chains can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Use SAE "S" class or wire
chains.
• If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to prevent
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driving
0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on vehi-
cles equipped with aluminum
wheels. If unavoidable, use a
wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.47 in
(12 mm) wide to prevent damage
to the chain's connection.
Winter Precautions
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing.Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
NOTICE
5-88
Driving your vehicle
Check battery and cables
The winter temperature increases
the battery consumption. Inspect
the battery and cables, as speci-
fied in the chapter 7. The battery
charging level can be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or in a
service station.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some regions during winter, it is
recommended to use the "winter
weight" oil with lower viscosity. For
further information, refer to the chap-
ter 8.When you are not sure about a
type of winter weight oil, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect the spark plugs, as speci-
fied in the chapter 7. If necessary,
replace them. Also check all ignition
wirings and components for any
cracks, wear-out, and damage.
To prevent locks from freezing
To prevent the locks from being
frozen, spray approved de-icing fluid
or glycerin into key holes. When a
lock opening is already covered with
ice, spray approved de-icing fluid
over the ice to remove it. When an
internal part of a lock freezes, try to
thaw it with a heated key. Carefully
use the heated key to avoid an injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze solution in system
To prevent the window washer from
being frozen, add authorized window
washer anti-freeze solution, as spec-
ified on the window washer contain-
er. Window washer anti-freeze solu-
tion is available from an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer, and so are the
most vehicle accessory outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types
of anti-freeze solution to prevent any
damage to the vehicle paint.
5-89
Driving your vehicle
5
Do not let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position.This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet.
When there is the risk that your park-
ing brake may freeze, temporarily
apply it with the shift lever in P
(Park). Also, block the rear wheels in
advance, so the vehicle may not roll.
Then, release the parking brake.
Do not let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering.When
driving in such conditions during the
severe winter, you should check
underneath the vehicle on a regular
basis, so that moving the front
wheels and the steering components
is unblocked.
Carry emergency equipment
In accordance with weather condi-
tions, you should carry appropriate
emergency equipment, while driving.
Some of the items you may want to
carry include tire chains, tow straps
or chains, flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables,
window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.
Do not place objects or materials
in the engine compartment
Putting objects or materials in the
engine compartment may cause an
engine failure or combustion, because
those may block the engine cooling.
Such damage will not be covered by
the manufacturer’s warranty.
5-90
Driving your vehicle
Two labels on your driver's door sill
show how much weight your vehicle
was designed to carry: the Tire and
Loading Information Label and the
Certification Label.
Before loading your vehicle, familiar-
ize yourself with the following terms
for determining your vehicle's weight
ratings, from the vehicle's specifica-
tions and the Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo Weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the Certification Label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the Certification Label
located on the driver’s door sill.
VVEEHHIICCLLEE LLOOAADD LLIIMMIITT
5-91
Driving your vehicle
5
Tire loading information label
The label located on the driver’s door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
Vehicle capacity weight
904 lbs. (410 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo.If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
OLFH054451/OLFH054452
■ Type A (only for Hybrid vehicle)
■ Type B
5-92
Driving your vehicle
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
Do not overload the vehicle as
there is a limit to the total
weight, or load limit, including
occupants and cargo, the vehi-
cle can carry. Overloading can
shorten the life of the vehicle. If
the GVWR or the GAWR is
exceeded, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change the
handling of your vehicle. These
could cause you to lose control
and result in an accident.
WARNING
5-93
Driving your vehicle
5
Example 1
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs. × 2 = 300 lbs.)
(68 kg × 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
(1100 lbs.)
(499 kg)
Example 2
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs. × 5 = 750 lbs.)
(68 kg × 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
(650 lbs.)
(295 kg)
Example 3
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)
Passenger Weight
(172 lbs. × 5 = 860 lbs.)
(78 kg × 5 = 390 kg)
Cargo Weight
(540 lbs.)
(245 kg)
+
≥≥
≥≥
≥≥
+
+
5-94
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pil-
lar and shows the maximum allow-
able weight of the fully loaded vehi-
cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
The total weight of the vehicle,
including all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out
the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Be
sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
OBH059070
Overloading
• Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle
and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle's handling
and braking ability, and cause
an accident.
• Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your
vehicle's tires and possible
tire failure, increased stop-
ping distances and poor vehi-
cle handling-all of which may
result in a crash.
WARNING
5-95
Driving your vehicle
5
Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do
not overload your vehicle.
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
NOTICE
If you carry items inside your
vehicle (e.g., suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything else),
they are moving as fast as the
vehicle. If you have to stop or
turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, the items will keep going
and can cause an injury if they
strike the driver or a passenger.
• Put items in the cargo area of
your vehicle.Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Do not stack items, like suit-
cases, inside the vehicle
above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured
child restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.
WARNING
TTRRAAIILLEERR TTOOWWIINNGG
What to do in an emergency
6
Hazard warning flasher ........................................6-2
In case of an emergency while driving ..............6-2
If the vehicle stalls while driving...................................6-2
If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad or crossing.........6-2
If you have a flat tire while driving..............................6-3
If the vehicle will not start...................................6-3
If the engine turns over normally but doesn't
start.......................................................................................6-3
Jump starting ..........................................................6-4
If the engine overheats ........................................6-7
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)..........6-9
Check tire pressure...........................................................6-9
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............................6-10
Low tire pressure indicator ..........................................6-11
Low tire pressure LCD display with position
indicator.............................................................................6-11
TPMS Malfunction Indicator ........................................6-12
Changing a Tire with TPMS..........................................6-13
If you have a flat tire..........................................6-15
Towing ...................................................................6-22
Towing service .................................................................6-22
Removable towing hook ................................................6-23
Emergency Towing..........................................................6-24
If an accident occurs...........................................6-26
6-2
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when approach-
ing, overtaking, or passing your vehi-
cle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
To turn the hazard warning flasher
on or off, press the hazard warning
flasher button both the left and right.
The button is located in the center
fascia panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
If the vehicle stalls while driv-
ing
• Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
• Turn on your hazard warning flash-
er.
• Try to start the hybrid system
again. If your vehicle will not start,
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer or seek other qualified
assistance.
If the vehicle stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, if safe to do so, move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
and then push the vehicle to a safe
location.
HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG FFLLAASSHHEERR
What to do in an emergency
IINN CCAASSEE OOFF AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY
WWHHIILLEE DDRRIIVVIINNGG
OLF064001
OLF064002
■ Type A
■ Type B
6-3
What to do in an emergency
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
• Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
ately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
When the vehicle has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on firm, level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
• When the vehicle is stopped, press
the hazard warning flasher button,
move the shift lever into P(Park),
and apply the parking brake, and
place the Engine Start/Stop button
in the OFF position.
• Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
• When changing a flat tire, follow
the instructions provided later in
this chapter.
• Be sure the shift lever is in P
(Park). The vehicle starts only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
• Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
• Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is drained.
Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could cause damage to
your vehicle. See instructions for
"Jump Starting" provided in this
chapter.
If the engine turns over nor-
mally but doesn't start
Check the fuel level and add fuel if
necessary.
If the engine still does not start, have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
6
IIFF TTHHEE VVEEHHIICCLLEE WWIILLLL NNOOTT SSTTAARRTT
Push or pull starting the vehicle
may cause the catalytic con-
verter to overload which can
lead to damage to the emission
control system.
CAUTION
6-4
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Follow the jump
starting procedure in this section to
avoid serious injury or damage to
your vehicle. If in doubt about how to
properly jump start your vehicle, we
strongly recommend that you have a
service technician or towing service
do it for you.
JJUUMMPP SSTTAARRTTIINNGG
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always
present in battery cells,
is highly combustible,
and may explode if ignit-
ed.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
Batteries contain sulfu-
ric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get med-
ical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
(Continued)
6-5
What to do in an emergency
6
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulations.
To prevent damage to your vehi-
cle:
• Only use a 12-volt power supply
(battery or jumper system) to
jump start your vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle by push-starting.
Jump starting procedure
1. Position the vehicles close enough
that the jumper cables will reach,
but do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in
the engine compartment at all
times, even when the vehicles are
turned off.
3. Turn off all electrical devices such
as radios, lights, air conditioning,
etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park)
and set the parking brakes. Turn
both vehicles OFF.
Information
Your vehicle has a battery in the trunk
compartment.
i
NOTICE
i
Pb
(Continued)
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or when the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
6-6
What to do in an emergency
4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one jumper
cable to the red, positive (+)
jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
5. Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the red, positive
(+) battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
6. Connect the second jumper cable
to the black, negative (-) battery/
chassis ground of the assisting
vehicle (3).
7. Connect the other end of the sec-
ond jumper cable to the black,
negative (-) chassis ground of
your vehicle (4).
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the cor-
rect battery or jumper terminals or
the correct ground. Do not lean
over the battery when making
connections.
8. Start the engine of the assisting
vehicle and let it run at approxi-
mately 2,000 rpm for a few min-
utes.Then start your vehicle.
If your vehicle will not start after a
few attempts, it probably requires
servicing. In this event please seek
qualified assistance. If the cause of
your battery discharging is not
apparent, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Disconnect the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order you connected
them:
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from
the black, negative (-) chassis
ground of your vehicle (4).
2. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the black, neg-
ative (-) battery/chassis ground of
the assisting vehicle (3).
3. Disconnect the second jumper
cable from the red, positive (+)
battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
4. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the red, positive
(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
OLFH064002
OLFP065002
■ Hybrid
■ Plug-in hybrid
6-7
What to do in an emergency
6
If your engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, you
experience a loss of power, or hear
loud pinging or knocking, the engine
may be overheating. If this happens,
you should:
1. Turn ON the hazard warning flash-
er, pull off the road and stop as
soon as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park)
and set the parking brake.
3. Make sure that there is no hot
steam gushing out of the engine
compartment. When it is safe to
do so, open the engine compart-
ment, and check the water-pump
connector. When the water-pump
connector is disconnected, stop
the engine, re-connect the water-
pump connector, and then re-start
the engine.
4. Set the temperature and the air
flow to the maximum, and turn ON
the air conditioner.
5. When the Service warning light
( ) illuminates on the instru-
ment cluster, immediately stop the
engine, and contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. When the
engine warning light ( ) illumi-
nates, or when the coolant or hot
steams gush out of the engine
compartment, leave the engine
compartment opened, while run-
ning the engine.This is to ventilate
the engine compartment and to
cool down the engine.
6. Check the coolant temperature
gauge on the instrument cluster to
make sure the coolant temperature
is sufficiently cooled down. Check
the coolant level. When it is insuffi-
cient, check its connection with the
radiator, the heater hose, and the
water pump for any leakage.When
there is no leakage, add the
coolant. However, if the problems
persists, such as the illumination of
the warning lights, leakages, or the
cooling-fan malfunction, which may
overheat the engine, immediately
stop the engine, and have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE OOVVEERRHHEEAATTSS
OLFH064029L
6-8
What to do in an emergency
7. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. Then, if coolant has been
lost, carefully add coolant to the
reservoir to bring the fluid level in
the reservoir up to the halfway
mark.
8. Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er for assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indi-
cates a leak in the cooling sys-
tem and should be checked as
soon as possible by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
The electric motor for
the cooling fan may
continue to operate
or start up when the
engine is not running
and can cause serious injury.
Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from the rotating fan
blades of the cooling fan.
WARNING
Your vehicle is
equipped with a pres-
surized coolant
reserve tank. NEVER
remove the coolant
reserve tank cap or the radiator
drain plug while the engine and
radiator are HOT. Hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure, causing serious
injury.
Turn the engine off and wait
until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when remov-
ing the coolant reserve tank
cap. Wrap a towel or thick rag
around it, and turn it counter-
clockwise slowly to release
some of the pressure from the
system. Step back while the
pressure is released.
When you are sure all the pres-
sure has been released, contin-
ue turning the cap counter-
clockwise to remove it.
WARNING
6-9
What to do in an emergency
6
TTIIRREE PPRREESSSSUURREE MMOONNIITTOORRIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM ((TTPPMMSS))
(1) Low Tire Pressure / TPMS
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(2) Low Tire Pressure /
Tire Pressure Monitor /
TPMS Malfunction Display
(shown on the cluster LCD dis-
play)
Check tire pressure
• You can check the tire pressure in
the Information Mode on the clus-
ter.
Refer to the "User Settings
Mode" section in chapter 3.
• Tire pressure is displayed after a
few minutes of driving after initial
engine start up.
• If tire pressure is not displayed
when the vehicle is stopped, "Drive
to display" message will appear.
After driving, check the tire pres-
sure.
• The displayed tire pressure values
may differ from those measured
with a tire pressure gauge.
• You can change the tire pressure
unit in the User Settings Mode on
the cluster.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User
Settings Mode" section in
chapter 3).
OLF064003
OLF044147N
OLF044421L
6-10
What to do in an emergency
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver's responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
that will illuminate when the system
is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.This
sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pres-
sure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
tions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function proper-
ly.
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
WARNING
6-11
What to do in an emergency
6
Always check the TPMS malfunction
LCD display after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function proper-
ly.
If any of the below happens, have
the system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
1. The Low Tire Pressure TPMS
Malfunction Indicator does not
illuminate for 3 seconds when
the ignition switch is placed to
the ON position or engine is
running.
2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
remains illuminated after blink-
ing for approximately 1 minute.
3. The Low Tire Pressure LCD dis-
play remains illuminated
Low tire pressure
indicator
Low tire pressure
LCD display with
position indicator
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated and the warning message is
displayed on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. The LCD posi-
tion indicator will indicate which tire
is significantly under-inflated by illu-
minating the corresponding position
light.
If any of your tire pressures are indi-
cated as being low, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-
nering, and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side cen-
ter pillar outer panel.
If you cannot reach a service station
or if the tire cannot hold the newly
added air, replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire.
The Low Tire Pressure LCD position
indicator will remain on and the
TPMS Malfunction Indicator may
blink for one minute and then remain
illuminated until you have the low
pressure tire repaired and replaced
on the vehicle.
The spare tire is not equipped with
a tire pressure sensor.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OLF044147N
6-12
What to do in an emergency
TPMS Malfunction
Indicator
The TPMS Malfunction
Indicator will illuminate after it blinks
for approximately one minute when
there is a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, the individual tire pres-
sures in the cluster LCD display
will not be available. Have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
NOTICE
During winter or cold weather,
the TPMS indicator may illumi-
nate if the tire pressures were
set when the outside tempera-
ture was warm. As the outside
air becomes colder, the pres-
sure in the tires will decrease.
Similarly, if the outside air
becomes warmer, the pressure
in the tires will increase. As you
drive your vehicle, the tempera-
ture of the tires will heat up,
therefore the tire pressures will
increase. Check and adjust your
tire pressures regularly before
driving to make sure your vehi-
cle is operating at the correct
pressures as designed.
CAUTION
Low pressure damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
WARNING
6-13
What to do in an emergency
6
The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
may illuminate after blinking for
one minute if the vehicle is near
electric power supply cables or
radio transmitters such as police
stations, government and public
offices, broadcasting stations,
military installations, airports,
transmitting towers, etc.
Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction
Indicator may illuminate if snow
chains are used or electronic
devices such as computers, charg-
ers, remote starters, navigation,
etc.This may interfere with normal
operation of the TPMS.
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure and LCD position indicator
will come on. Have the flat tire
repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible or
replace the flat tire with the spare
tire.
The spare tire does not come with a
tire pressure monitoring sensor.
When the low pressure tire or the flat
tire is replaced with the spare tire,
the Low Tire Pressure LCD position
indicator will remain on. Also, the
TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illu-
minate after blinking for one minute if
the vehicle is driven at speed above
15.5 mph (25 km/h) for approximate-
ly 20 minutes.
Once the original tire equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring sensor is
reinflated to the recommended pres-
sure and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the Low Tire Pressure LCD position
indicator and TPMS Malfunction
Indicator will go off within a few min-
utes of driving.
If the indicators do not disappear
after a few minutes, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem (except for
the spare tire). You must use TPMS
specific wheels. It is recommended
that you always have your tires serv-
iced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
NOTICE
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by HYUNDAI
dealer to repair and/or inflate a
low pressure tire. Tire sealant
not approved by HYUNDAI deal-
er may damage the tire pressure
sensor.
CAUTION
6-14
What to do in an emergency
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
i
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually with light
force, and slowly move to a
safe position off the road.
WARNING
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING
6-15
What to do in an emergency
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix
to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The compressor and sealing com-
pound system effectively and com-
fortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails
or similar objects and reinflates the
tire.
After you ensure that the tire is prop-
erly sealed you can drive cautiously
on the tire (distance up to 120 miles
(200 km)) at a max.speed of (50mph
(80 km/h)) in order to reach a service
station or tire dealer for the tire
replacement.
IIFF YYOOUU HHAAVVEE AA FFLLAATT TTIIRREE
6
OLF064015
One sealant bottle for one tire
When two or more tires are flat,
do not use the tire mobility kit
because the supported one
sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is
only used for one flat tire.
CAUTION
Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls.This can result in an acci-
dent due to tire failure.
WARNING
Temporary fix
Have your tire repaired as soon
as possible. The tire may lose
air pressure at any time after
inflating with the Tire Mobility
Kit.
WARNING
OLFH064014
OLFP065014
■ Hybrid
■ Plug-in hybrid
6-16
It is possible that some tires, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step how to temporarily seal the
puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the safe use of the
Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires.Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the tire mobil-
ity kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-
cles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are dam-
aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 0.24 inch (6
mm).
Please contact the nearest
HYUNDAI dealership if the tire
cannot be made roadworthy with
the Tire Mobility Kit.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pres-
sure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 minutes at a
time or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below
-22°F (-30°C).
What to do in an emergency
6-17
What to do in an emergency
0. Speed restriction label
1.Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for power
outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. ON/OFF switch
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
8. Screw cap for reducing tire infla-
tion pressure
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Strictly follow the specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
6
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
OEL069020
Do not use the tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.
WARNING
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
WARNING
6-18
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Detach the speed restriction label
(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driv-
er not to drive too fast.
2. Screw the connection hose (9)
onto the connector of the sealant
bottle.
3. Ensure that the screw cap (8) is
closed.
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the flat tire and screw the
filling hose (2) of the sealant bottle
onto the valve.
What to do in an emergency
OLMF064104 OLF064017
6-19
What to do in an emergency
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing (4) of the compressor so
that the bottle is upright.
6. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7. Plug the compressor power cord
(3) into the vehicle power outlet.
8. With the ignition switch in the ON
position, switch on the compres-
sor and let it run for approximately
5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up
to proper pressure. (refer to the
Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The
inflation pressure of the tire after
filling is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the
tire and stay away from the tire
when filling it.
6
OLMF064105 OLF064019N
Securely install the sealant fill-
ing hose to the valve. If not,
sealant may flow backward,
possibly clogging the filling
hose.
CAUTION
OHY015012
6-20
9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
4~6miles (7~10km or about 10
minutes) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Checking the tire inflation pres-
sure
1. After driving approximately
4~6miles (7~10km or about
10 minutes), stop at a safe loca-
tion.
2. Connect hose (9) of the compres-
sor directly to the tire valve.
3. Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
What to do in an emergency
OLF064020
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by HYUNDAI
dealer to repair and/or inflate a
low pressure tire. Tire sealant
not approved by HYUNDAI deal-
er may damage the tire pressure
sensor.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 29 psi (200kpa). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
CAUTION
Do not leave your vehicle run-
ning in a poorly ventilated area
for extended periods of time.
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation can occur.
WARNING
6-21
What to do in an emergency
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recommended tire inflation.
With the ignition switched on, pro-
ceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure:
Switch on the compressor, posi-
tion to [I]. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure:
Loosen the screw cap (8) on the
compressor hose.
Information
The pressure gauge may show higher
than actual reading when the com-
pressor is running. To get an accurate
tire pressure, the compressor needs to
be turned off.
i
6
When you use the Tire Mobility
Kit including sealant not
approved by HYUNDAI, the tire
pressure sensors may be dam-
aged by sealant.The sealant on
the tire pressure sensor and
wheel should be removed when
you replace the tire with a new
one and inspect the tire pres-
sure sensors at an authorized
dealer.
CAUTION
6-22
What to do in an emergency
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
TTOOWWIINNGG
OLF064021N
A
B
C
Dolly
OLF064023
OLF064022
• Do not tow the vehicle with
the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
CAUTION
6-23
What to do in an emergency
6
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Place the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton in the ACC position.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
1. Open the trunk, and take the tow-
ing hooks out from the tool case.
2. Open the cover by pressing the
lower part on the front bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by rotating
it in a clock-wise direction until it is
securely installed.
4. After use, remove the towing hook
and close the cover.
Failure to place the transmis-
sion shift lever in N (Neutral)
may cause internal damage to
the transmission.
CAUTION
OLFH064025
OLFH064024
OLFP065024
■ Hybrid
■ Plug-in hybrid
6-24
What to do in an emergency
Emergency Towing
(if equipped)
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you to have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook at the rear of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle with a cable or chain. A
driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
Towing should be done only on a
solid ground for a short distance and
at a low speed.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
Always follow these emergency tow-
ing precautions:
• Place the Engine Start/Stop button
in the ACC position so the steering
wheel is not locked.
• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced braking perform-
ance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• Use a vehicle heavier than your
own to tow your vehicle.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
OLFH064026N
OLFH064027
■ Front
■ Rear
6-25
What to do in an emergency
• Use a towing cable or chain less
than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a
white or red cloth (about 12 inches
(30 cm) wide) in the middle of the
cable or chain for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so the towing cable
or chain remains tight during tow-
ing.
• Before towing, check the automat-
ic transmission for fluid leaks under
your vehicle.If the automatic trans-
mission fluid is leaking, flatbed
equipment or a towing dolly must
be used.
6
ODH063025
To avoid damage to your vehicle
and vehicle components when
towing:
• Always pull straight ahead
when using the towing hooks.
Do not pull from the side or at
a vertical angle.
• Do not use the towing hooks
to pull a vehicle out of mud,
sand or other conditions from
which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own
power.
• Limit the vehicle speed to 10
mph (15 km/h) and drive less
than 1 mile (1.5 km) when tow-
ing to avoid serious damage
to the automatic transmis-
sion.
CAUTION
6-26
IIFF AANN AACCCCIIDDEENNTT OOCCCCUURRSS
What to do in an emergency
• For your safety, do not touch
high voltage cables, connec-
tors and package modules.
High voltage components are
orange in color.
• Exposed cables or wires may
be visible inside or outside of
the vehicle. Never touch the
wires or cables, because an
electrical shock,an injury, or a
death may occur.
• Any gas or electrolyte leakage
from your vehicle is not only
poisonous but also flammable.
Upon witnessing one of those,
open the windows, and remain
a safe distance from the vehi-
cle out of the road. Immediately
contact an authorized Hyundai
dealer and advise them that a
hybrid vehicle is involved.
• If you need towing, refer to
"Towing" in the previous pages.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the vehicle is severely
damaged, remain a safe dis-
tance of 50 feet (15 meter) or
more between your vehicle
and other vehicles/flamma-
bles.
WARNING
If a fire occurs :
Upon witnessing any sparks,
gases, flames, or fuel leakage of
your vehicle, immediately call
911 or contact an authorized
HYNDAI dealer. Also, advise
them that a hybrid vehicle is
involved.
WARNING
When a submersion in water
occurs:
When your vehicle is flooded in
water, a high-voltage battery
may cause shock or may catch
on fire. Thus, turn the hybrid
system OFF, take the key in
your possession and move to a
safe place. Never attempt phys-
ical contact with your flooded
vehicle. Immediately contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
advise them that a hybrid vehi-
cle is involved.
WARNING
7
Maintenance
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment .............................................7-3
Maintenance services ...........................................7-4
Owner's responsibility......................................................7-4
Owner maintenance precautions ..................................7-4
Owner maintenance...............................................7-5
Owner maintenance schedule........................................7-6
Scheduled maintenance services.........................7-8
Normal maintenance schedule.......................................7-9
Maintenance under severe usage conditions..........7-22
Explanation of scheduled maintenance
items.......................................................................7-24
Engine oil ..............................................................7-27
Checking the engine oil level.......................................7-27
Checking the engine oil and filter ..............................7-28
Engine coolant/inverter coolant .......................7-29
Checking the engine/inverter coolant level.............7-29
Changing engine coolant...............................................7-32
Hybrid starter & generator (HSG) belt.............7-32
Checking the hybrid starter &
generator (HSG) belt......................................................7-32
Brake fluid ............................................................7-33
Checking the brake fluid level .....................................7-33
Washer fluid .........................................................7-34
Checking the washer fluid level ..................................7-34
Parking brake .......................................................7-34
Checking the parking brake .........................................7-34
Air cleaner ............................................................7-35
Filter replacement...........................................................7-35
Climate control air filter .....................................7-37
Filter inspection...............................................................7-37
Wiper blades.........................................................7-39
Blade inspection ..............................................................7-39
Blade replacement ..........................................................7-39
Battery...................................................................7-41
For best battery service................................................7-42
Battery recharging .........................................................7-42
Reset features .................................................................7-43
Tires and wheels..................................................7-44
Tire care............................................................................7-44
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures.............7-45
Check tire inflation pressure........................................7-46
Tire rotation .....................................................................7-47
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..............................7-48
Tire replacement .............................................................7-48
Wheel replacement .........................................................7-49
Tire traction......................................................................7-49
Tire maintenance ............................................................7-50
Tire sidewall labeling......................................................7-50
Tire terminology and definitions.................................7-54
7
7
All season tires ................................................................7-57
Summer tires ....................................................................7-57
Snow tires .........................................................................7-57
Radial-ply tires ................................................................7-58
Low aspect ratio tires....................................................7-58
Fuses......................................................................7-60
Instrument panel fuse replacement ...........................7-61
Engine compartment panel fuse replacement.........7-62
Fuse/relay panel description .......................................7-64
Light bulbs.............................................................7-80
Headlamp, parking lamp, turn signal lamp and
side marker light bulb replacement............................7-81
Side repeater lamp replacement .................................7-86
Rear combination light bulb replacement.................7-87
Back-up lamp...................................................................7-91
High mounted stop lamp ...............................................7-92
License plate light bulb replacement .........................7-92
Interior light bulb replacement ....................................7-92
Appearance care..................................................7-94
Exterior care ....................................................................7-94
Interior care......................................................................7-99
Emission control system ...................................7-102
Crankcase emission control system.........................7-102
Evaporative emission control system including
onboard refueling vapor recovery (ORVR) ............7-102
Exhaust emission control system .............................7-103
California perchlorate notice ...........................7-106
7-3
7
Maintenance
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Radiator cap
4. Engine coolant reservoir
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Air cleaner
7. Inverter coolant reservoir
8.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Fuse box
The actual engine compartment the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
OLFH014005K
7-4
Maintenance
MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Have your vehicle maintained and
repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer. An authorized HYUNDAI
dealer meets HYUNDAI’s high serv-
ice quality standards and receives
technical support from HYUNDAI in
order to provide you with a high level
of service satisfaction.
Owner's responsibility
Maintenance service and record
retention are the owner’s responsibil-
ity.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Owner’s Handbook &
Warranty Information booklet.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury. This
chapter provides instructions only for
the maintenance items that are easy
to perform. Several procedures can
be done only by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.
Your vehicle should not be modified
in any way. Such modifications may
adversely affect the performance,
safety or durability of your vehicle
and may, in addition, violate condi-
tions of the limited warranties cover-
ing the vehicle.
Certain modifications may also be in
violation of regulations established
by the U.S. Department of
Transportation and other federal or
state agencies.
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details,
read the separate Owner’s
Handbook & Warranty Information
booklet provided with the vehicle.
If you’re unsure about any service
or maintenance procedure, have it
done by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
NOTICE
7-5
7
Maintenance
OOWWNNEERR MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequen-
cies indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehi-
cle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance vehicle
checks are generally not covered by
warranties and you may be charged
for labor, parts and lubricants used.
Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be dangerous.
If you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, have it done by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer. ALWAYS
follow these precautions for
performing maintenance work:
• Park your vehicle on level
ground, move the shift lever
into the P (Park, for automatic
transmission vehicle) posi-
tion, apply the parking brake,
place the Engine Start/Stop
button in the OFF position.
• Block the tires (front and back)
to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
Remove loose clothing or jew-
elry that can become entan-
gled in moving parts.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• If you must run the engine
during maintenance, do so
out doors or in an area with
plenty of ventilation.
• Keep flames, sparks, or smok-
ing materials away from the
battery and fuel-related parts.
• When you open the engine
hood, turn the hybrid system
off. If not, It may result in death
or serious injury because of
the high voltage flow.
7-6
Maintenance
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Check for low or under-inflated
tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice if there is any
increased steering effort or loose-
ness in the steering wheel, or
change in its straight-ahead posi-
tion.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or "pulls" to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transmission
occurs, check the transmission
fluid level.
• Check the automatic transmission
P (Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare for tires
that are worn, show uneven wear,
or are damaged.
• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot.This may result in
coolant being blown out of the
opening and cause serious
burns and other injuries.
WARNING
7-7
7
Maintenance
At least twice a year:
(i.e., every Spring and Fall)
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check headlamp alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the seat belts for wear and
function.
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and hood
hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transmission linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS
Follow Normal maintenance schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply.
If any of the following conditions apply, you must follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 90°F (32°C).
For additional information or assistance see your authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
7-8
Normal maintenance schedule
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty.Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
7
Maintenance
7-9
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
(Continued)
Maintenance
7-10
22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
Normal maintenance schedule (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7
Maintenance
7-11
Normal maintenance schedule (CONT.)
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
3
❑ Inspect fuel cap, fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
3
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
*
3
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be mainte-
nance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this
maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are
some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction,
surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace
the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance sched-
ule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
7-12
Normal maintenance schedule (CONT.)
37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Air intake hoses
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7
Maintenance
7-13
Normal maintenance schedule (CONT.)
52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
3
❑ Inspect fuel cap, fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
3
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Replace HSG belt *
2
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months)
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
7-14
Normal maintenance schedule (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
*
3
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be mainte-
nance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this
maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are
some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction,
surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace
the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance sched-
ule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7
Maintenance
7-15
Normal maintenance schedule (CONT.)
75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
7-16
Normal maintenance schedule (CONT.)
90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
3
❑ Inspect fuel cap, fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
3
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
*
3
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be mainte-
nance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this
maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are
some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction,
surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace
the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance sched-
ule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7
Maintenance
7-17
Normal maintenance schedule (CONT.)
97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
7-18
Normal maintenance schedule (CONT.)
112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
3
❑ Inspect fuel cap, fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
3
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
(Continued)
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7
Maintenance
7-19
Normal maintenance schedule (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine coolant
(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Replace inverter coolant
(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
*
3
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be mainte-
nance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this
maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are
some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction,
surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace
the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance sched-
ule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
7-20
Normal maintenance schedule (CONT.)
135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7
Maintenance
7-21
Normal maintenance schedule (CONT.)
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transmission fluid
150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
3
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
3
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect HSG belt *
2
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❑ Air intake hose
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine coolant
(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Replace inverter coolant
(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
2
: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive
wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt
noise occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.
*
3
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be mainte-
nance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this
maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are
some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction,
surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace
the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance sched-
ule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
7-22
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Engine oil and filter R Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, K
Air cleaner filter R More frequently C, E
Spark plugs R More frequently B, H
Automatic transmission fluid R Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km)
A, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, K
HSG (Hybrid Starter&Generator) belt
R
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
or 24 months
C, D, E, L
I Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Front brake disc/pads, calipers I More frequently C, D, G, H
7
Maintenance
7-23
Severe driving conditions
A-Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km)
in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freez-
ing temperature
B-Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-
tances
C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-
spread roads
D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E-Driving in sandy areas
F-Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G-Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H-Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I -Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J -Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K-Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Rear brake disc/pads I More frequently C, D, G, F
Parking brake I More frequently C, D, G, H
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower
arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint
I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Drive shafts and boots I Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J
Climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
R More frequently C, E
7-24
Maintenance
EEXXPPLLAANNAATTIIOONN OOFF SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE IITTEEMMSS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
HSG (Hybrid starter & genera-
tor) belt
The HSG belt should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Fuel filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently. After
installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for
leaks at the connections. Fuel filters
should be installed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. Have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace any damaged or leak-
ing parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure a new vapor
hose or fuel filler cap is correctly
replaced.
Air cleaner filter
A genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter
is recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
7-25
7
Maintenance
Cooling system
Check cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Engine coolant/Inverter
coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Automatic transmission fluid
Automatic transmission fluid should
not be checked under normal usage
conditions. But in severe conditions,
the fluid should be changed at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accor-
dance to the scheduled maintenance
at the beginning of this chapter.
Automatic transmission fluid color
is basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transmission fluid will begin
to look darker. This is a normal
condition and you should not
judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between the MIN and the MAX
marks on the side of the reservoir.
Use only hydraulic brake fluid con-
forming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifi-
cation.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake pedal
and cables.
NOTICE
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transmission mal-
function and failure. Use only the
specified automatic transmission
fluid (refer to "Recommended
Lubricants and Capacities" in
chapter 8).
CAUTION
7-26
Maintenance
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
rioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-
nections or replace parts as neces-
sary.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and the
hybrid system off, check for exces-
sive free-play in the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.
7-27
7
Maintenance
EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer’s
precautions.
2. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground in P (Park) with the park-
ing brake set and the wheels
blocked.
3. Turn the engine on and allow the
engine to reach normal operating
temperature.
4. Turn the hybrid system off and
wait about five minutes for the oil
to return to the oil pan.
5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
6. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
7. If it is near or at L, add enough oil
to bring the level to F.
To prevent damage to your
engine:
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Add oil in small quantities and
recheck level to ensure engine
is not overfilled.
• Do not spill engine oil when
adding or changing engine oil.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine
components. Wipe off spilled oil
immediately
NOTICE
OLFH075002N
7-28
Maintenance
Use only the specified engine oil
(refer to "Recommended
Lubricants and Capacities" in
chapter 8).
Checking the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
according to the Maintenance
Schedule at the beginning of this
chapter.
NOTICE
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects
and reproductive harm. Used
engine oil may cause irritation
or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for pro-
longed periods of time. Always
protect your skin by washing
your hands thoroughly with
soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used
oil.
WARNING
OLFH074003
7-29
7
Maintenance
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOOOLLAANNTT//IINNVVEERRTTEERR CCOOOOLLAANNTT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the engine/inverter
coolant level
OLFH074005
OLFH074006
■ Radiator cap
■ Inverter coolant cap
Never remove the
radiator cap and/or
inverter coolant cap
or the drain plug
while the engine and
radiator are hot. Hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure, causing serious
injury.
Turn the hybrid system off and
wait until the engine cools
down. Use extreme care when
removing the radiator cap
and/or inverter coolant cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it,
and turn it counterclockwise
slowly to the first stop. Step
back while the pressure is
released from the cooling sys-
tem. When you are sure all the
pressure has been released,
press down on the cap, using a
thick towel, and continue turn-
ing counterclockwise to remove
it.
WARNING
7-30
Maintenance
Information
The engine coolant and/or inverter
coolant level is influenced by the
hybrid system temperature. Before
checking or refilling the engine
coolant and/or inverter coolant, turn
the hybrid vehicle off.
The electric motor for the cooling fan
is controlled by engine coolant tem-
perature, refrigerant pressure and
vehicle speed.As the engine coolant
temperature decreases, the electric
motor will automatically shut off.This
is a normal condition. If your vehicle
is equipped with GDI, the electric
motor for the cooling fan may begin
to operate at any time and continue
to operate until you disconnect the
negative battery cable.
Engine coolant
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between the F and the L marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir
when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water to bring
the level to the F mark, but do not
overfill. If frequent additions are
required, See an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling sys-
tem inspection.
i
The electric motor for
the cooling fan may
continue to operate
or start up when the
engine is not running
and can cause serious injury.
Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from the rotating fan
blades of the cooling fan.
WARNING
OLF074006N
7-31
7
Maintenance
Inverter coolant
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between the MAX and the MIN
marks on the side of the coolant
reservoir when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water to bring
the level to the MAX mark, but do not
overfill. If frequent additions are
required, we recommend that you
see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for a cooling system inspection.
Recommended coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water, distilled water or
soft water for your vehicle and
never mix hard water in the coolant
filled at the factory.
• An improper coolant mixture can
result in severe malfunction or
engine/ hybrid system damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an phosphate-based
ethylene glycol coolant to prevent
corrosion and freezing.
• Do not use alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
For mixing percentage, refer to the
following table:
Information
If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50%
water and 50% antifreeze mix is the
easiest to mix together as it will be the
same quantity of each. It is suitable to
use for most temperature ranges of -
31°F and higher.
i
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
5°F (-15°C) 35 65
-13°F (-25°C) 40 60
-31°F (-35°C) 50 50
-49°F (-45°C) 60 40
OLFH074006
7-32
Maintenance
Changing engine coolant
Have coolant changed by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
To prevent damage to engine
parts, put a thick towel around the
radiator cap before refilling the
coolant to prevent the coolant
from overflowing into engine
parts, such as the generator.
Checking the hybrid starter &
generator (HSG) belt
Have the hybrid starter & generator
(HSG) belt inspected or replaced
according to the Maintenance
Schedule in this chapter by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
HHYYBBRRIIDD SSTTAARRTTEERR && GGEENNEERRAATTOORR ((HHSSGG)) BBEELLTT
• Turn the vehicle off while you
inspect the engine or hybrid
starter & generator(HSG) belt.
Otherwise it may result in
serious injury.
• Keep hands, clothing etc.
away from the hybrid starter &
generator (HSG) belt.
WARNING
When the HSG belt is worn out
or damaged, replace the belt.
Otherwise, it may cause engine
overheating or battery dis-
charge.
CAUTION
Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Engine coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
Engine coolant may also cause
damage to paint and body trim.
WARNING
7-33
7
Maintenance
BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination.
If the level is low, add the specified
brake fluid to the MAX level.The level
will fall with accumulated mileage.
This is a normal condition associated
with the wear of the brake linings. If
the fluid level is excessively low, have
the brake system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle’s body paint, as
paint damage will result.
• Brake fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an
extended time should NEVER be
used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be dis-
posed of properly.
• Do not use the wrong kind of
brake fluid. A few drops of miner-
al based oil,such as engine oil,in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
Information
Use only the specified brake fluid
(refer to "Recommended Lubricants
and Capacities" in chapter 8).
i
NOTICE
OLFH074007
If the brake system requires fre-
quent additions of fluid this
could indicate a leak in the
brake system. Have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Do not allow brake fluid to come
in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid comes in contact
with your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least 15
minutes and get immediate
medical attention.
WARNING
7-34
Maintenance
WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD
Checking the washer fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
Checking the parking brake
Foot type
Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 44 lb (20 kg,
196 N) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
have the parking brake adjusted by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 3 notch
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE
ODH053142
To prevent serious injury or
death, take the following safety
precautions when using washer
fluid:
• Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Engine coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield and
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident or
damage to paint and body trim.
• Do not allow sparks or flame to
contact the washer fluid or the
washer fluid reservoir. Washer
fluid may contain alcohol and
can be flammable.
• Do not drink washer fluid and
avoid contact with skin.
Washer fluid is poisonous to
humans and animals.
• Keep washer fluid away from
children and animals.
WARNING
OLFH074008
7-35
7
Maintenance
AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR
Filter replacement
The air cleaner filter can be cleaned
for inspection using compressed air.
Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it,
as water will damage the filter.
If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be
replaced.
1. Remove the air cleaner filter cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Pull down the lever to the
UNLOCK position.
OLFH074009
OLFH074010 OLF074012
7-36
Maintenance
4. Replace the air cleaner filter. 5. Pull up the lever (1) to the LOCK
position.
6. Install the cover and make sure
the inner hooks bosses (2) are
hung on the hooks (3).
7. Check if the cover is firmly
installed.
Information
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-
ment more often than the usual rec-
ommended intervals (refer to
"Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions" in this chapter).
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed.This will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts,
use of non-genuine parts could
damage the air flow sensor.
NOTICE
i
OLF074013 OLF074101K
7-37
7
Maintenance
CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AAIIRR FFIILLTTEERR
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the
Maintenance Schedule.If the vehicle
is operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the fol-
lowing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
1. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides to
allow the glove box to hang freely
on the hinges.
2. Remove the support rod (1).
OLF074015 OLF074014
7-38
Maintenance
3. Remove the climate control air fil-
ter case by pulling out the right
side of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air fil-
ter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
Install a new climate control air fil-
ter in the correct direction with the
arrow symbol (
↓↓
) facing down-
wards.Otherwise, the climate con-
trol effects may decrease, possi-
bly with a noise.
NOTICE
OLFP075107NOLF074016
7-39
7
Maintenance
WWIIPPEERR BBLLAADDEESS
Blade inspection
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a clean
cloth dampened with washer fluid.
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, arms or other compo-
nents, do not:
• Use gasoline, kerosene, paint
thinner, or other solvents on or
near them.
• Attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• Use non-specified wiper blades.
Information
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manu-
ally.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper mal-
function and failure.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
NOTICE
7-40
Maintenance
1. Raise the wiper arm.
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it
may chip or crack the windshield.
2. Lift the wiper blade clip.Then push
down the blade body.
3. Install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
4. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
NOTICE
OLF074017 OLF074018
OLF074019
7-41
7
Maintenance
BBAATTTTEERRYY
• When you do not use the vehicle
for a long time in a low tempera-
ture area, disconnect the battery
and keep it indoors.
• Always charge the battery fully
to prevent battery case damage
in low temperature areas.
NOTICE
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always pres-
ent in battery cells, is
highly combustible, and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfu-
ric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get med-
ical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or when the Engine Start/Stop
button is in the ON position.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth
defects and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer.
Wash hands after handling.
WARNING
7-42
Maintenance
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled acid from the bat-
tery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
Battery recharging
Always follow these instructions
when recharging your vehicle’s
battery to avoid the risk of SERI-
OUS INJURY or DEATH from
explosions or acid burns:
• Before performing mainte-
nance or recharging the bat-
tery,turn off all accessories and
place the Engine Start/Stop
button to the OFF position.
• Keep all flames, sparks, or
smoking materials away from
the battery.
• Always work outdoors or in an
area with plenty of ventilation.
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
a well ventilated area.
(Continued)
WARNING
OLFH074011L
OLFP075011
■ Hybrid
■ Plug-in hybrid
7-43
7
Maintenance
By jump starting
After a jump start from a good bat-
tery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 min-
utes before it is shutoff. The vehicle
may not restart if you shut it off
before the battery had a chance to
adequately recharge. See "Jump
Starting" in chapter 6 for more infor-
mation on jump starting procedures.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health.
Dispose the battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
Reset features
Some items need to be reset after
the battery has been discharged or
the battery has been disconnected.
See chapter 3 for:
• Power Windows
• Trip Computer
• Climate Control System
• Clock
• Audio System
• Sunroof
i
(Continued)
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin boiling violently.
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected. Disconnect
the battery charger in the fol-
lowing order:
(1) Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
(2) Unhook the negative
clamp from the negative
battery terminal.
(3) Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery
terminal.
•
Always use a genuine HYUNDAI
approved battery when you
replace the battery.
7-44
Maintenance
TTIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
(Continued)
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are dam-
aged. Worn tires can cause
loss of braking effectiveness,
steering) control, or traction.
• ALWAYS replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recom-
mended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehi-
cle’s Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.
Tire failure may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident. To reduce risk of
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH,
take the following precautions:
• Inspect your tires monthly for
proper inflation as well as
wear and damage.
• The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can
be found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the dri-
ver’s side center pillar. Always
use a tire pressure gauge to
measure tire pressure. Tires
with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly caus-
ing poor handling.
• Check the pressure of the
spare every time you check
the pressure of the other tires
on your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING
7-45
7
Maintenance
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. "Cold tires" means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Warm tires normally exceed recom-
mended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6
psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air
from warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-inflat-
ed. For recommended inflation pres-
sure, refer to "Tire and Wheels" in
chapter 8.
Recommended pressures must
be maintained for the best ride,
vehicle handling, and minimum
tire wear.
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
could result in loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
Severe under-inflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident. This
risk is much higher on hot days
and when driving for long peri-
ods at high speeds.
WARNING
OLFH085007N
7-46
Maintenance
Check tire inflation pressure
Check your tires, including the spare
tire, once a month or more.
How to check
Use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to check tire pressure. You
can not tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflat-
ed when they are under-inflated.
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem.Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement.If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended pressure. Make sure to
put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or
moisture could get into the valve
core and cause air leakage.If a valve
cap is missing, install a new one as
soon as possible.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. Without the valve
cap, dirt or moisture could get into
the valve core and cause air leakage.
If a valve cap is missing, install a new
one as soon as possible.
• Under-inflation results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation is also
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Over-inflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread,
and a greater possibility of
damage from road hazards.
CAUTION
7-47
7
Maintenance
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI
recommends that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage.Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible.After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness (proper torque is
65-79 lb.ft [9-11 kg.m]).
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Information
The outside and inside of the unsym-
metrical tire is distinguishable. When
installing an unsymmetrical tire, be
sure to install the side marked "out-
side" face the outside. If the side
marked "inside" is installed on the
outside, it will have a bad effect on
vehicle performance.
i
ODH073802
■ Without a spare tire
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
WARNING
7-48
Maintenance
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Improper wheel weights can dam-
age your vehicle's aluminum
wheels. Use only approved wheel
weights.
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread.This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
NOTICE
OLMB073027
Tread wear indicator
To reduce the risk of DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effec-
tiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Always replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recom-
mended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehi-
cle’s Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.
(Continued)
WARNING
7-49
7
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
(Continued)
• When replacing tires (or
wheels), it is recommended to
replace the two front or two
rear tires (or wheels) as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
• Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, HYUNDAI recommends
that tires be replaced after six
(6) years of normal service.
• Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning may cause sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
The original tire should be
repaired or replaced as soon as
possible to avoid failure of the
spare and loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.The
compact spare tire is for emer-
gency use only. Do not operate
your vehicle over 50 mph (80
km/h) when using the compact
spare tire.
WARNING
7-50
Maintenance
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
2.Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
205/65R16 95H
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
95 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
OLMB073028
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
7-51
7
Maintenance
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one.The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.5JX16
6.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire.This symbol corresponds to that
tire’s designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN :Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over six years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1617 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2017.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maximum Speed
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
7-52
Maintenance
4.Tire ply composition and
material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D“ means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire.Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREAD wear 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
7-53
7
Maintenance
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Temperature - A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grade C
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, over-inflation,
or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination,
can cause heat build-up and
possible sudden tire failure.
This may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
WARNING
7-54
Maintenance
Tire terminology and defini-
tions
Air Pressure
The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight
This means the combined weight of
optional accessories. Some exam-
ples of optional accessories are auto-
matic transmission, power seats, and
air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio
The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt
A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the
tread.Cords may be made from steel
or other reinforcing materials.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires
wrapped by steel cords that hold the
tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire
A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of the
tread.
Cold Tire Pressure
The amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire
has built up heat from driving.
Curb Weight
This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional
equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings
A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in com-
pliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes
the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which
can also identify the tire manufactur-
er, production plant, brand and date
of production.
GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT
Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Front Axle.
GAWR RR
Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Rear axle.
7-55
7
Maintenance
Intended Outboard Sidewall
The side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure.
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer
as primarily intended for use on light-
weight trucks or multipurpose pas-
senger vehicles.
Load ratings
The maximum load that a tire is rated
to carry for a given inflation pressure.
Load Index
An assigned number ranging from 1
to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum air pressure to which
a cold tire may be inflated. The max-
imum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating
The load rating for a tire at the maxi-
mum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight
The number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution
Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall
An asymmetrical tire has a particular
side that faces outward when mount-
ed on a vehicle. The outward facing
sidewall bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) tire
A tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and multipur-
pose vehicles.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords
7-56
Maintenance
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber,
chemicals, fabric and steel or other
materials, that, when mounted on an
automotive wheel, provides the trac-
tion and contains the gas or fluid that
sustains the load.
Production options weight
The combined weight of installed
regular production options weighing
over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace,
not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, includ-
ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers,
roof rack, heavy duty battery, and
special trim.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Rim
A metal support for a tire and upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the
tread and the bead.
Speed Rating
An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction
The friction between the tire and the
road surface.The amount of grip pro-
vided.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
"wear bars", that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of
tread remains.
UTQGS
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards is a tire information sys-
tem that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight
The number of designated seating
positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68
kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage
load.
7-57
7
Maintenance
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire
Load on an individual tire due to curb
and accessory weight plus maximum
occupant and cargo weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and dividing by 2.
Vehicle Placard
A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equip-
ment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure.
All season tires
HYUNDAI specifies all season tires
on some models to provide good
performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on
some models to provide superior
performance on dry roads. Summer
tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer
tires do not have the tire traction rat-
ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
side wall. If you plan to operate your
vehicle in snowy or icy conditions,
HYUNDAI recommends the use of
snow tires or all season tires on all
four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.Snow
tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)
more air pressure than the pressure
recommended for the standard tires
on the tire label on the driver’s side of
the center pillar, or up to the maxi-
mum pressure shown on the tire
sidewall, whichever is less. Do not
drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h)
when your vehicle is equipped with
snow tires.
7-58
Maintenance
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combina-
tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling.The best rule to fol-
low is: Identical pairs of radial-ply
tires should always be used as a set
for the front tires and a set for the
rear tires.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval in this chapter to
achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
Low aspect ratio tires
Low aspect ratio tires, the aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because low aspect ratio tires are opti-
mized for handling and braking, their
sidewall is a little stiffer than a standard
tire. Also low aspect ratio tires tend to
be wider and consequently have a
greater contact patch with the road
surface. In some instances they may
generate more road noise compared
with standard tires.
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances.This may cause unusu-
al handling characteristics that
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
WARNING
7-59
7
Maintenance
Because the sidewall of a low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
a standard tire, the rim of the
wheel and the tire itself is more
easily susceptible to damage.
Use caution when driving and
follow the guidelines below to
help minimize damage to the
wheel and tire:
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
- If the tire is subjected to a
severe impact, have the tire
and wheel inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- Inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 1,800 miles
(3,000km).
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize tire
damage with your own eyes.
But if there is the slightest
hint of tire damage, have the
tire checked or replaced
because the tire damage may
cause air leakage from the
tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
CAUTION
7-60
Maintenance
FFUUSSEESS
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine com-
partment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted or broken.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel. Before replacing a blown
fuse, turn the engine and all switches
off, and then disconnect the negative
battery cable. Always replace a
blown fuse with one of the same rat-
ing.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem.Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and fusible link for higher
amperage ratings.
i
Normal
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
Blown
Normal
Blown
Normal
Blown
OLF074075
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
CAUTION
NEVER replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly
cause a fire.
• Do not install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
possibly a fire.
WARNING
Normal
Blown
■ Multi fuse
7-61
7
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse replace-
ment
1. Turn the hybrid system off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Open the fuse panel cover.
4. Refer to the label on the inside of
the fuse panel cover to locate the
suspected fuse location.
5. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the engine compartment fuses
panel.
6. Check the removed fuse; replace
it if it is blown. Spare fuses are
provided in the instrument panel
fuse panels (or in the engine com-
partment fuse panel).
7. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
In an emergency, if you do not have
a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same
rating from a circuit you may not
need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigarette lighter fuse.
If the headlamps or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced with the
same rating.
OLF074021
OLFH074012
7-62
Maintenance
Fuse switch
Always, place the fuse switch to the
ON position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as the
audio system and digital clock must
be reset and the smart key may not
work properly.
Information
If the fuse switch is OFF, the above
message will appear.
• Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving the
vehicle.
• Do not move the fuse switch
repeatedly. The fuse switch may
be damaged.
Engine compartment panel
fuse replacement
1. Turn the hybrid system off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tap and pulling up.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace
it if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
i
OLF074023 OLFH044149L
OLFH074015
7-63
7
Maintenance
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Information
If the main fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Information
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
i
OLFP075017N OLFH074014
7-64
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
Instrument panel fuse (Hybrid)
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to
the fuse box label.
i
OLFH075058N
OLF074027
7-65
7
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse (Hybrid)
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
SAFETY WINDOW LH 25A Driver Safety Power Window Module
P/SEAT PASS 30A Passenger Seat Manual Switch
P/WDW LH 20A Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Module LH
P/WDW RH 25A
Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Module RH, Passenger Door Module, Passenger
Power Window Switch
DR LOCK 20A Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (Two Turn Unlock Relay)
S/HEATER FRT 25A Front Air Ventilation Seat Module, Front Seat Warmer Module
BRAKE SWITCH 10A Stop Lamp Switch, Immobilizer Module, Smart Key Control Module
8
MODULE 7.5A BCM, Smart Key Control Module
SAFETY POWER
WINDOW RH
25A Passenger Safety Power Window Module
BATTERY
MANAGEMENT
10A BMS Control Module
SMART KEY 15A Smart Key Control Module
TRUNK 10A Trunk Lid Relay, Fuel Filler Door & Trunk Lid Switch
7
MODULE 10A
Driver/Passenger Door Module, Rear Parking Assist Sensor, Electric Parking Brake Module, Digital
Clock, Blind Spot Detection Radar
INTERIOR LAMP 10A
Glove Box Lamp, Foot Lamp IND., Driver/Passenger Foot Lamp, Front Vanity Lamp Switch LH/RH,
Overhead Console Lamp, Room Lamp, Rear Personal Lamp LH/RH, Trunk Room Lamp,
Driver/Passenger Door Lamp
2
MEMORY 7.5A Electro Chromic Mirror
P/SEAT DRV 30A Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver IMS Module
CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster
7-66
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
4
MODULE 10A Smart Key Control Module
MULTI MEDIA 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, TMU Unit
1
MEMORY 10A
Driver/Passenger Door Module, Driver Ims Module, A/C Control Module, Auto Light & Photo Sensor,
Rear Curtain Unit, Data Link Connector, Instrument Cluster, Rain Sensor, Tire Pressure Monitoring
Module, BCM, Digital Clock, ICM Relay Box (Outside Mirror Folding/Unfolding Relay)
S/HEATER RR 25A Rear Seat Warmer Module
2
SUN ROOF 20A Panorama Sunroof Motor
9
MODULE 7.5A
Front Air Ventilation Seat Module, Front Seat Warmer Module, Rear Seat Warmer Module, Rear
Curtain Unit
MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit
3
MODULE 10A BCM, Sport Mode Switch, Stop Lamp Switch
STOP LAMP 20A Stop Signal Electronic Module
1MODULE 7.5A
Natural Vacuum Leak Detection, Active Air Flap, Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle,
Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, Driver/Passenger Door Module
1
SUN ROOF 20A Panorama Sunroof Motor
A/CON 7.5A A/C Control Module, E/R Junction Block (RLY. 3 - Blower Relay), Electronic A/C Compressor
2MODULE 10A
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, TMU Unit, Digital Clock, BCM, AMP, Power Outside Mirror
Switch, Digital Clock, Smart Key Control Module, Overhead Console Lamp
A/BAG IND 7.5A Instrument Cluster
6
MODULE 10A
Multipurpose Check Connector, TMU Unit, A/C Control Module, Vess Unit, Electro Chromic Mirror,
Rear Seat Warmer Module, A/T Shift Lever Ind., Front Air Ventilation Seat Module, Front Seat
Warmer Module, Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Module, Head Lamp LH/RH, Crash Pad Switch,
A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Driver Ims Module
AMP 25A AMP (JBL/MOBIS)
Instrument panel fuse (Hybrid)
7-67
7
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
HTD STRG 15A BCM
5
MODULE 10A
Front Console, Switch Fuel Filler Door & Trunk Lid Switch, Front Parking Assist Sensor, Tire Pressure
Monitoring Module, Lane Departure Warning Unit, Smart Cruise Control Unit, Active Air Flap, BMS
Control Module
IG1 25A PCB Block (Fuse - F1/F2/F7/F8/F15/F16)
WASHER 15A Multifunction Switch (Wiper Low & Washer Switch)
POWER OUTLET 20A Front Power Outlet
A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Occupant Detection Sensor
START 7.5A Transmission Range Switch, HPCU
Instrument panel fuse (Hybrid)
Instrument panel fuse
(Plug-in hybrid)
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to
the fuse box label.
i
7-68
Maintenance
OLF074027
OLFP075058N
7-69
7
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse (Plug-in hybrid)
Fuse rating Fuse Name Protected Component
SAFETY POWER
WINDOW LH
25A Driver Safety Power Window Module
P/SEAT
PASS
30A Passenger Seat Manual Switch
P/WDW LH 20A Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Module LH
P/WDW RH 25A
Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Module RH, Passenger Door Module,
Passenger Power Window Switch
DR LOCK 20A Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (Two Turn Unlock Relay)
S/HEATER
FRT
25A Front Air Ventilation Seat Module, Front Seat Warmer Module
BRAKE
SWITCH
10A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module
8
MODULE 7.5A BCM, Smart Key Control Module
SAFETY POWER
WINDOW RH
25A Passenger Safety Power Window Module
BATTERY
MANAGEMENT
10A BMS Control Module
SMART
KEY
15A Smart Key Control Module
TRUNK 10A Trunk Lid Relay, ICM Relay Box (Fuel Filler Relay)
7
MODULE 10A
Driver/Passenger Door Module, Rear Parking Assist Sensor, Digital Clock,
Electric Parking Brake Module, Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH
INTERIOR
LAMP
10A
Glove Box Lamp, Front Vanity Lamp Switch LH/RH, Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp,
Rear Personal Lamp LH/RH, Trunk Room Lamp, Driver/Passenger Door Lamp
2
MEMORY 7.5A Not Used
7-70
Maintenance
Fuse rating Fuse Name Protected Component
P/SEAT
DRV
30A Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver IMS Module
CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster
4
MODULE 10A Smart Key Control Module
MULTI MEDIA 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, TMU Unit
1
MEMORY 10A
Driver/Passenger Door Module, Driver IMS Module, A/C Control Module, Auto Light & Photo Sensor,
Data Link Connector, Instrument Cluster, Rain Sensor, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, BCM, Digital Clock
S/HEATER
RR
25A Rear Seat Warmer Module
2
SUNROOF 20A Panorama Sunroof Motor
9
MODULE 7.5A Front Air Ventilation Seat Module, Front Seat Warmer Module, Rear Seat Warmer Module
MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit
3
MODULE 10A BCM, Sport Mode Switch, Stop Lamp Switch
STOP LAMP 20A Stop Signal Electronic Module
1
MODULE 7.5A
Active Air Flap, Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror,
Driver/Passenger Door Module
1
SUNROOF 20A Panorama Sunroof Motor
A/CON 7.5A A/C Control Module, E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay, PTC Heater 1/2 Relay), Electronic A/C Compressor
2
MODULE 10A
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, TMU Unit, Overhead Console Lamp BCM, AMP,
Power Outside Mirror Switch, Digital Clock, Smart Key Control Module
A/BAG
IND
7.5A Instrument Cluster
Instrument panel fuse (Plug-in hybrid)
7-71
7
Maintenance
Fuse rating Fuse Name Protected Component
6
MODULE 10A
Multipurpose Check Connector, TMU Unit, A/C Control Module, Vess Unit, Electro Chromic Mirror,
Rear Seat Warmer Module, A/T Shift Lever IND., Front Air Ventilation Seat Module,
Front Seat Warmer Module, Driver IMS Module, ICM Relay Box (IG3 #1 Relay)
AMP 25A AMP (JBL/MOBIS)
HTD STRG 15A BCM
5
MODULE 10A
Front Console, Switch Fuel Filler Door & Trunk Lid Switch, Active Air Flap Tire Pressure Monitoring Module,
Lane Departure Warning Unit, Smart Cruise Control Unit
IG1 25A PCB Block (Fuse - TCU 2/HEV ECU 2/OPCU 2/AHB 3)
WASHER 15A Multifunction Switch (Wiper Low & Washer Switch)
POWER OUTLET 20A Cigarette Lighter
GATEWAY 10A Gateway
A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Occupant Detection Sensor
IG3 15A ICM Relay Box (IG3 #1/2/3 Relay)
START 7.5A Transaxle Range Switch, HPCU
Instrument panel fuse (Plug-in hybrid)
7-72
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Hybrid)
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to
the fuse panel label.
i
OLFP076057N
OLFH074016
7-73
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel (Hybrid)
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
MULTI
FUSE
(TYPE A)
IG2 30A IGPM (Fuse - F8/F25/F31/F38/F42)
BLOWER 40A RLY. 9 (Blower Relay)
2
AHB 40A Integrated Brake Actuation Unit
1
AHB 40A Integrated Brake Actuation Unit
REAR HEATED 50A RLY. 12 (Rear Heated Relay)
3
B+ 50A IGPM (IPS2 (4CH), IPS3 (4CH), Fuse - F28/F29)
5
B+ 50A PCM Block (Fuse - F4/F5/F6/F13/F14/F18/F22, Engine Control Relay)
EEWP 60A Electric Water Pump
1
MDPS 80A MDPS Unit
MULTI
FUSE
(TYPE B)
IG1 40A IGPM (Fuse - F14/F19/F20/F26/F27/F33/F34/F40/F41/F47/F46)
POWER OUTLET 40A RLY. 10 (Power Outlet Relay)
2
B+
50A IGPM (IPS1 (4CH), IPS4 (4CH), IPS5 (4CH), Fuse - F36/F42)
1
B+ 60A IGPM (Fuse - F1/F2/F10/F13/F17/F18/F23/F24/F30, Power Window Relay)
COOLING FAN 60A RLY.2 (Cooling Fan Relay)
FUSE
DEICER 20A RLY. 6 (Deicer Relay)
1
OPCU 20A Electric Oil Pump Unit
1
HEV ECU 10A HPCU
7-74
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
FUSE
H/LAMP HI 20A RLY. 7 (Head Lamp High Relay)
4
B+ 40A IGPM (Leak Current Autocut Device Fuse - F15/F16/F21/F22, Fuse - F5/F6/F7/F11/F12)
2
EPB 30A Electric Parking Brake Module
1
EPB 30A Electric Parking Brake Module
HEATED MIRROR 10A A/C Control Module, Drover/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
3
ECU 10A PCM
2
HEV ECU 10A HPCU
1
POWER OUTLET 20A Cigarette Lighter
FUEL PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Relay
HORN 20A Horn Relay, ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Horn Relay)
WIPER 30A Front Wiper (Low) Relay, Front Wiper (High) Relay
2
TCU 15A Transmission Range Switch, Electric Water Pump
3
AHB 10A Integrated Brake Actuation Unit
2
POWER OUTLET 20A Rear Power Outlet
B/UP LAMP 10A
Transmission Range Switch, PCM, Audio, Electro Chromic Mirror, Back-Up Lamp LH/RH,
Rear Curtain Unit
1
SENSOR 15A Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down)
2
SENSOR 10A
E/R Junction Block (RLY. 2 - Cooling Fan Relay), Mass Air Flow Sensor,
Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve,
Camshaft Position Sensor #1/#2, Fuel Pump Relay
2
ECU 10A PCM
Engine compartment main fuse panel (Hybrid)
7-75
7
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
FUSE
1
TCU 10A PCM
1
OPCU 10A Electric Oil Pump Unit
EWP 10A Electric Water Pump
BATTERY C/FAN 15A E/R Junction Block (RLY. 5 (Battery C/FAN))
1
ECU 20A PCM
IGN COIL 20A Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4
AMS 10A Battery Sensor
Engine compartment main fuse panel (Hybrid)
Engine compartment main fuse
panel (Plug-in hybrid)
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to
the fuse panel label.
i
7-76
Maintenance
OLFP075105N
OLF074028
7-77
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel (Plug-in hybrid)
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
MULTI FUSE
(TYPE A)
IG2 30A PCB Block (IG2 Relay)
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
2
AHB 40A Integrated Brake Actuation Unit, Multipurpose Check Connector
1
AHB 40A Integrated Brake Actuation Unit, Multipurpose Check Connector
REAR
HEATED
50A Rear Heated Relay
3
B+ 50A IGPM (IPS2 (4CH), IPS3 (4CH), Fuse - STOP LAMP/MODULE 1)
5
B+ 50A
PCM Block (Fuse - WIPER/HORN/BATTERY C/FAN/AMS/TCU 1/ECU 2/FUEL PUMP,
Engine Control Relay)
EEWP 60A Electric Water Pump
MDPS 80A MDPS Unit
MULTI FUSE
(TYPE B)
IG1 40A PCB Block (IG1 Relay)
3
POWER
OUTLET
40A Power Outlet Relay
2
PTC
HEATER
50A PTC Heater 2 Relay
1
PTC
HEATER
50A PTC Heater 1 Relay
2
B+ 50A IGPM (IPS1 (4CH), IPS4 (4CH), IPS5 (4CH), Fuse - IG3/AMP)
1
B+ 60A
IGPM (Fuse - P/SEAT DRV/P/SEAT PASS/S/HEATER RR/SUNROOF 1/
SUNROOF 2/SAFETY POWER WINDOW LH/ SAFETY POWER WINDOW RH/TRUNK,
Power Window Relay)
COOLING
FAN
60A Cooling Fan Relay
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
FUSE
2
IG3 10A
IGPM (Gateway), Instrument Cluster, BMS Control Module (Main/Sub), Battery
Expansion Module Sensor Swtich (Main), Transaxle Range Switch, PCM, HPCU,
Charge Indicator, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
1
IG3 10A Electric Water Pump (HEV)
OBC 10A OBC Unit
DEICER 20A Deicer Relay
1
OPCU 20A Electric Oil Pump Unit
1
HEV ECU 10A HPCU
H/LAMP HI 20A Head Lamp Hi Relay
4
B+ 40A
IGPM (Leak Current Autocut Device Fuse - INTERIOR LAMP/MEMORY 1/MEMORY 2/
MULTI MEDIA, Fuse -BRAKE SWITCH/SMART KEY/S/HEATER FRT/
BATTERY MANAGEMENT/DR LOCK)
2
EPB 30A Electric Parking Brake Module
1
EPB 30A Electric Parking Brake Module
3
IG3 10A OBC Unit
HEATED
MIRROR
10A A/C Control Module, Drover/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
Engine compartment main fuse panel (Plug-in hybrid)
7-78
7-79
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel (Plug-in hybrid) - PCB Block
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected Component
2
HEV
ECU
10A HPCU
1
POWER
OUTLET
20A Front Power Outlet
FUEL PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Relay
HORN 20A Horn Relay, ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Horn Relay)
WIPER 30A Front Wiper (Low) Relay, Front Wiper (High) Relay
2
TCU 15A Electric Water Pump
3
AHB 10A Integrated Brake Actuation Unit
2
POWER
OUTLET
20A Rear Power Outlet
B/UP LAMP 10A Transaxle Range Switch, PCM, Audio, Electro Chromic Mirror, Back-Up Lamp LH/RH
1
SENSOR 15A Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down)
2
SENSOR 10A
E/R Junction Block (FTIV Relay, Cooling Fan Relay), Mass Air Flow Sensor, Oil Control Valve #1/#2,
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Fuel Pump Relay ELCM (Evaporative Leak Check Module),
Camshaft Position Sensor #1/#2
2
ECU 10A PCM
1
TCU 10A PCM
2
OPCU 10A Electric Oil Pump Unit
BATTERY
C/FAN
15A E/R Junction Block (Battery C/FAN Relay)
1
ECU 20A PCM
IGN COIL 20A Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4
AMS 10A Battery Sensor
7-80
Maintenance
LLIIGGHHTT BBUULLBBSS
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to replace most vehicle light
bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle
light bulbs because other parts of the
vehicle must be removed before you
can get to the bulb.This is especially
true for removing the headlamp
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlamp
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
Information
After heavy driving, rain or washing,
headlamp and trunk lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused
by the temperature difference
between the lamp inside and the out-
side temperature. This is similar to the
condensation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and does-
n’t indicate a problem with your vehi-
cle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
i
• Prior to replacing a lamp,
depress the foot brake, move
the shift lever into P (Park)
apply the parking brake, place
the igntion switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, and take
the key with you when leaving
the vehicle to avoid sudden
movement of the vehicle and
to prevent possible electric
shock.
• Be aware the bulbs may be hot
and may burn your fingers.
WARNING
7-81
7
Maintenance
Headlamp, parking lamp,
turn signal lamp and side
marker light bulb replacement
Type A – Halogen Headlamps
(1) Headlamp (Low)
(2) Headlamp (High)
(3) Side marker lamp
(4) Turn signal lamp
(5) LED Daytime running lamp(DRL)
/Parking lamp
Headlamp (Halogen bulb)
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids.
• Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the
bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
• A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
OLFH074018L
OLMB073042L
• Handle halogen bulbs with
care. Halogen bulbs contain
pressurized gas that will pro-
duce flying pieces of glass
that could cause injuries if
broken.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before han-
dling it.
WARNING
7-82
Maintenance
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
5. Unsnap the headlamp bulb retain-
ing wire by pressing the end and
pushing it upward.
6. Remove the bulb from the head-
lamp assembly.
7. Install a new headlamp bulb and
snap the headlamp bulb retaining
wire into position by aligning the
wire with the groove on the bulb.
8. Connect the headlamp bulb sock-
et-connector.
9. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Information
The headlamp aiming should be
adjusted after an accident or after the
headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
OLFH074030L
High beam
Low beam
7-83
7
Maintenance
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5. Install a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7. Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Side marker lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pulling out the bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
OLF074084NOLFH074030
Turn signal lamp
7-84
Maintenance
Daytime running lamp/
Parking lamp (LED type)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Type B – HID Headlamps
(1) Headlamp (Low/High)
(2) Side marker lamp
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) LED Daytime running lamp(DRL)
/Parking lamp
Headlamp (HID type)
Information
If your vehicle is equipped with High
Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps,
these headlamps contain mercury. So
if you need to have your vehicle dis-
posed, you should remove the HID
Headlamps before disposal. The
removed HID headlamps should be
recycled, re-used or disposed as haz-
ardous waste.
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
OLFH074018L
HID Headlamp low beam
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb) due to electric shock dan-
ger. If the low beam (XENON
bulb) is not working, have your
vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI Dealer.
WARNING
7-85
7
Maintenance
Information
HID lamps have superior perform-
ance vs. halogen bulbs.
HID lamps are estimated by the man-
ufacturer to last twice as long or
longer than halogen bulbs depending
on their frequency of use. They will
probably require replacement at some
point in the life of the vehicle. Cycling
the headlamps on and off more than
typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent
lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a
period of operation but will immedi-
ately relight when the headlamp
switch is cycled it is likely the HID
lamp needs to be replaced. HID light-
ing components are more complex
than conventional halogen bulbs thus
have higher replacement cost.
The headlamp aiming should be
adjusted after an accident or after
the headlamp assembly is rein-
stalled at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5. Install a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7. Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
NOTICE
i
OLFH074031
Turn signal lamp
7-86
Maintenance
Side marker lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pulling out the bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
Daytime running lamp/
Parking lamp (LED type)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Side repeater lamp replace-
ment
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLF074084N
OLF074053N
7-87
7
Maintenance
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
Type A
(1) Stop/Tail lamp
(2) Turn signal lamp
(3) Tail lamp
(4) Side marker lamp
Stop/Tail lamp and Turn signal lamp
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the service cover by turn-
ing the lock counterclockwise and
then pulling it out.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5. Install a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
OLF074062
OLFH074019
OLFH074026LE
Stop/Tail lamp
Turn Signal lamp
7-88
Maintenance
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Tail lamp
1. Open the trunk.
2. Loosen the retaining screw of the
trunk lid cover and then remove
the cover.
3. Disconnect the connector and
then remove the screws by turning
the screws counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
5. Install a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket into the assem-
bly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the assem-
bly. Push the socket into the
assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
7. Reinstall the trunk lid cover by
pushing in the screw.
OLFH074026LOLFH074064
Tail lamp
7-89
7
Maintenance
Side marker lamp
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Type B
(1) Stop/Tail lamp
(2) Turn signal lamp
(3) Side marker lamp
Stop/Tail lamp
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLFH074023
7-90
Maintenance
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the service cover by turn-
ing the lock counterclockwise and
then pulling it out.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5. Install a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
OLF074062 OLFH074027
Turn signal lamp
7-91
7
Maintenance
Side marker lamp
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Back-up lamp
1. Turn off the hybrid system.
2. Remove the under cover by rotat-
ing the screws.
3. Reach your hand into the back of
the rear bumper.
4. Disconnect the power connector
from the socket.
5. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the housing.
6. Install a new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on
the socket with the slots in the
housing. Push the socket into the
housing and turn the socket clock-
wise.
7. Connect the power connector to
the socket.
OLFH074028
7-92
Maintenance
High mounted stop lamp
1. Remove the rear seat cushion
assembly.
2. Remove the rear seat back assem-
bly.
3. Slightly remove the rear door
weather-strip.
4. Remove the rear door scuff trim.
5. Remove the rear pillar trim.
6. Remove the rear seat belt lower
anchor.
7. Remove the rear package tray trim.
8. Remove the high mounted stop
lamp after disengaging the mount-
ing clip.
9. Install a new LED lamp.
License plate light bulb
replacement
1. Loosen the lens retaining screws
with a philips head screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with
the lens retaining screws.
Interior light bulb replacement
Map lamp and Room lamp
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLF074080N
OLF074068
■ Map lamp - with sunroof
■ Room lamp - with sunroof
OLFH074020
OLFH074021
7-93
7
Maintenance
1. Using a flat-head screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interi-
or light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interi-
or light housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
If the lamps do not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Use care not to dirty or damage
lenses, lens tabs, and plastic
housings.
NOTICE
■ Map lamp - without sunroof
OLF074081N
OLF074082N
■ Vanity mirror lamp
■ Trunk room lamp
OLF074069
OLF074056
■ Room lamp - without sunroof
Map lamp, Room lamp,Vanity mirror lamp and Luggage room lamp
7-94
Maintenance
AAPPPPEEAARRAANNCCEE CCAARREE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Protecting your vehicle's finish
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, should be
used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-
ish.
• Do not use strong soap,
chemical detergents or hot
water, and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight or
when the body of the vehicle
is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through
the windows and wet the inte-
rior.
• To prevent damage to the
plastic parts, do not clean
with chemical solvents or
strong detergents.
CAUTION
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water before getting on the
road. If braking performance is
impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
WARNING
7-95
7
Maintenance
Waxing
A good coat of wax provides a barri-
er between your paint and environ-
mental contamination.
Keeping a good coat of wax on your
vehicle will help protect it.
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
OLMB073082
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, or strong deter-
gents containing highly alka-
line or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may
result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause dis-
coloration or paint deteriora-
tion.
CAUTION
7-96
Maintenance
Repairing your vehicle's finish
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body
shop applies anti-corrosion mate-
rials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, accelerat-
ed rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end of
each winter. Pay special attention to
these areas because it is difficult to
see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down the
road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels,
and frame members have drain holes
that should not be allowed to clog with
dirt; trapped water in these areas can
cause rusting.
NOTICE
7-97
7
Maintenance
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, HYUNDAI produces cars
of the highest quality.However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner’s
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water.If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
WARNING
• Do not use abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent,
or wire brushes on aluminum
wheels.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neu-
tral detergent, and rinse thor-
oughly with water. Also, clean
the wheels after driving on
salted roads.
• Do not wash the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any cleaners con-
taining acid or alkaline deter-
gents.
CAUTION
7-98
Maintenance
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehi-
cle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the car surfaces by moisture
that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it is slow to dry and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other mate-
rials.This applies not only to the vis-
ible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is partic-
ularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
7-99
7
Maintenance
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, pay particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accel-
erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don’t park your car in a damp, poor-
ly ventilated garage. This creates a
favorable environment for corrosion.
This is particularly true if you wash
your vehicle in the garage or drive it
into the garage when it is still wet or
covered with snow, ice or mud. Even
a heated garage can contribute to
corrosion unless it is well ventilated
so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings are highly corrosive
and may damage painted surfaces in
just a few hours. Always remove bird
droppings as soon as possible.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as
perfume and cosmetic oil, from con-
tacting the interior parts because
they may cause damage or discol-
oration. If they do contact the interior
parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions for the proper
way to clean vinyl.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
• When cleaning leather prod-
ucts (steering wheel, seats
etc.), use neutral detergents
or low alcohol content solu-
tions. If you use high alcohol
content solutions or acid/
alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the
surface may get stripped off.
CAUTION
7-100
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and
interior trim
Vinyl (if equipped)
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric (if equipped)
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Leather (if equipped)
• Feature of Seat Leather
- Leather is made from the outer
skin of an animal, which goes
through a special process to be
available for use. Since it is a nat-
ural object, each part differs in
thickness or density.
Wrinkles may appear as a natural
result of stretching and shrinking
depending on the temperature
and humidity.
- The seat is made of stretchable
fabric to improve comfort.
- The parts contacting the body are
curved and the side supporting
area is high which provides driv-
ing comfort and stability.
- Wrinkles may appear naturally
from usage. It is not a fault of the
products.
Using anything but recom-
mended cleaners and proce-
dures may affect the fabric’s
appearance and fire-resistant
properties.
CAUTION
• Wrinkles or abrasions which
appear naturally from usage
are not covered by warranty.
• Belts with metallic acces-
sories, zippers or keys inside
the back pocket may damage
the seat fabric.
• Make sure not to wet the seat.
It may change the nature of
natural leather.
• Jeans or clothes which could
bleach may contaminate the
surface of the seat covering
fabric.
CAUTION
• Caring for the leather seats
- Vacuum the seat periodically to
remove dust and sand on the seat.
It will prevent abrasion or damage
of the leather and maintain its qual-
ity.
- Wipe the natural leather seat cover
often with dry or soft cloth.
- Use of proper leather protective
may prevent abrasion of the cover
and helps maintain the color. Be
sure to read the instructions and
consult a specialist when using
leather coating or protective agent.
- Light colored (beige, cream beige)
leather is easily contaminated and
the stain is noticeable. Clean the
seats frequently.
- Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may
cause the surface to crack.
• Cleaning the leather seats
- Remove all contaminations
instantly. Refer to instructions
below for removal of each contam-
inant.
- Cosmetic products (sunscreen,
foundation, etc.)
Apply cleansing cream on a cloth
and wipe the contaminate spot.
Wipe off the cream with a wet cloth
and remove water with a dry cloth.
- Beverages (coffee, soft drink, etc.)
Apply a small amount of neutral
detergent and wipe until contami-
nations do not smear.
- Oil
Remove oil instantly with
absorbable cloth and wipe with
stain remover used only for natural
leather.
- Chewing gum
Harden the gum with ice and
remove gradually.
Cleaning the seat belt webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
the seat belt.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
7-101
7
Maintenance
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
CAUTION
7-102
Maintenance
EEMMIISSSSIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the Owner’s
Handbook & Warranty Information
booklet in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance with the maintenance
schedule in this manual.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control
system including onboard
refueling vapor recovery
(ORVR)
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere. The ORVR system is
designed to allow the vapors from
the fuel tank to be loaded into a can-
ister while refueling at the gas sta-
tion, preventing the escape of fuel
vapors into the atmosphere.
For the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from
ESC activation during
dynamometer testing, turn the
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system off by pressing
the ESC switch (ESC OFF
light illuminated).
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC sys-
tem back on by pressing the
ESC switch again.
CAUTION
7-103
7
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister.When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
When the engine starts or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to the
emission system.
Vehicle modifications
• This vehicle should not be modi-
fied. Modification of your vehicle
could affect its performance, safety
or durability and may even violate
governmental safety and emis-
sions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifi-
cation may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire.For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
Engine exhaust (carbon monox-
ide) precautions
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes. If you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind in
your vehicle, drive with all the win-
dows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
WARNING
7-104
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for cat-
alytic converters (if equipped)
The exhaust system and cat-
alytic converter are very hot
during and immediately after
the engine has been running.To
avoid SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
• Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flamma-
ble objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Keep away from the exhaust
system and catalytic convert-
er or you may get burned.
Also, Do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle, and do not coat
the vehicle for corrosion con-
trol. It may present a fire risk
under certain conditions.
WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
and parts, including compo-
nents found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chem-
icals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
WARNING
7-105
7
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle, take
the following precautions:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL
for gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle
when there are signs of
engine malfunction, such as
misfire or a noticeable loss of
performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse
are coasting with the hybrid
system off and descending
steep grades in gear with the
engine off.
• Do not operate the engine at
high idle speed for extended
periods (5 minutes or more).
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
• Do not modify or tamper with
any part of the engine or
emission control system. All
inspections and adjustments
must be made by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with extremely
low fuel level. If you run out of
gasoline, it could cause the
engine to misfire and result in
excessive loading of the cat-
alytic converter.
CCAALLIIFFOORRNNIIAA PPEERRCCHHLLOORRAATTEE NNOOTTIICCEE
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries,
must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).
Maintenance
7-106
888
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
8
Dimensions..............................................................8-2
Engine......................................................................8-2
Bulb Wattage ..........................................................8-3
Tires and Wheels ...................................................8-4
Volume and Weight................................................8-5
Air Conditioning System........................................8-5
Recommended Lubricants and Capacities..........8-6
Recommended SAE Viscosity Number.........................8-7
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...................8-8
Vehicle Certification Label....................................8-8
Tire Specification and Pressure Label................8-9
Engine Number.......................................................8-9
Refrigerant Label...................................................8-9
Consumer Information.........................................8-10
Reporting Safety Defects ...................................8-11
DDIIMMEENNSSIIOONNSS
8-2
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
EENNGGIINNEE
Items in (mm)
Overall length 191.1 (4,855)
Overall width 73.4 (1,865)
Overall height 57.87 (1,470)
Front tread
205/65R16* 63.5 (1,614)
215/55R17 63.0 (1,602)
Rear tread
205/65R16* 63.8 (1,621)
215/55R17 63.3 (1,609)
Wheelbase 110.4 (2,805)
Items 2.0 GDI
Displacement
cu. in (cc)
121.98 (1,999)
Bore x Stroke
in. (mm)
3.18x3.82 (81x97)
Firing order 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders 4, In-line
* : Only for Hybrid vehicle. Not for Plug-in hybrid vehicle
BBUULLBB WWAATTTTAAGGEE
8-3
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Light Bulb Bulb Type Wattage (W)
Front
Headlamps
Type A
Low HB3 65
High HB3 65
Type B Low/High D3S 35
Turn signal lamps PY28/8W 28
Parking lamps LED LED
Daytime running lights LED LED
Side repeater lamps LED LED
Side marker lamps W5W 5
Rear
Rear combina-
tion lamp
Type A
(Bulb)
Stop/Tail lamps (Outside) P28/8W 28/8
Tail lamp 8W 8
Type B
(LED)
Stop/Tail lamps (Outside) LED LED
Stop/Tail lamps (Inside) LED LED
All
Turn signal lamps PY27W 27
Back up lamps W16 16
High mounted stop lamp LED LED
License plate lamps W5W 5
Interior
Luggage room lamp Festoon 10
Map lamps
with sunroof LED LED
without sunroof W10W 10
Room lamps
with sunroof LED LED
without sunroof Festoon 10
Vanity mirror lamps Festoon 10
8-4
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
TTIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.
CAUTION
Items Tire Size Wheel Size
Inflation pressure
kPa (psi)
Wheel lug nut
torque kgf·m
(lbf·ft, N·m)
Normal Load Maximum Load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
205/65R16* 6.5JX16 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
215/55R17 7.0JX17 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35)
*: Only for Hybrid vehicle. Not for Plug-in hybrid vehicle
• It is permissible to add 3 psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expect-
ed soon.
Tires typically loose 1psi (7kPa) for every 12°F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are
expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you
plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a prop-
er level. (Air inflation per altitude : +2.4 psi/1 mile)
NOTICE
VVOOLLUUMMEE AANNDD WWEEIIGGHHTT
8-5
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.
Items Hybrid Plug-in hybrid
Gross vehicle weight
lbs. (kg)
4,630 (2,100) 4,784 (2,170)
Luggage volume
cu ft (l)
13.42 (380) 9.89 (280)
Items Weight of Volume Classification
Refrigerant
oz. (g)
22.9 ± 0.8 (650 ± 25) R-134a
Compressor lubricant
oz. (cc)
4.59 ± 0.35 (130 ± 10) POE (RB100EV)
8-6
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
RREECCOOMMMMEENNDDEEDD LLUUBBRRIICCAANNTTSS AANNDD CCAAPPAACCIITTIIEESS
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
4.33 US qt. (4.1 l)
API Service SM or above*
3
/ILSAC GF-4 or above
Automatic transmission fluid
6.34 US qt. (6.0 l)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV NOCA ATF SP-IV,
HYUNDAI genuine ATF & SP-IV or other brands meeting the above
specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.
Engine coolant
6.97~7.29 US qt.
(6.6 ~ 6.9 l)
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Phosphate-based ethylene glycol coolant for aluminum radiator)
Inverter coolant
2.38 US qt. (2.26 l)
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Phosphate-based ethylene glycol coolant for aluminum radiator)
Brake fluid
0.74~0.85 US qt.
(0.7~0.8 l)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel
Hybrid
15.85 US gal. (60 l)
Refer to “Fuel Requirements” in the Foreword chapter.
Plug-in hybrid
14.53 US gal. (55 l)
8-7
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain
plug, or dipstick before check-
ing or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in
dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the
engine and other mechanisms
that could be damaged.
CAUTION
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity
engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance,
however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication
in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended
could result in engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be
operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended
oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Engine Oil *
1
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
°C
(°F)
*
1
For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the
engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC
GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your
country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil
viscosity chart.
8-8
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
VVEEHHIICCLLEE CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN
LLAABBEELL
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your car and in all legal matters
pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the passenger seat. To check
the number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s side center pillar gives
the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR ((VVIINN))
OLF084006N
■ VIN label (if equipped)
OLF084001
■ Frame number
OLFH085002N
8-9
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver’s
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your car.
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
The refrigerant label provides infor-
mation such as refrigerant type and
amount.
The label is located on the underside
of the hood.
EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR RREEFFRRIIGGEERRAANNTT LLAABBEELL
((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
TTIIRREE SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN AANNDD
PPRREESSSSUURREE LLAABBEELL
OLFH085007N
OLFH085005N
OLFH084003
8-10
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Eastern Region:
Connecticut, Delaware,
Maine, Massachusetts, New
Hampshire, New Jersey, New York,
Pennsylvania, Rhode Island,
Vermont.
Eastern Region
1122 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831
(800) 633-5151
Southern Region:
Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North
Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia,
West Virginia.
Southern Region
3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway
Suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066
(800) 633-5151
South Central Region:
Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana,
Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma,
Tennessee, Texas.
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400
Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
Central Region:
Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky,
Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska,
North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,
Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.
Central Region
1705 Sequoia Drive Aurora, Illinois
60506
(800) 633-5151
Western Region:
Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California,
Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Nevada,
Oregon, Utah, Washington,
Wyoming.
Western Region
10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box
20850 Fountain Valley, California
92728-0850
(800) 633-5151
CCOONNSSUUMMEERR IINNFFOORRMMAATTIIOONN
This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration of the U.S.Department of Transportation.Your HYUNDAI dealer will help answer any questions you
may have as you read this information.
HYUNDAI motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner’s Manual, particularly the
information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest
HYUNDAI Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:
8-11
88
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI
MOTOR AMERICA.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual prob-
lems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Ave, SE,
West Building Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
RREEPPOORRTTIINNGG SSAAFFEETTYY DDEEFFEECCTTSS
I
Index
I
I-2
A/V mode........................................................................3-98
Air bag warning labels....................................................2-70
Air bags...........................................................................2-47
Additional safety precautions.....................................2-69
Air bag collision sensors ............................................2-63
Air bag inflation conditions .......................................2-65
Air bag non-inflation conditions ................................2-66
Air bag warning labels ...............................................2-70
Curtain air bags ..........................................................2-51
Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger seat..........................................................2-58
Driver's front air bag ..................................................2-49
How does the air bag system operate?.......................2-53
Occupant Classification System (OCS) .....................2-58
Passenger's front air bag.............................................2-49
Side air bags ...............................................................2-50
SRS Care ....................................................................2-68
SRS warning light ......................................................2-53
What to expect after an air bag inflates .....................2-57
Where are the air bags?..............................................2-49
Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision ...............2-63
Air cleaner.......................................................................7-35
Air conditioning system (Refrigerant/Compressor) .........8-5
Air ventilation seats ........................................................2-22
Airconditioning system
Automatic climate control system............................3-138
Occupant Classification System (OCS) ...................3-137
Alarm system ..................................................................3-13
Antenna .............................................................................4-2
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .......................................5-32
Appearance care..............................................................7-94
Exterior care ...............................................................7-94
Interior care ................................................................7-99
Armrest ...........................................................................2-14
Audio/Video/Navigation system (AVN)...........................4-4
Auto door lock/unlock features ......................................3-12
Auto hold ........................................................................5-28
Auto light position ........................................................3-115
Automatic climate control system ................................3-136
Air conditioning .......................................................3-145
Automatic heating and air conditioning...................3-137
Climate control air filter...........................................3-148
Manual heating and air conditioning .......................3-138
Automatic transmission ..................................................5-12
Sports mode................................................................5-15
Automtice transmission shift indicator...........................3-75
AUX, USB and iPod
®
port ...............................................4-2
Index
A
I-3
Backseat pocket ..............................................................2-11
Back-up lamp..................................................................7-91
Battery.............................................................................7-41
Battery saver function...................................................3-121
Before driving ...................................................................5-4
Blind spot detection system (BSD) ................................5-48
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Hands-Free ..................4-4
Brake fluid ......................................................................7-33
Brake system...................................................................5-19
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)...................................5-32
Auto hold....................................................................5-28
Disc brakes wear indicator.........................................5-20
Electric parking brake (EPB) .....................................5-22
Braking system
Electronic stability control (ESC) ..............................5-34
Foot parking brake .....................................................5-20
Hill-start assist control (HAC) ...................................5-39
Power brakes ..............................................................5-19
Vehicle Stability Management ...................................5-38
Bulb replacement ............................................................7-80
Bulb wattage .....................................................................8-3
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button..................5-5
California perchlorate notice ........................................7-106
Capacities (Lubricants) .....................................................8-6
Care
Exterior care ...............................................................7-94
Interior care ................................................................7-99
Tire care......................................................................7-44
Center console storage..................................................3-154
Central door lock switch.................................................3-10
Certification label .............................................................8-8
Chains
Tire chains ..................................................................5-86
Charging the plug-in hybrid vehicle................................H-4
Checking tire inflation pressure......................................7-46
Child restraint system (CRS)..........................................2-36
Children always in the rear ........................................2-36
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................2-39
Lower anchors and tether for children (LATCH)
system......................................................................2-40
Securing with lap/shoulder belt..................................2-44
Securing with Tether anchors.....................................2-43
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS).................2-37
Child-protector rear door lock ........................................3-12
Climate control air filter......................................3-148, 7-37
Clock .............................................................................3-159
Clothes hanger ..............................................................3-160
I
Index
B C
I-4
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ................3-60
Consumer information ......................................................8-9
Coolant............................................................................7-29
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant ...................................7-29
Cruise control..................................................................5-60
Cup holder.....................................................................3-156
Curtain air bags...............................................................2-51
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination..................................................................3-61
Dashboard, see instrument cluster ..................................3-60
Day/night rearview mirror ..............................................3-19
Daytime running light...................................................3-122
Defogging (Windshield) ...............................................3-150
Defroster (Rear window) ..............................................3-135
Defrosting (Windshield) ...............................................3-150
Digital speedometer ......................................................3-109
Dimensions .......................................................................8-2
Disc brakes wear indicator .............................................5-20
Display illumination, see instrument panel
illumination..................................................................3-61
Displays, see instrument cluster .....................................3-60
Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger seat ..............................................................2-62
Door courtesy lamp.......................................................3-126
Door locks.........................................................................3-9
Auto door lock/unlock features..................................3-12
Central door lock switch ............................................3-10
Child-protector rear door lock....................................3-12
Drinks holders, see cup holders....................................3-156
Drive mode integrated control system (Hybrid).............5-41
Drive mode integrated control system
(Plug-in hybrid) ...........................................................5-43
Driver assis system
Rear parking assist system (RPAS)..........................3-121
Rear view camera.....................................................3-130
Driver position memory system .....................................3-14
Driver's front air bag.......................................................2-49
Driving at night...............................................................5-82
Driving in flooded areas .................................................5-83
Driving in the rain...........................................................5-83
Driving the hybrid/plug-in hybrid vehicle.....................H-22
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) ......................................3-20
Electric parking brake (EPB)..........................................5-22
Electric power steering (EPS).........................................3-16
Electronic stability control (ESC)...................................5-34
Emergency fuel filler door release..................................3-53
Emission control system ...............................................7-102
Engine specification..........................................................8-2
Index
D
E
I-5
Engine compartment..................................................1-6, 7-3
Engine compartment panel fuse .....................................7-62
Engine coolant ................................................................7-29
Engine Coolant Temperature gauge................................3-61
Engine number..................................................................8-9
Engine oil........................................................................7-27
Engine start/stop button ....................................................5-5
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items.................7-24
Exterior care....................................................................7-94
Exterior overview (front)..................................................1-2
Exterior overview (rear) ...................................................1-3
Flat tire (with Tire Mobility kit) .....................................6-15
Floor mat anchor(s).......................................................3-161
Fluid
Brake fluid..................................................................7-33
Washer fluid ...............................................................7-34
Folding rear seats............................................................2-12
Folding the side view mirror ..........................................3-36
Foot parking brake..........................................................5-20
Forward collision warning system (FCWS) ...................5-45
Front lamp.....................................................................3-124
Front seats .........................................................................2-6
Fuel Economy ...............................................................3-107
Fuel filler lid
Emergency fuel filler door release .............................3-53
Fuel filler lid (Hybrid) ....................................................3-53
Fuel filler lid (Plug-in hybrid) ........................................3-56
Fuel Gauge......................................................................3-64
Fuel requirements .............................................................F-7
Fuse switch .....................................................................7-62
Fuses ...............................................................................7-60
Instrument panel fuse .................................................7-61
Engine compartment panel fuse.................................7-62
Fuse switch.................................................................7-62
Fuse/relay panel description.......................................7-64
Main fuse....................................................................7-63
Multi fuse ...................................................................7-63
Gauges.............................................................................3-62
Glove box......................................................................3-154
Glove box lamp.............................................................3-124
I
Index
F
G
I-6
Hazard warning flasher.....................................................6-2
Hazardous driving conditions .........................................5-81
Head restraints ................................................................2-16
Headlamp bulb replacement ...........................................7-81
Headlamp delay function..............................................3-121
Headlamp position ........................................................3-116
Heated steering wheel.....................................................3-17
Heater
Automatic climate control system............................3-137
Manual climate control system ................................3-138
HEV (Hybrid Electric Vehicle) system............................H-2
High - beam operation ..................................................3-117
High mounted stop lamp.................................................7-92
Highway driving .............................................................5-84
Hill-start assist control (HAC)........................................5-39
Hood................................................................................3-46
Horn ................................................................................3-18
How to use this manual ....................................................F-6
Hybrid Battery SOC (State of Charge) Gauge ...............3-63
Hybrid starter and generator belt (HSG belt) .................7-32
Hybrid System Gauge.....................................................3-62
If an accident occurs .......................................................6-26
If the engine overheats......................................................6-7
If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad or crossing..................6-2
If the vehicle stalls while driving .....................................6-2
If the vehicle will not start................................................6-3
If you have a flat tire ......................................................6-15
If you have a flat tire while driving..................................6-3
Immobilzer system............................................................3-8
Improtant safety precautions.............................................2-2
Air bag hazards ............................................................2-2
Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2
Control your speed .......................................................2-3
Driver distraction..........................................................2-2
Keep your vehicle in safe condition.............................2-3
Restrain all children .....................................................2-2
In case of emergency while driving..................................6-2
Indicator lights (Instrument cluster) ...............................3-67
Information Mode ...........................................................3-98
Inside rearview mirror ....................................................3-19
Instrument cluster ...........................................................3-60
Automtice transmission shift indicator ......................3-75
Gauges ........................................................................3-62
Instrument panel illumination ....................................3-61
LCD Display Control .................................................3-96
Index
H I
I-7
Instrument panel fuse......................................................7-61
Instrument panel overview ...............................................1-5
Interior care.....................................................................7-99
Interior features.............................................................3-156
Clock ........................................................................3-159
Clothes hanger..........................................................3-160
Cup holder ................................................................3-156
Floor mat anchor(s) ..................................................3-161
Power outlet..............................................................3-157
Side curtain...............................................................3-162
Sunvisor....................................................................3-157
Interior lamp AUTO cut................................................3-124
Interior light bulb replacement .......................................7-92
Interior lights.................................................................3-124
Door courtesy lamp ..................................................3-126
Front lamp ................................................................3-124
Glove box lamp ........................................................3-124
Interior lamp AUTO cut ...........................................3-124
Rear lamp .................................................................3-126
Room lamp ...............................................................3-125
Trunk room lamp......................................................3-126
Vanity mirror lamp ...................................................3-127
Interior overview...............................................................1-4
Jump starting.....................................................................6-4
Keys ..................................................................................3-3
Smart key......................................................................3-3
Label
Air bag warning labels ...............................................2-70
Label
Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-50
Label
Tire specification and pressure label............................8-9
Vehicle certification label.............................................8-8
Lane departure warnings system (LDWS) .....................5-56
LCD display....................................................................3-95
A/V mode ...................................................................3-98
Information Mode ......................................................3-98
LCD modes ................................................................3-95
Trip computer modes..................................................3-96
Turn by turn (TBT) mode ..........................................3-97
User settings mode ...................................................3-100
Warning Messages......................................................3-80
LCD Display Control......................................................3-96
LCD modes .....................................................................3-95
License plate light bulb replacement..............................7-92
I
Index
K
L
J
I-8
Light ..............................................................................3-115
Auto light position....................................................3-115
Battery saver function ..............................................3-121
Daytime running light ..............................................3-122
Headlamp delay function .........................................3-121
Headlamp position....................................................3-116
High - beam operation..............................................3-117
Interior lights ............................................................3-124
Parking lamp position...............................................3-116
Smart high beam.......................................................3-117
Turn signals ..............................................................3-120
Welcome system.......................................................3-123
Light bulbs ......................................................................7-80
Lubricants and capacities..................................................8-6
Luggage net holder .......................................................3-162
Main fuse ........................................................................7-63
Maintenance
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............7-24
Maintenance services ...................................................7-4
Owner maintenance......................................................7-5
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-50
Maintenance schedule.......................................................7-8
Maintenance under severe usage conditions..............7-22
Normal maintenance schedule .....................................7-9
Maintenance services........................................................7-4
Mirrors ............................................................................3-19
Day/night rearview mirror..........................................3-19
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)..................................3-20
Folding the side view mirror......................................3-36
Inside rearview mirror................................................3-19
Reverse parking aid function .....................................3-37
Side view mirror.........................................................3-34
Moonroof, see panoramic sunroof..................................3-42
Multi box.......................................................................3-155
Multi fuse........................................................................7-63
Multimedia system
Antenna ........................................................................4-2
Audio/Video/Navigation system (AVN) ......................4-4
AUX, USB and iPod
®
port ..........................................4-2
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Hands-Free..............4-4
Steering wheel audio control........................................4-3
Index
M
I-9
Odometer.........................................................................3-65
Oil (Engine) ....................................................................7-27
Outside temperature gauge .............................................3-65
Owner maintenance ..........................................................7-5
Panoramic sunroof ..........................................................3-42
Parking brake ..................................................................7-34
Parking lamp position ...................................................3-116
Passenger’s front air bag.................................................2-49
PHEV (Plug-in electric vehicle) system..........................H-3
Plug-in hybrid mode indicator........................................3-63
Power brakes...................................................................5-19
Power outlet ..................................................................3-157
Power window lock button .............................................3-41
Rear combination light bulb replacement.......................7-87
Rear lamp......................................................................3-126
Rear parking assist system (RPAS) ..............................3-131
Rear seats ........................................................................2-12
Rear view camera .........................................................3-130
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...................7-45
Recommended lubricants and capacities..........................8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number.........................8-7
Replacement light bulb ...................................................7-81
Back-up lamp .............................................................7-91
High mounted stop lamp ............................................7-92
Interior light bulb replacement...................................7-92
License plate light bulb replacement .........................7-92
Reporting safety defects .................................................8-10
Reverse parking aid function..........................................3-37
Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-81
Room lamp....................................................................3-125
Rotation (Tire) ................................................................7-47
I
Index
P
RO
I-10
Safety messages................................................................F-6
Safety precautions for hybrid system ............................H-42
Scheduled maintenance service ........................................7-8
Seat belts .........................................................................2-24
Additional seat belt safety precautions ......................2-32
Care of seat belts ........................................................2-35
Height adjustment ......................................................2-26
Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................2-29
Rear center seat belt ...................................................2-32
Seat belt restraint system............................................2-26
Seat belt safety precautions........................................2-24
Seat belt warning light ...............................................2-25
Seat warmers...................................................................2-20
Seats ..................................................................................2-4
Air ventilation seats....................................................2-22
Armrest.......................................................................2-14
Backseat pocket ..........................................................2-11
Folding rear seats .......................................................2-12
Front seats ....................................................................2-6
Head restraints............................................................2-16
Rear seats....................................................................2-12
Safety precautions ........................................................2-5
Seat warmers ..............................................................2-20
Shift lock system.............................................................5-16
Shift-lock release ............................................................5-16
Side air bags....................................................................2-50
Side curtain ...................................................................3-162
Side view mirror .............................................................3-34
Smart cruise control system............................................5-65
Smart high beam ...........................................................3-117
Smart key ..........................................................................3-3
Smart trunk .....................................................................3-50
Smooth cornering............................................................5-82
Snow tires .......................................................................5-85
Special driving conditions ..............................................5-81
Driving at night ..........................................................5-82
Driving in flooded areas.............................................5-83
Driving in the rain ......................................................5-83
Hazardous driving conditions ....................................5-81
Highway driving.........................................................5-84
Rocking the vehicle....................................................5-81
Smooth cornering .......................................................5-82
Speedometer....................................................................3-62
Sports mode ....................................................................5-15
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ...................6-3
Index
S
I-11
Steering wheel.................................................................3-16
Electric power steering (EPS) ....................................3-16
Heated steering wheel ................................................3-17
Horn............................................................................3-18
Telescope steering ......................................................3-17
Tilt steering.................................................................3-17
Steering wheel audio control ............................................4-3
Storage compartment ....................................................3-154
Center console storage .............................................3-154
Glove box .................................................................3-154
Multi box ..................................................................3-155
Sunglass holder ........................................................3-155
Sunglass holder .............................................................3-155
Sunroof, see panoramic sunroof .....................................3-42
Sunvisor ........................................................................3-158
Telescope steering...........................................................3-17
Theft-alarm system .........................................................3-13
Tilt steering .....................................................................3-17
Tire chains.......................................................................5-86
Tire Mobility kit..............................................................6-15
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ........................6-9
Tire rotation ....................................................................7-47
Tire specification and pressure label ................................8-9
Tires and wheels .............................................................7-44
Checking tire inflation pressure .................................7-46
Low aspect ratio tires .................................................7-58
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...............7-45
Tire care......................................................................7-44
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-50
Tire replacement.........................................................7-48
Tire rotation ................................................................7-47
Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-50
Tire traction ................................................................7-49
Wheel alignment and tire balance..............................7-48
Wheel replacement.....................................................7-48
Towing ............................................................................6-22
Trailer towing..................................................................5-95
Transmission
Automatic transmission..............................................5-12
Shift lock system ........................................................5-16
Shift-lock release........................................................5-16
Trip A/B ........................................................................3-106
Trip computer................................................................3-105
Trip A/B....................................................................3-106
Fuel Economy ..........................................................3-107
Digital speedometer..................................................3-109
Trunk ...............................................................................3-47
Smart trunk.................................................................3-50
Trunk room lamp ..........................................................3-126
Turn by turn (TBT) mode ...............................................3-97
Turn signals...................................................................3-120
I
Index
T
I-12
User settings mode........................................................3-100
Vanity mirror lamp........................................................3-127
Vehicle break-in process...................................................F-9
Vehicle certification label .................................................8-8
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ...........F-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)................................8-8
Vehicle load limit............................................................5-90
Vehicle Stability Management........................................5-38
Volume and weight ...........................................................8-5
Warning lights (Instrument cluster) ................................3-67
Warning Messages (LCD display)..................................3-80
Washer fluid ....................................................................7-34
Welcome system ...........................................................3-123
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..................................7-48
Wheel replacement .........................................................7-48
Windows .........................................................................3-38
Power window lock button ........................................3-41
Windshield defrosting and defogging...........................3-150
Windshield washers ......................................................3-129
Windshield wipers.........................................................3-128
Winter driving .................................................................5-85
Snow tires...................................................................5-85
Tire chains ..................................................................5-86
Winter precautions......................................................5-84
Winter precautions ..........................................................5-84
Wiper blades ...................................................................7-39
Wipers and washers ......................................................3-128
Windshield washers..................................................3-129
Windshield wipers ....................................................3-128
Index
U
V
W
HHyybbrriidd ssyysstteemm qquuiicckk rreeffeerreennccee
HEV (Hybrid electric vehicle) system . . . . . . . 2
Hybrid Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
PHEV (Plug-in electric vehicle) system . . . . . 3
Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Charging the plug-in hybrid vehicle . . . . . . . . 4
Charging Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Charging Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Charging Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Charging Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Scheduled Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Charging Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Normal Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Charging Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Trickle Charger (Stage-1 type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Starting the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Driving the hybrid/plug-in hybrid vehicle . . 22
Starting the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Hybrid system gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Changing plug-in hybrid mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Energy flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Safety precautions for hybrid system . . . . . 41
High Voltage Battery System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Safety Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
High Voltage Battery Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
If an accident occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
When the hybrid vehicle shuts off . . . . . . . . . . . 47
H2
Hybrid Vehicle
HHEEVV ((HHYYBBRRIIDD EELLEECCTTRRIICC VVEEHHIICCLLEE)) SSYYSSTTEEMM
The HYUNDAI Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) uses both the gasoline engine and the electric motor for power.The elec-
tric motor is run by a high-voltage HEV battery.
Depending on the driving conditions, the HEV computer selectively operates between the engine and the electric motor
or even both at the same time.
Fuel efficiency increases when the engine is off at idle, or when the vehicle is driven by the electric motor with the HEV
battery.
The HEV battery charge must be maintained, so at times the engine will come on even at idle to act as a generator.
Charging also occurs when decelerating or by regenerative braking.
OLFH054001
Startup/Low speed cruise
Electric motor
Acceleration
Electric motor + Engine
High speed cruise
Engine
Deceleration
Charging
Stop
Engine OFF
H3
PPHHEEVV ((PPLLUUGG--IINN EELLEECCTTRRIICC VVEEHHIICCLLEE)) SSYYSSTTEEMM
Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle
The HYUNDAI Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) shares the characteristics of both a conventional hybrid elec-
tric vehicle and an all-electric vehicle.
When used as a conventional hybrid electric vehicle, the HEV computer selectively operates between the engine and
the electric motor or even both at the same time.
When it is operating in the electric vehicle mode, the vehicle is driven only using the electric motor over a certain dis-
tance until the hybrid battery becomes low. The driving distance in EV mode depends on customer driving style and
road conditions. Aggressive driving maneuvers may at times temporarily enable the engine to operate for maximum
power.
The hybrid battery can be fully charged by connecting a plug to an external electric power source.
OLFP055001
Electric Vehicle Mode
Startup/Low speed
Acceleration High speed Deceleration External charging
Electric motor
CD (Charge Depleting) Mode
CS (Charge Sustaining) Mode
Charging
Motor Engine+Motor Engine+Motor
Charging
Battery charging
6
H4
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE
Charging Information
• Normal Charger (Stage-2 type):The
plug-in hybrid vehicle is charged by
plugging into a normal charger
installed in your home or a public
charging station. (For further details,
refer to the 'Normal Charge'.)
• Trickle Charger (Stage-1 type):The
plug-in hybrid vehicle can be
charged by using household elec-
tricity.
The electrical outlet in your home
must comply with regulations and
can safely accommodate the
Voltage / Current (Amps) / Power
(Watts) ratings specified on the
trickle charge.
Charging Time
• Normal Charger (Stage-2 type):
Takes about 2-3 hours at room tem-
perature (Can be charged to 100%.).
Depending on the condition and
durability of the high-voltage battery,
charger specifications, and ambient
temperature, the time required for
charging the high-voltage battery
may vary.
Charging Types
Category
Charging Inlet
(Vehicle)
Charging Connector Charging Outlet Charging Method Charging Time
Normal
Charger
(Stage-2 type)
Normal charger
installed in homes
or public charging
stations
Approximately 2-3
hours (to fully charge
the plug-in hybrid vehi-
cle, 100%)
Trickle
Charger
(Stage-1 type)
Household current
An actual charger image and a charging method may vary in accordance with the charger manufacturers.
OLFP0Q5005K
OLFP0Q5006K
OLFP0Q5006K
OLFP0Q5008K
OLFP0Q4057N
OLFP0Q5005K
H5
Charging Status
You can monitor the charging status
outside of the vehicle when charging
the high-voltage battery.
Scheduled Charging
(if equipped)
• You can set-up a charging sched-
ule for your vehicle through the
Blue Link AVN control unit.
Refer to the Multimedia manual or
the Blue Link manual for detailed
information about setting sched-
uled charging.
• Scheduled charging can only be
done when using a normal charger
or the portable charging cable
(ICCB: In-Cable Control Box).
OLFP0Q5009K
Charging Status Indicator
Charging in
progress
Illuminates (green)
Fully charged Off
Scheduled charging
Blinks (green) and
then turns off
Malfunction Blinks (red)
H6
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
• When scheduled charging is set
and the normal charger or the
portable charging cable (ICCB: In-
Cable Control Box) is connected
for charging, the indicator lamp
blinks (for 3 minutes) to indicate
that scheduled charging is set.
• When scheduled charging is set,
charging is not initiated immediate-
ly when the normal charger or
portable charging cable (ICCB: In-
Cable Control Box) is connected.
When immediate charging is
required, use the AVN to deacti-
vate the scheduled charge setting.
Charging Precautions
OLFP0Q4057N
■ Normal Charger (Stage-2 type)
Fires caused by dust or water
Do not connect the charging
cable connector plug to the vehi-
cle if there is water or dust on the
charging inlet. Connecting while
there is water or dust on the
charging cable connector and
plug may cause a fire or electric
shock.
WARNING
OLFP0Q5009K
H7
• Comply with the following in order
to prevent electrical shock when
charging:
– Use a waterproof charger
– Make sure to not touch the
charging connector and charging
plug when your hand is wet
– Do not charge when there is
lightning
– Do not charge when the charging
connector and plug is wet
Touching the charging connec-
tor
Do not to touch the charging con-
nector, charging plug, and the
charging inlet when connecting
the cable to the charger and the
charging inlet on the vehicle.
Doing so may result in electrocu-
tion.
WARNING
Interference with electronic med-
ical devices
When using medical electric
devices such as an implantable
cardiac pacemaker, make sure to
ask the medical team and manu-
facturer whether charging your
electric vehicle will impact the
operation of the medical devices.
In some instances, electromag-
netic waves that are generated
from the charger can seriously
impact medical electric devices
such as an implantable cardiac
pacemaker.
WARNING
H8
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
• Always keep the charging connec-
tor and charging plug in clean and
dry condition. Be sure to keep the
charging cable in a condition
where there is no water or mois-
ture.
• Make sure to use the designated
charger for charging the vehicle.
Using any other charger may
cause failure.
• Before charging the battery, turn
the vehicle OFF.
• Be careful not to drop the charging
connector.The charging connector
can be damaged.
Cooling fan
Do not touch the cooling fan
while vehicle is charging. When
the vehicle is switched OFF
while charging, the cooling fan
inside the motor compartment
may automatically operate.
WARNING
Charging cable
• Immediately stop charging
when you find abnormal
symptoms (smell, smoke).
• Replace the charging cable if
the cable coating is damaged
to prevent electrical shock.
• When connecting or removing
the charging cable, make sure
to hold the charging connec-
tor handle and charging plug.
If you pull the cable itself
(without using the handle),the
internal wires may disconnect
or get damaged.This may lead
to electric shock or fire.
WARNING
H9
Normal Charge
You can charge your vehicle by plug-
ging into a public charger at a charg-
ing station.
How to Connect Normal
Charger
1.Depress the brake pedal and
apply the parking brake.
2.Turn OFF all switches, move the
shift lever to P (Park), and turn
OFF the vehicle.
3. Open the charging door by press-
ing it.
Information
The charging door does not open
when the theft alarm system is armed.
4. Open the charging inlet cover (1).
Information
To open the charging inlet cover, all
vehicle doors must be unlocked. When
the doors are locked, the charging
inlet cover will not open.
i
i
OLFP0Q5012K
OLFP0Q5014K
OLFP0Q4057N
■ Normal Charger (Stage-2 type)
H10
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
5. Remove any dust on the charging
connector and charging inlet.
6. Hold the charging connector han-
dle. Then, insert it into the charg-
ing inlet, until you hear a click
sound.If it is not fully connected, a
bad connection between the
charging connector and the charg-
ing terminals may cause a fire.
7. Check if the charging cable con-
nection indicator of the high volt-
age battery in the instrument clus-
ter is turned ON.
Charging does not occur when the
indicator is OFF. When the charg-
ing connector is not connected
properly, reconnect the charging
cable to charge.
Information
• The charging is in progress only
with the shift lever is in P (Park).
Charging the battery with the
Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC position is possible. However,
it may discharge the 12-V battery.
Thus, if possible, charge the battery
with the Engine Start/Stop button in
the OFF position.
• Moving the shift lever from P (Park)
to R (Reverse)/N(Neutral)/D (Drive)
stops the charging process.
To restart the charging process,
move the shift lever to P (Park),
press the Engine Start/Stop button
to the OFF position, and disconnect
the charging cable. Then, connect
the charging cable.
i
OLFP0Q5015K OLFP046575N
H11
8. After charging has started, the
estimated charging time is dis-
played on the instrument cluster
for about 1 minute. It is also dis-
played, when the driver’s door is
opened with charging in progress.
When scheduled charging is set,
the estimated charging time is dis-
played as “--" .
Unlock Charging Door in
Emergency
If the charging door does not open
due to battery discharge, open the
hood and slightly pull the emergency
cable as shown above. The charging
door will then open.
Charging Status
Checking Charging Status
You can monitor the charging status
outside of the vehicle when charging
the high-voltage battery.
OLFP075118
OLFP045260N
OLFP0Q5009K
H12
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
How to Disconnect Normal
Charger
1. The vehicle doors must be unlocked
in order to be able to disconnect the
charging connector. A lock system
prevents charger cable disconnec-
tion when the vehicle's doors are
locked.
In order to disconnect the charg-
ing connector, unlock the doors to
unlatch the charging connector
lock system. If not, the charging
connector and the vehicle's charg-
ing inlet may be damaged.
2. Hold the charging connector han-
dle and pull it while pressing the
release button (1).
When disconnecting the charging
connector, do not try to discon-
nect it by force while not pressing
the release button.This may dam-
age the charging connector and
vehicle charging inlet.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OLFP0Q5016K
Charging Status Indicator
Charging in
progress
Illuminates (green)
Fully charged Off
Scheduled charging
Blinks (green) and
then turns off
Malfunction Blinks (red)
H13
3. Make sure to securely close the
charging inlet cover.
4. Make sure to securely close the
charging door.
• Do not modify or disassemble
the charging cable components.
It may cause a fire or an electric
shock with personal injury.
• Keep the charging connector
and the charging plug clean and
dry. The charging cable should
be also kept dry.
• Use an air gun to blow any for-
eign substances from the charg-
ing connector and the charging
plug.
Trickle Charger (Stage-1 type)
Trickle charger Stage-1 type can be
used if Normal Charger stage-2 type
is unavailable.
NOTICE
OLFP0Q5019K
Charging Connector
Charging Cable
Control Box
Cord and Plug
(cord set)
OLFP0Q5017K
H14
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
How to Connect Portable
Charging Cable
(ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)
1. Turn OFF all switches, move the
shift lever to P (Park), and turn
OFF the vehicle.
2. Connect the plug to a household
electric outlet.
3. Check if all LED lamps on the con-
trol box blinks for 0.5 seconds.
Then, check if the power lamp
(green) turns ON.
4. Depress the brake pedal and
apply the parking brake.
5. Open the charging door by press-
ing it.
Information
The charging door does not open
when the theft alarm system is armed.
i
OLFP0Q5022K OLFP0Q5012K
OLFP046585N
H15
6. Open the charging inlet cover (1).
Information
To open the charging inlet cover, all
vehicle doors must be unlocked. When
the doors are locked, the charging
inlet cover will not open.
7. Remove any dust on the charging
connector and charging inlet.
8. Hold the charging connector han-
dle. Then, insert it into the charg-
ing inlet, until you hear a click
sound. If it is not fully connected,
improper connection between the
charging connector and the charg-
ing terminals are a potential fire
hazard.
9. Charging starts automatically.
Check if the power lamp and charg-
ing lamp (orange) are ON.
i
OLFP0Q5015K OLFP0Q5022KOLFP0Q5014K
H16
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
10. Check if the charging cable con-
nection indicator of the high volt-
age battery in the instrument
cluster is turned ON.
Charging does not occur when
the indicator is OFF. When the
charging connector is not con-
nected properly, reconnect the
charging cable to charge.
Information
• The charging is in progress only
with the shift lever is in P (Park).
Charging the battery with the
Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC position is possible. However,
it may discharge the 12-V battery.
Thus, if possible, charge the battery
with the Engine Start/Stop button in
the OFF position.
• Moving the shift lever from P (Park)
to R (Reverse)/N(Neutral)/D (Drive)
stops the charging process.
To restart the charging process,
move the shift lever to P (Park),
press the Engine Start/Stop button
to the OFF position, and disconnect
the charging cable. Then, connect
the charging cable and restart the
vehicle again.
11. After charging has started, the
estimated charging time is dis-
played on the instrument cluster
for about 1 minute. It is also dis-
played, when the driver’s door is
opened with charging in progress.
When scheduled charging is set,
the estimated charging time is dis-
played as "--".
i
OLFP045260NOLFP046575N
H17
Unlock Charging Door in
Emergency
If the charging door does not open
due to battery discharge, open the
hood and slightly pull the emergency
cable as shown above. The charging
door will then open.
Checking Charging Status
You can monitor the charging status
outside of the vehicle when charging
the high-voltage battery.
OLFP075118
OLFP0Q5009K
Charging Status Indicator
Charging in
progress
Illuminates (green)
Fully charged Off
Scheduled charging
Blinks (green) and
then turns off
Malfunction Blinks (red)
H18
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
Charger Status
Control Box
ON/OFF Status
Power Charge Fault Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure
Initial Preparation Mode
When applying power to the initial ICCB wall
Charging Preparation
Mode
- -
When ICCB charging connector is not connected
to the vehicle, or connected but charging status
is in Standby mode
Charging Mode
-
Charging
Failure
ICCCB failure or
electrical leak-
age detected
-
Stop charging immediately and contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for ICCB check.
-
Category Lamp ON Lamp OFF Blinking
LED Status
-
Charging Status Indicator Lamp for Portable Charging Cable
OLFP0Q5025K
OLFP0Q5024K
OLFP0Q5023K
OLFP0Q5026K
H19
How to Disconnect
PortableCharging Cable
(ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)
1. Before disconnecting the charging
connector, make sure the doors
are unlocked. When the door is
locked, the charging connector
lock system will not allow discon-
nection.
In order to disconnect the charg-
ing connector, unlock the doors to
unlatch the charging connector
lock system. If not, the charging
connector and the vehicle's charg-
ing inlet may be damaged.
2. Hold the charging connector han-
dle and pull it while pressing the
release button (1).
When disconnecting the charging
connector, do not try to discon-
nect it by force while not pressing
the release button.This may dam-
age the charging connector and
vehicle charging inlet.
3. Make sure to securely close the
charging inlet cover.
4. Make sure to securely close the
charging door.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OLFP0Q5016K OLFP0Q5017K
H20
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
5. Disconnect the plug from the
household electric outlet. Do not
pull the cable when disconnecting
the plug.
6. Close the protective cover for the
charging connector so that foreign
material cannot get into the termi-
nal.
7. Put the charging cable inside the
cable compartment to protect it.
Precautions for Portable
Charging Cable
(ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)
• Use the portable charging cable
that is certified by HYUNDAI.
• Do not try to repair, disassemble,
or adjust the portable charging
cable.
• Do not use an extension cord or
adapter.
• Stop using immediately if failure
warning light occurs.
• Do not touch the plug and charging
connector with wet hands.
• Do not touch the terminal part of
the normal charging connector and
the normal charging inlet on the
vehicle.
• Do not connect the charging con-
nector to voltage that does not
comply with regulations.
• Do not use the portable charging
cable if it is worn out, exposed, or
there exists any type of damage on
the portable charging cable.
• If the ICCB case and normal
charging connector is damaged,
cracked, or the wires are exposed
in any way, do not use the portable
charging cable.
• Do not let children operate or touch
the portable charging cable.
• Keep the control box free of water.
• Keep the normal charging connec-
tor or plug terminal free of foreign
substances.
• Do not step on the cable or cord.
Do not pull the cable or cord and
do not twist or bend it.
• Do not charge when there is light-
ning.
• Do not drop the control box or
place a heavy object on the control
box.
OLFP046585N
H21
• Do not place an object that can
generate high temperatures near
the charger when charging.
• Charging with the worn out or dam-
aged household electric outlet can
result in a risk of electric shock. If
you are in doubt to the household
electric outlet condition, have it
checked by a licensed electrician.
• Stop using the portable charging
cable immediately if the household
electric outlet or any components
is overheated or you notice burnt
odors.
H22
DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE
Starting the vehicle
1. Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied.
3. Place the shift lever in P (Park).
With the shift lever in N (Neutral),
you cannot start the vehicle.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton.If the hybrid system starts, the
" " indicator will come on and a
double chime can be heard.
Whether the engine is cold or
warm, it should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
After following the start proce-
dures, " " indicator on the
instrument cluster will turn on.
For more information, please
check Chapter 5.
ECONOMICAL and SAFE OPERA-
TION of Hybrid system
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate and maintain a
steady cruising speed. Do not
make "jack-rabbit" starts. Do not
race between stoplights.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-
sible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear out.
• The regenerative brake generates
energy when the vehicle deceler-
ates.
• When the hybrid battery power is
low, the hybrid system automatical-
ly recharges the hybrid battery.
• When the engine is running with
the shift lever in N (Neutral), the
hybrid system cannot generate
electricity. The hybrid battery can-
not recharge with the shift lever in N
(Neutral).
Information
In the hybrid system, the engine auto-
matically runs and stops. When the
hybrid system operates, the " "
indicator is illuminated.
In the following situation, the engine
may operate automatically.
- When the engine is ready to run
- When the hybrid battery is being
charged
- Depending on the temperature con-
dition of the hybrid battery
i
To avoid serious injury, turn off
hybrid system and be sure " "
indicator is off before working
under hood. Engine may start
unexpectedly.
WARNING
H23
Special features
Hybrid vehicles sound different than
gasoline engine vehicles. When the
hybrid system operates, you may
hear a sound from the hybrid battery
system behind the rear seat. If you
apply the accelerator pedal rapidly,
you may hear an unconventional
sound. When you apply the brake
pedal, you may hear a sound from
the regenerative brake system.
When the hybrid system is turned off
or on, you may hear a sound in the
engine compartment. If you depress
the brake pedal repeatedly when the
hybrid system is turned on, you may
hear a sound in the engine compart-
ment. None of these sounds indicate
a problem.These are normal charac-
teristics of hybrid vehicles.
If any of following occur, it's a normal
condition if you hear a motor sound
in the engine compartment:
- After turning off the hybrid system,
the brake pedal is released.
- When the hybrid system is turned
off, the brake pedal is applied.
- When the driver door is opened.
When the hybrid system is turned
ON, the gasoline engine may acti-
vate or may not. In this situation, you
may feel a vibration. This does not
indicate a malfunction. When the
" " indicator illuminates, the
hybrid system is ready to begin driv-
ing. Even if the engine is off, you can
operate the vehicle as long as the
" " indicator is illuminated.
The hybrid system contains many
electronic components. High volt-
age components, such as cables
and other parts, may emit electro-
magnetic waves. Even when the
electromagnetic cover blocks elec-
tromagnetic emissions, electro-
magnetic waves may have an
effect on electronic appliances.
When your vehicle is not used for
a long period of time, the hybrid
system will discharge.You need to
drive the vehicle several times a
month. We recommend driving at
least for 1 hour or 10 miles. When
the hybrid battery is discharged,
or when it is impossible to jump
start the vehicle, contact your
HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
H24
DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
Virtual Engine Sound System
(VESS)
The Virtual Engine Sound System
generates engine sounds for pedes-
trians to hear vehicle sound because
there is limited sound while electric
power is used.
What Does Regenerative
Braking Do?
It uses an electric motor when decel-
erating and braking and transforms
kinetic energy to electrical energy in
order to charge the high voltage bat-
tery.
Battery
• The vehicle is composed of a high-
voltage battery that drives the
motor and air-conditioner, and an
auxiliary battery (12 V) that drives
the lamps, wipers, and audio sys-
tem.
• The auxiliary battery is automati-
cally charged when the vehicle is in
the ready ( ) mode.
Hybrid system gauge
The hybrid system gauge indicates
whether the current driving condition
is fuel efficient or not.
• CHARGE :
Shows that the energy made by
the vehicle is being converted
to electrical energy. (Regenerated
energy)
• ECO :
Shows that the vehicle is being
driven in an Eco-friendly manner.
• POWER :
Shows that the vehicle is exceeding
the Eco-friendly range.
• When you start the hybrid
system with the shift lever in
P (Park), the " " indicator
illuminates on the instrument
cluster. The driver can drive
the vehicle, even when the
gasoline engine is off.
• When you leave the vehicle,
you should turn OFF the vehi-
cle and place the shift lever in
P (Park). If you depress the
accelerator pedal by mistake,
or when the shift lever is not
in P (Park), the vehicle will
abruptly move, possibly
resulting in serious injury or
death.
WARNING
OLFP045204K
H25
According to the hybrid system
gauge area, the "EV" indicator comes
on or off.
- "EV" indicator ON :Vehicle is driven
using the electric motor or the
gasoline engine is stopped.
- "EV" indicator OFF : Vehicle is driv-
en using the gasoline engine.
Hybrid Battery SOC
(State of Charge) Gauge
This gauge indicates the remaining
hybrid battery power. If the SOC is
near the "L (Low)" level, the vehicle
automatically operates the engine to
charge the battery.
However, if the Service Indicator ( )
and Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
( ) turn on when the SOC (State of
charge) gauge is near the "L (Low)"
level, have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OLFH044205K
OLFP045107
■ Plug-in hybrid model vehicles only
■ Hybrid model vehicles only
H26
DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
Changing plug-in hybrid mode
Pressing the HEV button changes
the plug-in hybrid system modes, as
below.
• Shortly pressed:
EV mode ↔ HEV mode
• Press and hold:
It changes to the HEV-charging
mode.
When the HEV button is pressed in
the HEV-charging mode, the mode
changes as below.
- Shortly pressed : It changes to the
CS mode.
- Press and hold: It remains in the
HEV-charging mode.
Plug-in hybrid mode indicator
• CD (Charge Depleting, Electric) mode
:The high-voltage
(hybrid) battery is
used to drive the
vehicle.
• CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid) mode
:
The high-voltage
(hybrid) battery and
gasoline engine is
used to drive the
vehicle.
• HEV-charging mode
:
Gasoline engine is
used to drive the
vehicle and charge
the high-voltage
(hybrid) battery
A corresponding message is displayed
to indicate the selected mode.
OLFP045065N
OLFP0Q5002K
OLFP0Q5003K
OLFP0Q5004K
OLFP045564N/OLFP045565N/OLFP045566N
H27
Warning and indicator lights
Ready Indicator
This indicator illuminates :
When the vehicle is ready to be driven.
- ON : Normal driving is possible.
- OFF : Normal driving is not possible,
or a problem has occurred.
- Blinking : Limp home driving mode.
When the ready indicator goes OFF
or blinks, there is a problem with the
system. In this case, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Service Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position.
- It normally flashes on momentar-
ily for 3 seconds at Ready On and
should then stay off.
• When there is a problem with the
hybrid vehicle control system or
hardware.
When the warning light illuminates
while driving, or does not go OFF after
starting the vehicle, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
EV Mode Indicator
This indicator illuminates when the
vehicle is driven by the electric motor.
Charging Cable
Connection Indicator
(Plug-in hybrid)
This indicator illuminates in red when
the charging cable is connected.
EV
H28
DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
Regenerative Brake
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates :
When the regenerative brake is not
operating. This causes the Brake
Warning light (red) and Regenerative
Brake Warning Light (yellow) to illu-
minate simultaneously as soon as
possible.
In this case, drive safely and have
your vehicle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
The service brake still function, how-
ever, the operation of the brake pedal
may be more difficult than normal
and the braking distance can
increase.
Warning messages
Check Hybrid system
This warning message is displayed
when there is a problem with the
hybrid control system.
Refrain from driving when the warn-
ing message is displayed.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Check Hybrid system.
Turn off engine.
This warning message is displayed
when there is a problem with the
hybrid system. The " " indicator
will blink and a warning chime will
sound until the problem is solved.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
(yellow color)
(red color)
OLFH044228L
OLFH044248L
H29
Check Hybrid system. Do not
start engine.
This warning message is displayed
when the hybrid battery power
(SOC) level is low. A warning chime
will sound until the problem is solved.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Stop vehicle and check power
supply
This warning message is displayed
when a failure occurs in the power
supply system.
In this case, park the vehicle in a
safe location and tow your vehicle to
the nearest authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the vehicle inspect-
ed.
Stop vehicle to charge battery
This warning message is displayed
when the hybrid battery power
(SOC) level is low.
In this case, park the vehicle in a
safe location and wait until the hybrid
battery is charged.
You can increase the hybrid battery
charging rate by holding the acceler-
ator pedal to the floor with transmis-
sion in P.The engine will rev high but
it will be limited for charging purpose
when you hold the pedal to the floor.
OLFH044240L OLFH044230L
OLFH044232L
H30
DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
Refuel to prevent Hybrid battery
damage
This warning message is displayed
when the fuel tank is nearly empty.
You should refill the fuel tank to pre-
vent hybrid battery damage.
Refill inverter coolant
This warning message is displayed
when the inverter coolant is nearly
empty.
You should refill the inverter coolant.
Stop vehicle and check brakes
This warning message is displayed
when a failure occurs in the brake
system.
In this case, park the vehicle in a safe
location and tow your vehicle to the
nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer
and have the vehicle inspected.
OLFH044234L
OLFH044242L
OLFH044244L
H31
Check brakes
This warning message is displayed
when the brake performance is low
or the regenerative brake does not
work properly due to a failure in the
brake system.
In this case, it may take longer for the
brake pedal to operate and the brak-
ing distance may become longer.
Check Virtual Engine Sound
System
This message is displayed when
there is a problem with the Virtual
Engine Sound System (VESS).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Coasting guide (if equipped)
A chime will sound and the coasting
guide indicator will blink four times to
inform the driver when to take the
foot off from the accelerator by antic-
ipating a decelerating event* based
on the analysis of driving routes and
road conditions of the navigation. It
encourages the driver to remove foot
from the pedal and allow coasting
down the road with EV motor only.
This helps prevent unnecessary fuel
consumption and increases fuel effi-
ciency.
OLFH044543L
OLFH044250L OLFH045254N
H32
DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
❈ Example of a deceleration event is
going down an extended hill, slow-
ing down approaching a toll booth,
and approaching reduced speed
zones.
• User settings
Press the Engine Start/Stop button and put the shift lever in P(Park). In the
User Settings Mode, select Driving Assist, Coasting Guide, and then On to
turn on the system.Cancel the selection of coasting guide to turn off the sys-
tem. For the explanation of the system, press and hold the [OK] button.
• Operation conditions
To activate the system, take the following procedures. Enter your destination
information on the navigation and select the driving route. Select the ECO
mode in the Integrated Driving Control System.Then, satisfy the following.
- The driving speed should be between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 99 mph (160 km/h).
❈ The operating speed may vary due to difference between instrument clus-
ter and navigation effected by tire inflation level.
OLFH044182N/OLFH045556N/OLFP045578N
➜➜
H33
Information
Coasting guide is only a supplemental
system to assist with fuel-efficient driv-
ing. Thus, the operating conditions
may be different in accordance with
traffic/road conditions (i.e. driving in a
traffic jam, driving on a slope, driving
on a curve). Thus, take the actual driv-
ing conditions into consideration, such
as distances from the vehicles ahead/
behind, while referring to the coasting
guide system as guidance.
Unplugging vehicle to start
(Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed when you
start the engine without unplugging
the charging cable. Unplug the
charging cable, and then start the
vehicle.
Remaining time to fully charge
the battery (Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed to notify
the remaining time to fully charge the
battery.
i
OLFP045258N OLFP045260N
H34
DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
Wait until fuel lid opens
(Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed when you
attempt to open the fuel filler door
with the fuel tank pressurized. Wait
until the fuel tank is depressurized.
Information
• It may take up to 20 seconds to open
fuel filler door.
• When the fuel filler door is frozen
and does not open after 20 seconds
at freezing temperature, slightly tap
the fuel filler door and then attempt
to open it.
Ready to refuel
(Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed when the
fuel filler door opens after the fuel
tank is depressurized. If this mes-
sage is displayed, you can refuel the
fuel tank.
i
OLFP045238NOLFP045236N
H35
Check fuel lid
(Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed when the
vehicle is driven with the fuel filler
door opened. Close the fuel filler
door and then start driving.
Shift to P to charge
(Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed when the
charging connector is plugged with
the shift lever in R (Reverse), N
(Neutral) or D (Drive). Move the shift
lever to P (Park) and re-start the
charging process.
EV / HEV/ CHG modes
(Plug-in hybrid)
A corresponding message is displayed
when a mode is selected by pressing
the HEV button
OLFP045563NOLFP045252N
OLFP045566N
OLFP045564N/OLFP045565N
H36
DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
Fully charged. Current mode
maintained / Low battery.
Maintaining current mode
(Plug-in hybrid)
A corresponding message is dis-
played when the high-voltage
(hybrid) battery is fully charged or
nearly discharged.
Charge complete!
Change to hybrid mode
(Plug-in hybrid)
The message is displayed when the
high-voltage (hybrid) battery is fully
charged, and when the mode is
changed to the HEV mode.
Low/High System Temp.
Maintaining hybrid mode
(Plug-in hybrid)
A corresponding message is dis-
played when the temperature of the
high-voltage (hybrid) battery is too
low or too high. This warning mes-
sage is to protect the battery and the
hybrid system.
OLFP045570N/OLFP045571NOLFP045569N
OLFP045567N/OLFP045568N
H37
Low/High System Temp.
Switching to hybrid mode
(Plug-in hybrid)
A corresponding message is dis-
played when the temperature of the
high-voltage (hybrid) battery is too
low or high.This warning message is
to protect the battery and the hybrid
system.
Energy flow
The hybrid system informs the driv-
ers its energy flow in various operat-
ing modes.While driving, the current
energy flow is specified in 11 modes.
Vehicle Stop
The vehicle is stopped.
(No energy flow)
EV Propulsion
Only the motor power is used to drive
the vehicle.
(Battery ➞ Wheel)
OLFP045572N/OLFP045573N
OLFH044214N
OLFH044216N
H38
DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
Power Assist
Both the motor and the engine power
are used to drive the vehicle.
(Battery & Energy ➞ Wheel)
Engine Only Propulsion
Only the engine power is used to
drive the vehicle.
(Engine ➞ Wheel)
Engine Generation
When the vehicle is stopped, the
high-voltage battery is charged up by
the engine.
(Engine ➞ Battery)
OLFH044220NOLFH044218N
OLFH044222N
H39
Regeneration
The high-voltage battery is charged
up by the regenerative brake system.
(Wheel ➞ Battery)
Engine Brake
The engine braking is used to decel-
erate the vehicle.
(Wheel ➞ Engine)
Power Reserve
The engine is simultaneously used to
drive the vehicle and to charge up
the high-voltage battery.
(Engine ➞ Wheel & Battery)
OLFH044220N
OLFH044216N OLFH044224N
H40
DDRRIIVVIINNGG TTHHEE HHYYBBRRIIDD//PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE ((CCOONNTT..))
Engine Generation/Motor Drive
The engine charges up the high-volt-
age battery.The motor power is used
to drive the vehicle.
(Engine ➞ Battery ➞ Wheel)
Engine Generation/Regeneration
The engine and regenerative brake
system charges up the high-voltage
battery.
(Engine & Wheel ➞ Battery)
Engine Brake/Regeneration
The engine braking is simultaneously
used to decelerate the vehicle and to
charge up the high-voltage battery.
(Wheel ➞ Engine & Battery)
OLFH044226NOLFH044226N OLFH044218N
H41
High Voltage Battery System
OLFHQ014002K
OLFHQ014009L
■ HPCU (Hybrid Power Control Unit)
■ High Voltage Battery System
Never touch orange colored or
high voltage labeled compo-
nents, including wires, cables,
and connections.When the insu-
lators or covers are damaged or
removed, severe injury or death
from electrocution may occur.
WARNING
While replacing the fuses in the
engine compartment, never
touch the HPCU.The HPCU car-
ries high voltage. Touching the
HPCU may result in electrocu-
tion, serious injury, or death.
WARNING
In the hybrid system, the hybrid
battery uses high voltage to
operate the motor and other
components. This high voltage
hybrid battery system can be
very dangerous. Never touch the
hybrid system. When you touch
the hybrid battery system, seri-
ous injury or death may occur.
WARNING
• Do not pile up any items in an
area behind the high voltage
battery. In a crash, the battery
may become unstable, or its
performance may degrade.
• Do not apply strong force nor
pile up any items above the
trunk. Such an attempt may
distort the high voltage battery
case, causing a safety problem
or degrading the performance.
(Continued)
CAUTION
SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS FFOORR HHYYBBRRIIDD SSYYSSTTEEMM
H42
OLFHQ014007L
■ Drive Motor
• Do not disassemble the high
voltage motor connector. The
high voltage motor connector
may contain residual high
voltage. Coming in contact
with high voltage may result
in death or serious injury.
• Your vehicle's hybrid system
should only be inspected or
repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
• Do not disassemble or assem-
ble the high voltage battery
system. Doing so may result
in electric shock, causing
death or serious injury.
• If you disassemble or assem-
ble hybrid system compo-
nents improperly, it may dam-
age the performance and reli-
ability of your vehicle.
• If electrolyte comes in contact
with your body, clothes or
eyes, immediately flush with a
large quantity of fresh tap
water. Have your eyes exam-
ined by a doctor as soon as
possible.
WARNING
(Continued)
• Be careful when loading
inflammable liquid in trunk. It
could cause operational and
safety degradation if the liq-
uid leaks and flows in high
voltage battery
SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS FFOORR HHYYBBRRIIDD SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCOONNTT..))
H43
• When the vehicle is paint baked,
do not bake over 30 minutes in
158°F (70°C) or 20 minutes in
176°F (80°C) degree.
• Do not wash the engine compart-
ment, using water. Water may
cause an electric shock and may
damage electronic components.
NOTICE
Never assemble or disassemble
the high voltage battery system.
• If you assemble or disassem-
ble the high voltage battery
system, the durability and per-
formance of the vehicle may be
damaged.
• When you want to check the
high voltage battery system,
have the vehicle checked and
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not touch the high voltage
battery and high voltage cable
connected to motor (orange
color). Severe burns and elec-
tric shock may occur. For your
safety, do not touch the cover
of electronic components and
electronic cable. Do not remove
the cover of electronic compo-
nents and electronic cable. In
particular, never touch the high
voltage battery system when
the hybrid system in operation.
It may result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
• Never use the package mod-
ules (high voltage battery,
inverter and converter) for any
other purpose.
• Do not use an unauthorized
battery charger to charge the
high voltage battery. Doing so
may result in death or serious
injury.
• Never place the high voltage
system near or in a fire.
• Never drill into or strike the
package module. Otherwise, it
may be damaged. An electric
shock may occur, resulting in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
H44
Information
Gradual capacity reduction of the
high voltage battery.
The high voltage Battery capacity
gradually reduces with time and use.
This is natural characteristic of the
high voltage batteries. The extent at
which capacity is reduced changes
drastically depending on the environ-
ment(ambient temperature, etc.) and
usage conditions such as how the vehi-
cle is driven and how the high voltage
battery is charged. Reduction of the
high voltage battery capacity is not
covered under warranty.
Safety Plug
i
OLFHQ014005K
Never touch the safety plug.The
safety plug is attached to high
voltage hybrid battery system.
Touching the safety plug will
result in death or serious injury.
Service personnel should follow
procedures in service manual.
DANGER
(Continued)
• Do not drop water or liquid on
to HPCU, HSG, motor and
fuses.The hybrid system com-
ponents are covered. If you
drop water or liquid on to
hybrid system components, it
may result in electric shock.
This hybrid vehicle uses the
hybrid battery system inverter
and converter to generate high
voltage. High voltage in the hybrid
battery system is very dangerous
and may cause severe burns and
electric shock. This may result in
serious injury or death.
• For your safety, never touch,
replace, disassemble or remove
the hybrid battery system
including components, cables
and connectors. Severe burns
or electric shock may result in
serious injury or death when
you fail to follow this warning.
• When the hybrid battery sys-
tem operates, the hybrid bat-
tery system can be hot. Always
be careful because burns or
electric shock may be caused
by high voltage.
(Continued)
WARNING
SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS FFOORR HHYYBBRRIIDD SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCOONNTT..))
H45
High Voltage Battery Air Intake
Hybrid Vehicle
The high-voltage battery air intake is
located on the bottom of the rear
seats. The air intake cools down the
high-voltage battery. When the high-
voltage battery air intake is blocked,
the high-voltage battery may be
overheated and the vehicle perform-
ance may become limited and set a
hybrid warning lamp. Do not obstruct
the air intake with any other objects.
Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle
The high-voltage battery air intake is
located on the left side of the rear
seats. The air intake cools down the
high-voltage battery.
When the high-voltage battery air
intake is blocked, the high-voltage
battery may be overheated and the
vehicle performance may become
limited and set a hybrid warning
lamp. Do not obstruct the air intake
with any other objects.
OLFP035100
• Never clean the air intake of
the hybrid battery with a wet
cloth. If any water enters in
the air intake of the hybrid
battery, the hybrid battery
may cause an electric shock,
serious damage, injury or
death.
• The hybrid battery is com-
posed of lithium-ion polymer.
If the hybrid battery is improp-
erly handled, it is dangerous
to the environment. Also it
may cause electrical shock
and severe burns, resulting in
serious injury or death.
• Do not spill liquid over the air
intake of the hybrid battery.
Doing so is very dangerous. It
may cause electric shock or
serious injury.
• Do not cover the air intake
with objects.
(Continued)
WARNING
OLFHQ014006K
H46
SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS FFOORR HHYYBBRRIIDD SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCOONNTT..))
If a small scale fire occurs, use
a fire extinguisher (ABC, BC)
that is meant for electrical fires.
If it is impossible to extinguish
the fire in the early stage,
remain a safe distance from the
vehicle and immediately call
911. Also, advise them that a
hybrid vehicle is involved.
If the fire spreads to the high
voltage battery, large amount of
water is needed to put out the
fire. Using small amount of
water or fire extinguishers not
meant for electrical fires could
cause serious injury or death
from electrical shocks.
WARNING
Information
Clean the air intake for the hybrid
battery with a dry cloth on a regular
basis.
If an accident occurs
i
• For your safety, do not touch
high voltage cables, connec-
tors and package modules.
High voltage components are
orange in color.
• Exposed cables or wires may
be visible inside or outside of
the vehicle. Never touch the
wires or cables, because it
can cause an electrical shock,
injury or death may occur.
• Any gas or electrolyte leakage
from your vehicle is not only
poisonous but also flamma-
ble. Upon witnessing one of
those, open the windows, and
remain a safe distance from
the vehicle out of the road.
Immediately contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer and advise
them that a hybrid vehicle is
involved.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Do not put any objects into
the air intake of the hybrid
battery. Doing so may cause
loss of air-intake volume to
the hybrid battery. When the
air intake is blocked with any
objects, immediately contact
your HYUNDAI dealer.
• Never place a container of liq-
uid on or near the air intake. If
the liquid spills, the hybrid
battery located in the trunk
may be damaged.
• Secure all loads in the trunk
to prevent them from being
tossed about before driving. If
a sharp or heavy loads'
impacts or pierce the interior
trunk wall, the hybrid battery
system may be damaged,
deteriorating its performance.
(Continued)
• When the vehicle is severely
damaged, remain a safe dis-
tance of 50 feet (15 meter) or
more between your vehicle and
other vehicles/flammables.
H47
When the hybrid vehicle shuts
off
When the high voltage battery is dis-
charged, when the 12-volt battery is
discharged, or when the fuel tank is
empty, the hybrid system may not
operate while driving. When the
Hybrid system does not operate, do
the followings:
1.Gradually reduce the vehicle
speed. Pull over your vehicle off
the road in a safe area.
2.Locate the shift lever in P (Park).
3.Turn ON the hazard warning flashers.
4.Turn OFF the Engine Start/Stop
button, and try to start the hybrid
system, while depressing the
brake pedal and pressing the
Engine Start/Stop button.
5.When the hybrid system still does
not operate, refer to "EMERGENCY
STARTING" in the chapter 6.
Before jump-starting the vehicle,
check the fuel level and the exact
procedure to jump start. For further
details, refer to "EMERGENCY
STARTING" in the chapter 6.When
the fuel level is low, do not attempt
to drive the vehicle only with the
battery power.The high voltage bat-
tery may be discharged, and the
hybrid system will turn OFF.
When a submersion in water
occurs:
When your vehicle is flooded in
water, a high-voltage battery
may cause shock or fires. Thus,
turn the hybrid system OFF, take
the key in your possession and
escape to a safe place. Never
attempt physical contact with
your flooded vehicle.
Immediately contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer and advise
them that a hybrid vehicle is
involved.
WARNING
